THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


B.  0.  BAKER 
LAWYER 


PITMANIC   SHORTHAND 

A  COMPLETE  TEXT-BOOK 
ON  THE  AMERICAN-PITMAN  SYSTEM. 


BY 


SELBY  A.  MORAN, 

Instructor  in  Shorthand,  Ann  Arbor  High  School.     Principal  of  the 
Stenographic  Institute,  Ann  Arbor.    Author  of  "One  Hun- 
dred Valuable  Suggestions  to  Shorthand  Students." 


ANN  ARBOR,  MICH. 

THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS. 

1904. 


COPYRIGHTED  1904 

BY 
SELBY  A.  MORAN. 


i 


THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS,  ANN  ARBOR. 


PREFACE 


On  account  of  the  great  number  of  real  and  imitation  systems 
of  Shorthand  there  certainly  is  no  need  for  another.  There  are 
already  too  many  systems  which  are  nothing  more  than  some  stand- 
ard method  of  writing  Shorthand  slightly  modified  so  as  to  give  the 
promtilgator  an  opportunity  to  pose  as  the  author  of  a  "new"  sys- 
tem. Very  seldom  are  these  so-called  new  systems  any  improve- 
ment over  the  ones  from  which  thev  are  derived.  There  will, 

£2 

5y  doubtless,    continue    to   be   those    who    think    they    have    discovered 

• 

^  wherein  they  can  modify  some  minor  details  in  the  system  of  Short- 

£   hand  which  they  have  learned.     Having  done  this,  they  will  claim 
3  to  have  devised  "a  new  and  greatly  improved  system  of  stenography." 

The  writer  has  no  sympathy  for  such  people. 

5          While  there  is  no  need  for  a  new  system  of  Shorthand  there 

tt   is,  however,   a  great  need   of   improvement   in   the  preparation   of 

^    Shorthand  text-books  and  in  the  methods  of  teaching  the  subject. 

During  the  past  few  decades  there  has  been  a  wonderful  advance  in 

the  methods  of  giving   instruction   in   most  branches   of  education. 

;    Writers  of  Shorthand  text-books  especially  seem  to  have  felt  but 

H    slightly  the  effect  of  this  development  and  have  in  the  presentation 

of  the  subject  often  failed  to  embody  the  best  educational  methods. 

It  is  because   of  the   firm   conviction   that  the   writer   of  this   little 

work  is  able  to  offer  some  new   and,  as  he  believes,  better  ideas 

as   to   the   methods    of   teaching   the    American- Pitman    System    of 

iii 


449532 


iv  PREFACE 

Shorthand  that  he  feels  justified  in  offering  this  work  to  the  public. 
If  it  shall  have  made  the  work  of  acquiring  a  knowledge  of  Short- 
hand more  systematic  as  well  as  more  easy  and  pleasant,  the  end 
sought  will  have  been  gained.  His.  many  years'  experience  as  a 
teacher  of  Shorthand  and  a  careful  study  of  the  best  methods  of 
imparting  instruction  in  this  art  inspire  a  confidence  that  the  publi- 
cation of  this  little  volume  will  not  have  been  in  vain. 

ANN    ARBOR,    MICHIGAN,  THE    AUTHOR. 

September  i,  1904. 


Note. — The  student  should  not  attempt  to  make  too  rapid 
advancement.  A  lesson  is  not  mastered  until  the  student  thor- 
oughly understands  the  principles  explained  in  the  lesson  and  is 
able  to  apply  them  readily  and  correctly  in  writing  the  exercise? 
in  the  lesson.  He  should  also  be  able  to  write  the  wordsigns 
and  phrasesigns  without  the  least  hesitation  and  translate  the 
shorthand  at  the  end  of  each  lesson  as  readily  as  he  could  read 
the  same  matter  in  ordinary  print.  To  do  this  requires  much 
practice.  The  more  practice  given  to  reading  shorthand  the 
better. 

Following  the  last  lesson  in  the  text  is  an  alphabetically  ar- 
ranged list  of  the  wordsigns  and  phrasesigns  in  ordinary  print. 
Following  every  third  word  or  phrase  is  a  blank  line.  It  is  de- 
signed that  the  student,  just  as  soon  as  he  has  committed  each 
list  of  these  signs  in  the  sixth  and  following  lessons  shall  then 
fill  in  the  blanks  for  the  words  which  are  given  in  each  lesson. 
When  the  lessons  are  all  completed,  the  student  will  have  a  com- 
plete alphabetically  arranged  list  of  all  the  abbreviations.  The 
actual  work  of  making  this  list  will  aid  the  student  materially  in 
fixing  these  signs  in  mind.  The  teacher  should  examine  the 
student's  text  from  time  to  time  in  order  to  ascertain  whether 
or  not  he  is  keeping  his  list  made  up  as  he  goes  along. 


INTRODUCTION. 


A  successful  text-book  on  the  subject  of  Shorthand  must  em- 
body certain  recognized  principles  of  the  art  of  teaching,  modified,  of 
course,  to  conform  to  the  peculiarities  of  this  particular  subject.  It 
has  been  the  author's  aim  to  apply  these  principles  as  far  as  possibkx 
in  this  work.  The  general  arrangement  ^f  the  text  is  as  follows : 

First.  A  very  few  of  the  principles  constituting  the  system  are 
introduced  at  a  time,  beginning  with  the  most  elementary. 

Second.  For  convenience  in  class  work  these  principles  are 
divided  into  lessons,  each  lesson  consisting  in  the  introduction  of  a 
very  few  new  principles. 

Third.  With  the  introduction  of  the  principles  in  each  lesson 
is  given  a  most  explicit  and  thorough  explanation  of  their  use. 

Fourth.  Immediately  following  the  explanation  of  the  princi- 
ples are  a  few  carefully  selected  words  illustrating  the  use  of  these 
principles.  These  words  are  given  in  both  Longhand  and  Shorthand. 

Fifth.  Following  these  illustrations  in  each  lesson  is  a  list  of 
words  to  be  written  making  use  of  the  principles  explained  in  the 
lesson.  After  the  student  has  learned  to  form  the  outlines  correctly, 
he  should  write  these  words  over  and  over  again  until  he  is  able 
to  write  them  readily. 

Sixth.  After  the  principle  of  outline  abbreviation  has  been  ex- 
plained, there  are  introduced  in  each  lesson  a  few  abbreviations,  or 
wordsigns,  as  they  are  called  in  Shorthand,  formed  by  abbreviating 
the  consonant  outlines  of  commonly  occurring  words.  These  word- 
signs  should  be  thoroughly  committed  to  memory  and  written  a 
sufficient  number  of  times  to  enable  the  student  to  recognize  the 
word  the  instant  he  sees  its  sign  and  to  recall  the  sign  immediately 
upon  hearing  the  word. 

Seventh.     After  the  principle  of  phrasing  has  been  explained, 
there   are  given  in  each   lesson,   for  the   student's   practice,   a   tew 
commonly  occurring  phrases,  the  words  of  which  embrace  the  use . 
of  the  principles  and  wordsigns  in  that  and  preceding  lessons. 

Eighth.  Except  in  the  first  few  lessons,  there  are  introduced 
in  each  lesson  a  few  brief  sentences  for  practice.  As  soon  as 
a  sufficient  number  of  the  principles  have  been  given,  these  sen- 

v 


vi  INTRODUCTION 

tences  take  the  form  of  letters  since  the  student  has  especial  need 
of  practice  upon  this  form  of  composition.  The  sentences  and 
letters  in  each  lesson  are  composed  of  words  so  selected  that  they 
embody,  as  far  as  possible,  a  review  of  the  principles  in  all  the 
preceding  lessons.  At  the  same  time  no  word  is  ever  introduced 
until  the  principles,  by  which  it  is  written  in  its  briefest  form,  have 
been  explained.  The  stuttent,  therefore,  never  has  occasion  to  write 
a  word  in  but  one  way  and  that  with  the  briefest  possible  outline. 
The  carrying  out  of  this  idea  necessarily  restricts  the  author  in  the 
construction  of  sentences  for  the  student's  practice,  making  it  im- 
possible in  a  few  instances  in  the  early  lessons,  to  give  for  practice 
sentences  with  the  best  possible  wording.  In  order  to  give  the  stu- 
dent further  practice  in  the  proper  phrasing  of  outlines,  the  words 
in  each  exercise  which  in  reporting  should  be  phrased,  are  joined 
by  hyphens  in  the  text.  These  sentences,  like  the  list  words,  word- 
signs  and  phrases,  should  be  written  many  times  by  the  student 
who  should  not  feel  that  he  has  his  lesson  sufficiently  prepared  for 
recitation  until  he  is  able  to  write  the  list  words,  phrases  and  sen- 
tences within  the  time  specified. 

Ninth.  For  the  purpose  of  drill  in  reading  Shorthand  other 
than  one's  own  writing,  there  is  given  at  the  end  of  each  lesson 
after  the  sixth  an  exercise  in  Shorthand  to  translate. 

Tenth.  To  secure  thoroughness,  every  fifth  lesson  consists  of 
a  carefully  prepared  review  of  the  preceding  four  lessons. 

Eleventh.  The  student  should  impress  upon  his  mind  the 
necessity  of  thoroughly  mastering  the,  lesson  in  hand  before  taking 
up  a  new  one. 

Twelfth.  When  the  lessons  have  been  gone  over  once  they 
should  be  thoroughly  reviewed,  giving  especial  attention  to  the 
wordsigns  and  to  practice  on  the  exercises  to  gain  speed.  In  this 
review  work,  the  time  given  for  writing  the  exercises  should  be 
reduced  at  least  one-third.  Following  this  the  student  should  take 
up  miscellaneous  matter  for  speed  practice. 

This  method  of  presenting  the  subject  of  Shorthand  t»  the 
student  is,  in  the  judgment  of  the  author,  the  proper  one.  Years 
of  actual  experience  in  teaching  Shorthand  have  demonstrated  to 
him  its  entire  practicability  and  success. 


LESSON  I. 

THE   ALPHABET,    SEC.    I. 

1.  The  first  work  of  the  student  in  taking  up  the  subject 
of  Shorthand  is  to  thoroughly  familiarize  himself  with  the 
consonant    alphabet    which    forms    the    ground-work    of    a 
Shorthand    education.     The   alphabet   is   divided   into   two 
sections :     1st,  the  straight  letters:  2nd,  the  curved  letters. 

2.  This  lesson  treats  of  the  straight  letters.     They  are 
as  follows : 

\  \    M    /  / ^  / 

Pe          Be  Te    De       Chay    Jay       Kay       Gay        Hay       Ray 

3.  The  names  beneath  the  Shorthand  letters  are  used 
merely  for  convenience  in  referring  to  them. 

4.  Pe  represents  the  ordinary  sound  of  p,  as  in  pat, 
pour,  par. 

5.  Be  is  the  same  as  pe  except  that  be  is  shaded.     Be 
is  used  for  the  ordinary  sound  of  b,  as  in  bat,  bowl,  rob. 

6.  Te  is  used  for  the  usual  sound  of  t  as  in  tap,  tame, 
tip. 

7.  De  is  the  same  as  te  except  that  it  is  shaded.     De 
represents  the  common  sound  of  d,  as  in  date,  done,  lad. 

8.  Chay  represents  the  sound  of  ch,  as  in  check,  cheap, 
ditch. 

9.  Jay  is  the  same  as  chay  except  that  it  is  shaded.     Jay 
represents  the  usual  sound  of  j  and  also  the  soft  sound  of 

I 


2  PITMANIC 

g  which  has  the  same  sound  as  j,  as  in  jam,  gem,  joke, 
rage,  page. 

10.  Kay   represents  the  ordinary   sound  of  k  and  the 
hard  sound  of  c,  as  in  kite,  cake,  coal,  lake. 

11.  Gay  is  the  same  as  kay  except  that  it  is  shaded.    Gay 
represents  the  hard  sound  of  g,  as  in  go,  game,  log,  goal. 

12.  Hay,  which  is  not  shaded,  represents  the  aspirate 
sound   of  h,   as   in   hotel,   hitch,   hub,   behead.     In    such 
words  as  behead,  and  wherever  hay  is  the  second  or  fol- 
lowing stroke  in  an  outline,  the  hook  on  hay  is  formed  by 
retracing  the  preceding  stroke  the  length  of  the  hook,  as 
shown  in  the  illustration  following  in  this  lesson. 

13.  Ray,  which  is  not  shaded,  represents  the  sound  of 
r,  as  in  rug,  rake,  park,  gory. 

14.  Pe,  be,  te,  de,  chay  and  jay  are  always  written 
downward;  hay  and  ray,  upward.     They  are  called  up- 
right letters.     Kay  and  gay  are  always  wrritten  from  left 
to  right.     They  are  called  horizontal  letters. 

15.  Pe,  be,  chay  and  jay  slant  as  shown  in  the  illus- 
trations. 

16.  Te  and   de   should  be  as  nearly  perpendicular  as 
possible. 

17.  Beginners  are  apt  to  slant  te  and  de  slightly,  either 
to  the  left  or  right.     This  causes  trouble   later   when   an 
attempt  is  made  to  read  words  containing  te  or  de  slightly 
slanted  when  they  should  be  perpendicular.     Ray  should 
be  given  a  slightly  greater  slant  than  chay.     This  one  nat- 
urally does  in  writing  this  letter  with  an  upward  stroke. 

18.  In  writing  a  word  in  Shorthand  the  strokes  repre- 
senting the  consonants  in  the  word  form  what  is  called  the 
consonant  outline  of  the  word  and  is  all  that  is  usually 
written.     Thus,  in  the  word  betake,  the  outline  would  be 
be-te-kay ;  in  the  word  uproot,  the  outline  would  be  pe-ray- 


SHORTHAND  3 

te.     The  vowels,  which  are  explained  in  a  subsequent  les- 
son, are  seldom  written  with  the  outline. 

19.  In  writing  an  outline  for  a  word  it  should  be  begun 
so  that  the  first  upright  letter,  whether  written  upward  or 
downward,  will  rest  on  the  line  upon  which  one  is  writing. 
Thus  in  writing  dope,  written  de-pe,  the  de  should  rest  on 
the   line.     This   would   of  necessity   require^  the   pe   to   be 
written  below  the  line,  since,  in  joining  together  the  differ- 
ent consonant  letters  of  a  word,  each  letter  after  the  first, 
begins  where  the  preceding  letter  ends.     For  example,  in 
writing  the  word  deputy,  written  de-pe-te,  the  de  rests 
on  the  line.     The  pe  is  joined  at  the  bottom  of  de  and  goes 
below  the  line.     Te,  the  last  letter  in  the  word,  is  written 
from  the  end  of  pe,  thus  causing  it  to  end  the  length  of  two 
letters  below  the  line. 

20.  When  an  outline  begins  with  either  kay  or  gay,  or 
any  of  the  curved  horizontal  letters,  the  first  letter  should 
be  written  the  length  of  a  te  above  the  line,  if  the  first 
upright  letter  is  written  downwards,  as  in  giddy,  written 
gay-de.     The  outline  should  begin  on  the  line,  if  the  first 
upright  letter  is  written  upward,  as  in  gory,  written  gay- 
ray.     That  is,  an  outline  should  be  begun  so  that  the  first 
upright  letter  in  the  outline,  whether  written  upward  or 
downward,  will  rest  on  the  line. 

21.  Words  consisting  wholly  of  horizontal  letters,  such 
as   keg,   written   kay-gay,   should  be  written  immediately 
above  the  line  upon  which  the  writing  is  being  done,  as  the 
outline  for  keg,  shown  below. 

22.  The  following  illustrations  will  show  how  the  dif- 
ferent letters  in  an  outline  are  joined  and  where  an  outline 
should  be  begun  in  reference  to  the  line  upon  which  one  is 
writing : 


PITMANIC 


hedge   betake   deputy   depot   giddy   gory     keg       behead 

23.  Care  should  be  exercised  in  the  very  beginning  to 
make  a  clear  distinction  between  light  and  shaded  letters. 
Trouble  always  results,  especially  for  the  beginner,  when 
he  attempts  to  read  matter  not  properly  shaded. 

24.  It    is   important   thajt   all   consonant    strokes   be    as 
nearly  uniform  in  length  as  possible.     About  one-sixth  of 
an  inch  is  the  average  length  which  the  most  rapid  reporters 
make  their  letters.     Unless  one  acquires  the  habit  of  writing 
all  the  strokes  of  a  uniform,  length  he  will  have  trouble 
later  when  he  comes  to  the  use  of  half-length  and  double- 
length  letters.     It  is  of  far  less  importance  whether  one 
writes  a  large  or  a  small  hand.     The  important  thing  is 
to  write  all  of  the  letters  as  nearly  the  same  length  as  pos- 
sible. 

25.  In   writing  Shorthand  the  best  results  may  be  ob- 
tained by  holding  the  pen  or  pencil  much  more  nearly  up- 
right than  it  is  usually  held  when  writing  Longhand.     In 
this  position  one  is  less  apt  to  shade  letters  unintentionally. 

26.  The  fact  that  several  words  may  have  the  same  con- 
sonant outline  usually  puzzles  the  beginner.     Thus,  leaving, 
levying,  living  and  loving  are  all  written  with  similar  out- 
lines.    It  rarely  happens  that  where  one  would  make  sense 
any  of  the  others  could  be  used.     When  the  student  reaches 
the  point  where  he  is  able  to  write  complete  sentences,  as 
will  be  possible  after  he  has  taken  a  few  lessons,  he  will 
find  that  with  the  help  of  the  context  all  danger  of  am- 
biguity in  this  respect  will   disappear  without   his  finding 
it  necesary  to  take  time  to  insert  the  vowels. 

27.  Immediately  preceding  the  exercise  in  each  lesson 


SHORTHAND  5 

two  numbers  are  given  in  parentheses.  The  first  gives  the 
number  of  words  in  the  exercise  and  the  second  the  number 
of  minutes  and  seconds  in  which  the  exercise  should  be 
written  by  the  student  as  it  is  read  to  him.  The  student 
should  practice  on  each  exercise  until  he  is  able  to  write  it 
within  the  time  specified.  The  rule  adopted  in  numbering 
the  words  is  the  same  as  that  used  by  telegraph  operators 
in  reckoning  the  number  of  words  in  messages. 

28.  Immediately  following  the  explanation  of  the  prin- 
ciples given  in  each  lesson  there  is  given  a  number  of  words 
called  list  words.     The  student  should  write  the  consonant 
outlines  for  these  words  many  times. 

EXERCISE  i. 

29.  List  Words.     (36 — 1 130. ) 

i  Duck,  2  peck,  3  cake,  4  check,  5  rake,  6  poet,  7  rogue, 
8  ditto,  9  page,  10  rage,  n  body,  12  deputy,  13  go,  14  bake, 
15  gage,  16  bedeck,  17  touch,  18  copy,  19  budge,  20  judge, 
21  pity,  22  age,  23  tuck,  24  wretch,  25  poke,  26  edit,  27  keg, 
28  tub,  29  roach,  30  carriage,  31  carry,  32  wrote,  33  hedge, 
34  rug,  35  wreck,  36  peg. 

30.  After  the  student  has  carefully  committed  to  mem- 
ory the  straight  letters  and  is  able  to  write  each  of  the  above 
words  correctly,  he  should  write  the  entire  list  over  from 
fifty  to  a  hundred  times,  or  until  he  can  write  the  thirty-six 
words  in  a  minute  and  a  half  as  they  are  read  to  him,  and 
he  should  read  over  and  over  again  the  Shorthand  he  has 
written  until  he  is  able  to  read  the  list  of  words  in  the  same 
length  of  time. 

31.  It  will  be  noticed   that  the   Shorthand  illustrations 
and   exercises   throughout   the   text   are    not    formed    with 
mathematical  exactness.     They  are,  rather,  photographic  re- 
productions of  actual  Shorthand  writing.     This  is  done  de- 


6  PITMANIC 

signedly  because  the  large  majority  of  students  find  it  im- 
possible to  make  their  Shorthand  characters  approach  any- 
where near  the  mathematically  exact  Shorthand  engravings 
found  in  most  text-books  on  the  subject.  As  a  result  many 
beginners  become  discouraged  at  their  utter  inability  to 
closely  imitate  the  illustrations  and  give  up  the  study.  By 
giving  illustrations  which  are  photographic  reproductions 
of  actual  Shorthand  work  the  student  finds  it  possible  to 
make  his  characters  approach  more  nearly  those  formed  in 
actual  reporting  and  is  thereby  encouraged  to  go  ahead  and 
master  the  art. 


LESSON  II. 
THE  ALPHABET,  SEC.  n. 

i.  In  addition  to  the  ten  straight  letters  given  in  the 
preceding  lesson,  there  are  fifteen  curved  strokes  represent- 
ing the  remaining  elementary  consonant  sounds.  They  are : 


((   ))  JJ 


Ef     Ve     Ith   The     Es  Ze  Ish   Zhe  Lay  Yea     Ar     Way   Em      En      Ing 

2.  As  explained  in  the  previous  lesson,  the  names  be- 
neath the  letters  are  given  merely  for  convenience  in  refer- 
ring to  them. 

3.  Ef  represents  the  usual  sound  of  f,  as  in  fan,  fate, 
puff,  cuff,  and  also  the  sound  of  f  when  represented  by 
certain  other  letters,  as  gh  in  laugh,  cough,  rough,  and  ph, 
as  in  phantom,  phase,  physic. 

4.  Ve  represents  the  usual  sound  of  v,  as  in  vain,  vacate, 
shave,  vile.     It  is  exactly  like  ef  except  that  it  is  shaded. 

5.  Ith  represents  the  sound  of  th,  as  in  thin,  thigh,  lath, 
wrath. 


SHORTHAND  7 

6.  The  represents  the  sound  of  th,  as  in  them,  that, 
bathe,  though,  breathe.     It  is  exactly  like  ith  except  that 
it  is  shaded. 

7.  Es  represents  trie  usual  sound  of  s,  and  also  the  soft 
sound  of  c,  as  in  assume,  also,  Lucy,  policy. 

8.  Ze  represents  the  sound  of  z  and  also  s  when  it  has 
the  sound  of  z,  as  in  buzz,  phase,  raise,  zone,  Arizona. 
It  is  the  same  as  es  except  that  it  is  shaded. 

9.  Ish  represents  the  usual  sound  of  sh,  as  in  ship,  lash, 
dash,  shame,  cash,  shop. 

10.  Zhe  represents  the  sound  of  s  or  z  in  such  words  as 
measure,  pleasure,  treasure,   seizure.     It  is  the   same  as 
ish  except  that  it  is  shaded. 

11.  Lay  represents  the  usual   sound  of  1,  as  in  lame, 
lake,  lady,  fellow,  pillow,  daily. 

12.  Yea   represents   the   consonant    sound    of   y,   as    in 
yellow,  yes,  yankee,  your.     It  has  the  same  slant  and  curve 
as  lay,  but  yea  is  shaded  while  lay  is  light. 

13.  Ar  (as  well  as  ray)   represents  the  usual  sound  of 
r,  ar  being  used  in  certain  connections  and  ray  in  others. 
The  different  uses  will  be  explained  in  a  subsequent  lesson. 
Ar  is  used  in  such  words  as  ark,  arm,  fair,  pair,  dare. 

14.  Way  represents  the  consonant  sound  of  w,  as  in 
wake,  wade,  wage,  wag.     It  is  exactly  like  ar  except  that 
it  is  shaded. 

15.  Em  represents  the  usual  sound  of  m,  as  in  many, 
fame,  dame,  mug,  gum,  game,  mail. 

1 6.  En  represents  the  usual   sound  of  n,  as  in  name, 
unite,  nick,  knave. 

17.  Ing  represents  the  sound  of  ng,  as  in  going,  doing, 
saving,  and  of  n  when  that  letter  immediately  precedes  k, 
and  in  some  instances  g,  as  in  tank,  bank,  rank,  ankle, 
angle,  tangle,  wrangle.     It  is  exactly  like  en  except  that  it 


8  PITMANIC 

is  shaded. 

1 8.  Ef,  ve,  ith,  the,  es,  ze,  ish,  zhe,  way,  yea,  and  ar 
are   always   written   with    a   downward    stroke.     Em,   en, 
and  ing,  from  left  to  right.     Lay  is  made  upwards. 

19.  A  period  in  Shorthand  is  usually  written  by  a  small 
cross.     There  are  two  other  methods  of  indicating  a  full 
pause.     These  will  be  explained  later. 

20.  We  desire  to  repeat  in  this  lesson  that  the  student 
should    be   careful   to   make    sufficient    distinction    between 
the  light  and  shaded  letters  in  order  to  avoid  trouble  in 
distinguishing  the  one  from  the  other  when  transcribing  his 
notes.     Care  should  be  taken  also  to  give  the  slanting  letters 
sufficient  slant  and  to  write  the  perpendicular  letters,  ith, 
the,  es  and  ze,  so  that  they  will  be  as  nearly  vertical  as 
possible. 

21.  The  tendency  among  students  is  not  to  make  enough 
distinction     between  .  slanting    and     vertical     letters,     and 
trouble  results  when  an  attempt  is  made  to  read  what  has 
been  written. 

22.  We  deem  it  advisable  to  repeat  in  this  lesson  the 
statement  that  in  writing  an  outline  it  should  be  begun  so 
that   the   first   upright   letter,   whether   written   upward   or 
downward,  will  rest  on  the  line.     Thus,  lake,  written  lay- 
kay,  should  begin  on  the  line,  since  lay,  the  first  upright 
letter,  is  struck  upwards  and  should  rest  on  the  line.     Like- 
wise, coffee,  written  kay-ef,  should  begin  above  the  line, 
so  that  ef,  the  first  upright  letter  and  which  is  struck  down- 
wards, will  rest  on  the  line.     The  use  of  curved  and  straight 
letters  is  shown  in  the  following  words : 


ledge 


SHORTHAND 


rush  lazy        wake        going       yoUe  Jennie  luck  coffee 

23.  When   a   proper  name   is   written   in    Shorthand   it 
should  have  two  small  ticks  written  beneath  it  to  indicate 
that  fact,  as  in  Jennie.     When  a  proper  name  is  fully  vocal- 
ized this  underscore,  as  it  is  called,  is  unnecessary.     Proper 
names,  for  which  there  are  wordsigns,  never  require  the 
underscore  or  vowels. 

EXERCISE  2. 

24.  List  Words.     (37  —  1  130.) 

Using  ar  or  ray,  as  indicated,  for  r  write  the  following: 
i  Fame,  2  many,  3  lame,  4  may,  5  shape,  6  death,  7  pay, 
8  easy,  9  bunk,  10  lathe,  n  yoke,  12  wake,  13  argue  (ar), 
14  into,  15  escape,  16  poking,  17  neck,  18  gum,  19  tame, 
20  tidy,  21  daily,  22  pillow,  23  Murray  (Ray),  24  delay, 
25  Jacob,  26  buggy,  27  beg,  28  mope,  29  rush  (ray),  30  veto, 
31  revoke  (ray),  32  enough,  33  oar  (ar),  34  rope  (ray), 
35  both,  36  four  (ar),  37  money. 

25.  As  in  the  first  lesson,  when  the  student  is  able  to 
write  these  words  correctly,  he  should  then  write  them  a 
sufficient  number  of  times  to  enable  him  to  write  the  entire 
thirty-seven  words  in  a  minute  and  a  half.     He  should  also 
read  the  Shorthand  outlines  over  and  over  again  until  he 
can  read  the  list  in  the  same  length  of  time. 


LESSON   III. 

SHAY  AND  EL. 

i.     Ish,  representing  the  sound  of  sh,  as  explained  in 
lesson  two,  is  always  written  with  a  downward  stroke.     The 


io  PITMANIC 

sound  of  &h,  however,  is  sometimes  represented  by  a  letter 
exactly  like  ish,  except  that  it  is  written  with  an  upward 
stroke.  For  convenience  in  referring  -to  this  letter  it  is 
called  shay.  Ish  is  the  letter  generally  used  to  represent 
the  sound  of  sh.  Shay  is  used  only  in  exceptional  cases, 
as  follows : 

(1)  When  the  outline  for  a  word  containing  the  sound 
of  sh  may  be  more  quickly  written  by  the  use  of  shay,  as 
in  lavish,  written  lay-ve-shay,  and  ravish,  written  ray-ve- 
shay. 

(2)  When  an  outline  may  be  kept  from  going  the  length 
of  two  or  more  letters  below  the  line  on  which  one  is  writing, 
as  in  bishop,  written  be-shay-pe.     This  keeps  the  outline 
entirely  above  the  line  on  which  one  is  writing,  when,  if 
ish  were  used,  pe,  the  last  letter  in  the  word,  would  end 
the  length  of  two  letters  below  the  line. 

2.  Lay,  representing  the  sound  of  1,  is  written  upward. 
The  sound  of  1  is  sometimes  represented  by  a  letter  exactly 
like  lay  except  that  it  is  written  with  a  downward  stroke. 
The  letter  is  called  el. 

3.  The  following  rules  govern  the  use  of  lay  and  el: 

1 i )  When  1  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word,  lay  is  used 
if  no  vowel  precedes,  and  el  is  used  if  a  vowel  precedes. 
Thus  lame  is  written  lay-em;  elm,  el-em;  lake,  lay-kay; 
alike,  el-kay. 

(2)  When  1  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word,  lay  is  used 
if  a  sounded  vowel  follows,  and  el  is  used  if  1  is  the  last 
letter  or  if  a  sileni  vowel   follows.     Thus  jail  is   written 
jay-el;  jelly,  jay-lay;  tale,  te-el;  tally,  te-lay. 

(3)  When   1  occurs  between  two  other  consonants   in 
a  word,  use  the  one  which   forms  the  better  outline.     If 
either  forms  a  good  angle,  select  the  one  which  will  bring 


SHORTHAND  11 

your  outline  more  nearly  upon  the  line  on  which  you  are 
writing. 

4.  There  are  two  exceptions  to  these  rules. 

(1)  Always  use  el  when  it  follows  and  is  joined  to  en 
or  ing.     The  reason  for  this  exception  is  that  el  forms  a 
more  easily  and  quickly  made  junction  with  a  preceding 
ing  or  en.     Thus  inlay  is  written  en-el  ;  kingly,  kay-ing-el. 

(2)  When  1  is  the  only  consonant  stroke  in  a  word  lay 
is  always  used.     This  exception  is  made  so  that  in  case  it 
is  the  only  consonant  stroke  in  the  word  and  it  becomes  nec- 
essary to  use  a  vowel   (which  use  will  be  explained  later) 
with  this  stroke,  the  student  will  know,  when  he  comes  to 
read  his  notes,  which  is  the  beginning  and  which  the  end 
of   the   letter.     This    is   necessary,    as    will    plainly   appear 
when  the  vowels  are  understood. 

5.  The  following  words  illustrate  the  use  of  ish,  shayv, 
el  and  lay. 


shape       gush          bishop  lavish  lake  alike 


\\r  \ 


fellow  denial      bale       pillow      dial       delay       mellow 

EXERCISE  3. 
6.     List   Words.     (43 — 1:15.) 

i  Bishop,  2  shape,  3  lavish,  4  shapely,  5  shame,  6  knavish, 
7  fishing,  8  ravish  (ray),  9  alum,  10  elk,  n  alimony, 
12  elegy,  13  elm,  14  Elsie,  15  Duluth,  16  mail,  17  bail, 
18  tail,  19  mole,  20  fail,  21  herring  (ray),  22  coal,  23  entail, 


12  PITMANIC 

24  gale,  25  pole,  26  lake,  27  ledge,  28  fell,  29  Cora  (ray). 
30  bale,  31  toll,  32  unlike,  33  nailing,  34  Nellie,  35  renewal 
(ray),  36  kneeling,  37  denial,  38  Toledo,  39  dale,  40  revenge 
(ray),  41  name,  42  hay,  43  layer  (ar). 

7.  The  student  should  in  all  his  practice  bear  in  mind 
that  correctness  is  of  first  importance.  Speed,  while  very 
desirable,  must  not  take  the  place  of  legible  writing,  for 
of  what  use  is  matter  written  at  high  speed  if  it  cannot 
afterwards  be  read? 


LESSON   IV. 

RAY  AND  AR. 

i.  The  sound  of  r  is  represented  by  both  ar  and  ray. 
The  following  are  the  rules  governing  the  use  of  ar  and 
ray: 

1 i )  When  r  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word  and  is  also 
the  first  letter,  ray  is  used,  as  in  rake,  written  ray-kay; 
ring,  ray-ing ;  rash,  ray-ish.     When  r  is  the  first  consonant 
in  a  word  and  a  vowel  precedes,  ar  is  used,  as  in  ark,  written 
ar-kay;  argue,  ar-gay. 

(2)  When   r  is   the   last   consonant   in   a   word   and   a 
sounded  vowel  follows,  ray  is  used,  as  in  dairy,  written 
de-ray;  fairy,  ei-ray.     When  r  is  the  last  consonant  in  a 
word  and  a  silent  vowel  follows  or  the  last  letter  in  the 
word,  ar  is  used,  as  in  bore,  written  be-ar;  chair,  chay-ar; 
unfair,  en-ef-ar. 

(3)  When  r  occurs  between  two  other  consonants  in 
a  word,  use  whichever  sign  for  r  makes  the  better  outline. 
When  the  use  of  either  makes  an  equally  good  outline  then 
select  the  one  which  will  keep  the  outline  of  the  word  more 


SHORTHAND  13 

nearly  upon  the  line,  as  in  pouring,  written  pe-ray-ing; 
bark,  be-ray-kay;  cork,  kay-ray-kay;  lyric,  lay-ar-kay; 
forge,  ef-ray-jay. 

2.  The  above  are  the  general  rules.     There  are  a  num- 
ber of  exceptions  made  necessary  in  order  to  secure  better 
angles   between   the   different   letters   of  an   outline,   or  to 
secure  outlines  which  may  be  written  more  quickly.     These 
exceptions  are : 

1 i )  To  secure  better  angles. 

(a)  Always  use  ray  when  r  immediately  precedes 
ef,  ve,  ith,  the,  ish,  zhe,  te,  de,  chay  or  jay, 
as  in  arrive,  earth,  Irish,  arch. 

(b)  Always  use  ar  when  r  immediately  precedes 
em,  as  in  roam,  farm. 

(c)  Always  use  ray  when  r  immediately  follows 
em,  as  in  mire. 

(2)  To  secure  more  rapidly  written  outlines. 

fa)  Always  use  ray  after  hay,  as  in  adhere,  mo- 
hair. 

(b)  Always  use  ray-ray  when  two  r's  occur  in 
succession,  as  roar,  mirror. 

3.  The  student  will  occasionally  encounter  words  where 
it  will  be  clearly  evident  that  better  angles  may  be  gained 
by  slightly  varying  some  one  of  these  rules.     In  core,  for 
example,  ray  is  used  though  the  rule  calls  for  ar.     The 
student  should  make  exceptions  of  this  sort  only  when  it  is 
clearly   apparent   that   decidedly   better   angles   or   greater 
speed  may  be  gained. 

4.  When  the  stroke  hay  is  preceded  by  another  conso- 
nant in  a  word  the  hook  is  formed  by  slightly  retracing  the 
preceding  letter,  as  in  adhere. 

5.  The  uses  of  ar  and  ray  are  illustrated  as  follows: 


14  PITMANIC 


argue  rake  bore  bury  pork  lyric 


forum  merry  roar  arrayed  aright  urge 


arrive  earth  -  horror  roach 

EXERCISE  4. 

6.  List  Words.     (62 — i  :3o.) 

i  Rung,  2  tore,  3  ferry,  4  rug,  5  carry,  6  marrow,  7  road, 
8  ready,  9  wreck,  10  urge,  n  tarry,  12  fore,  13  argue,  14  err, 
15  bug,  1 6  army,  17  berry,  18  fairy,  19  repair,  20  cherry, 
21  Toledo,  22  roach,  23  review,  24  red,  25  gory,  26  jury, 
27  pug,  28  rape,  29  rub,  30  ergo,  31  fur,  32  pour,  33  door, 
34  burr,  35  fame,  36  chore,  37  carrying,  38  bury,  39  pork, 
40  dole,  41  arrive,  42  earth,  43  orate,  44  arid,  45  Irish, 
46  curry,  47  rush,  48  merry,  49  adhere,  50  rarify,  51  mirror, 
52  bowl,  53  robe,  54  inform,  55  away,  56  enough,  57  us, 
58  hurry,  59  Tillie,  60  along,  61  heavy,  62  toll. 

7.  The  student  should  write  the  exercises  slowly  at  first 
being  especially  careful  to  form  each  outline  correctly.  When 
he  is  able  to  write  the  exercises  correctly,  he  should  write 
them  over  and  over  again  with  constantly  increasing  speed 
until  he  becomes  able  to  write  them  within  the  time  specified. 

8.  Until  the  student  has  completed  all  the  lessons  in 
the  book,  he  should,  in  his  practice,  confine  himself  to  the 
exercises  given  herein.     By  so  doin*g  he  will  not  form  the 
habit  of  writing  words  incorrectly  as  he  necessarily  would, 
if  he  were  to  attempt  to  write  miscellaneous  matter  before 
all  the  principles  are  learned. 


SHORTHAND  15 


LESSON  V. 

REVIEW. 

i.    QUESTIONS: 

(1)  Name  all  the  straight  letters. 

(2)  Give  two  words  illustrating  the  use  of  each. 

(3)  Which  straight  letters  are  always  written  down- 
ward? 

(4)  Which  with  upward  strokes? 

(5)  Which  with  horizontal  strokes? 

(6)  Which  should  have  the  greater  slant,  ray  or  chay? 

(7)  Which  part  of  a  word  is  written  and  which  part 
usually  omitted  in  Shorthand  writing? 

(8)  In  writing  the  Shorthand  outline  for  a  word  what 
is  the  rule  which  specifies  at  what  point  the  outline  should 
begin  ? 

(9)  In  writing  the  outline  for  a  word  where  should 
the  second  and  each  following  stroke  begin  ? 

( 10)  Why  is  it  important  that  all  consonant  strokes 
should  be  written  of  uniform  length? 

(n)     How  should  the  pen  or  pencil  be  held  when 
writing  Shorthand? 

(12)  In  reading  Shorthand  writing  how  can  one  dis- 
tinguish which  is  the  proper  word  when  an  outline  is  the 
same  for  two  or  more  words? 

(13)  How  many  curved  letters  are  there? 

(14)  Name  them. 

(15)  Give  two  words  illustrating  the  use  of  each. 

(16)  Which   curved    letters   are   written   downward, 
which  upward,  and  which  with  a  horizontal  stroke? 

(17)  What  is  the  significance  of  the  numbers  in  pa- 
rentheses immediately  preceding  the  exercises  in  each  lesson? 


16  PITMANIC 

(18)  By  what  two  letters  is  the  sound  of  sh  repre- 
sented ? 

(19)  Which  of  these  two  letters  is  more  commonly 
used? 

(20)  How  are  these  letters  distinguished  from  each 
other  ? 

(21)  Give  the  rules  governing  the  use  of  shay. 

(22)  If  the  sound  of  sh  is  the  only  consonant  in  a 
word,  which  should  be  used,  ish  or  shay? 

(23)  By  what  two  letters  is  the  sound  of  1  repre- 
sented ? 

(24)  How  do  these  letters  differ  from  each  other? 

(25)  When  1  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word  when 
should  one  use  lay  and  when  el? 

(26)  When  1  is  the  last  consonant,  when  is  lay  and 
when  is  el  used? 

(27)  After  what  letters  is  el  always  used? 

(28)  When  1  is  the  only  consonant  stroke  in  a  word 
is  lay  or  el  used  ? 

(29)  By  what  two  letters  is  the  sound  of  r  repre- 
sented ? 

(30)  When  r  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word  when 
should  ar  and  when  should  ray  be  used  ?     Give  examples. 

(31)  When  r  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  when 
should  ray  and  when  should  ar  be  used  ?     Give  examples. 

(32)  When  r  occurs  between  two  other  consonants 
in  an  outline  when  should  you  use  ray  and  when  ar? 

(33)  Give  the  exceptions  to  the  above  rules. 

2.  The  following  words  should  be  written  at  dictation 
again  and  again  until  they  may  be  written  legibly  within 
the  time  specified. 


SHORTHAND  17 

EXERCISE  5. 

3.     List  Words.     (106 — 1:45.) 

Duck  peck  cake  check  rake  poet  ditto  page  rage  body 
deputy  go  bake  gage  bedeck  touch  copy  budge  judge  pity 
tuck  wreck  poke  edit  keg25  tub  carry  fame  roach  wrote 
hedge  rug  rope  peg  many  lame  shape  death  easy  bunk  lathe 
yoke  wake  argue  escape  neck  poking  gum  tame  tidy50  daily 
pillow  shapely  knavish  fishing  ravish  alum  elk  alimony  elegy- 
elm  Elsie  mail  bail  tail  coal  gale  pole  lake  ledge  fell  Cora 
unlike  Nellie  renewal75  denial  dale  name  rung  ferry  rug 
road  marrow  ready  urge  tarry  err  bug  army  berry  repair 
review  gory  jury  rape  rub  pour  pork  arrive  earth100  arid 
Irish  adhere  rarifv  mirror  bowl.100 


LESSON  VI. 

WORDSIGNS. 

i.  A  scheme  of  abbreviation  somewhat  similar  to  that 
used  for  certain  words  in  Longhand  is  made  use  of  in 
writing  Shorthand.  There  are  two  important  differences 
between  Longhand  and  Shorthand  abbreviations. 

(i)  Only  the  very  commonly  occurring  words  are  rep- 
resented in  Shorthand  by  abbreviated  outlines,  such  as. 
of,  to,  for,  as,  will,  him,  the,  your,  shall,  is,  has,  have, 
think,  which,  etc.  In  Longhand,  the  words  which  are 
abbreviated  are  words  which  seldom  occur  in  ordinary  use. 
One  may,  for  example,  read  an  entire  column  of  ordinary 
newspaper  matter  and  not  find  half  a  dozen  abbreviated 
words.  The  same  matter  written  in  Shorthand  would  re- 
quire abbreviations,  or  wordsigns,  as  they  are  called,  for 
at  least  one  word  in  everv  three  or  four.. 


i8  PITMANIC 

(2)  In  Longhand,  words  for  which  we  have  abbrevia- 
tions, such  as  doctor,  attorney,  Missouri,  ounce,  pound, 
etc.,  are  quite  as  frequently  written  out  in  full  as  they  are 
represented  by  the  abbreviated  forms.  In  Shorthand  every 
word  for  which  there  is  an  abbreviation,  or  wordsign,  is 
always  written  with  the  sign  and  never  in  any  case  repre- 
sented by  the  complete  consonant  outline. 

2.  Words  derived  from  primitives,  for  which  there  are 
wordsigns,  are  written  with  the  sign  for  the  primitive  and 
the  necessary  consonants  to  complete  the  derivative.     For 
example,  come  is  written  with  kay  only  instead  of  the  full 
outline   kay-em.     Coming,   therefore,   is   written   kay-ing, 
while  income  is  written  en-kay. 

3.  With  very  few  exceptions  wordsigns  are  composed 
of  some  one  or  more  of  the  consonant  parts  of  the  complete 
consonant  outline  for  the  word  represented  by  the  sign. 
There  are  a  few  words  in  the  writing  of  which  it  has  been 
found  necessary  to  vary  some  rule  in  order  to  avoid  a  con- 
flict as,  for  example,  the  use  of  pe-ray  for  pure.  This  is  done 
to  prevent  confusion  with  pe-ar  which  is  the  outline  for 
poor.     Hence  pe-ray  is  given  as  a  wordsign  for  pure. 

4.  There  is  given  in  this  and  each  of  the  following  les- 
sons a  short  list  of  wordsigns  which  the  student  should 
thoroughly  commit  to  memory. 

EXERCISE  6. 

5.  List  Words.     (50 — 1:15.) 

T  Make,  2  picnic,  3  copy,  4  cub,  5  gage,  6  puck,  7  bay, 
8  tape,  9  Mattie,  10  lady,  n  folly,  12  jug,  13  comic,  14  navy, 
15  heavy,  16  many,  17  honey,  18  assume,  19  edge,  20  keg, 
21  gay,  22  lave,  23  loaf,  24  pity,  25  comedy,  26  poke, 
27  deck,  28  rote,  29  making,  30  rub,  31  guinea,  32  luck, 
33  cope,  34  choke,  35  joke,  36  cage,  37  rage,  38  army, 


SHORTHAND  19 

39  ferry,  40  bathe,  41  delay,  42  doing,  43  jury,  44  hurry, 
45  power,  46  pug,  47  beck,  48  Jerry,  49  rogue,  50  jockey. 
6.     Wordsigns. 

(    )  J    I  L  /—  J      ( 

them      was      shall        have      for    which    come      usual          think      essential 

usually  essentially 


together         never    your         he        especial        are  regular  irregular 

especially 


become 


notwith-      peculiar        New-York      will  him 

standing     peculiarity 


7.  The  student  of  Shorthand  should  not  confine  himself 
in  practice  either  to  a  pen  or  pencil.     He  should  accustom 
himself  to  the  use  of  both.     When  using  a  pen  he  should 
select  one  that  is  adapted  to  his  touch.     It  should  be  a 
short-nibbed  pen,  not  a  stub,  and  yet  not  one  with  too  fine 
a  point.     The  pen  with  which  the  student  can  readily  shade 
letters  and  yet  not  so  flexible  that  he  will  shade  letters  unin- 
tentionally, is  the  pen  to  use.     Each  one  must  be  his  own 
judge  in  this  matter  since  people  vary  so  greatly  in  their 
touch  in  writing. 

8.  Usually  much  better  and  more  satisfactory  work  may 
be  done  with  a  good  short-nibbed  gold  pen.     When  writing 
with  a  pencil,  a  rather  soft  and  fine-grained  lead  should 
be  selected.     Both  pen  and  pencil  should  be  held  more  near- 
ly upright  than  in  writing  Longhand.     With  the  pen  or 
pencil  so  held,  one  is  less  apt  to  shade  letters  unintention- 
ally. 

9.  It  will  interest  the  student  to  know  that  there  are,  in 
this  text,  440  wordsigns  and  234  phrase  signs,  and   14 


20  PITMANIC 

signs  representing  both  a  single  word  and  a  phrase.     This 
makes  a  total  of  688. 

10.  Since  a  number  of  the  signs  are  used  for  two  or 
more  words,  the  actual  number  of  words  and  phrases  repre- 
sented by  abbreviated  signs  is  833. 

11.  The  use  of  wordsigns  as  part  of  the  outlines  of 
words  derived  from  words  for  which  there  are  abbreviations, 
makes  it  possible  for  the  reporter  to  shorten  many  hundreds 
of  words  for  which  he  does  not  need  to  learn  wordsigns. 


LESSON  VII. 

PHRASING. 

i.  In  Shorthand  the  outlines  for  words  are  frequently 
joined :  that  is,  the  outlines  for  two  or  more  words  are 
written  without  lifting  the  pen  or  pencil  from  the  paper. 
^A  considerable  degree  of  speed  is  gained  in  this  way.  For 
example,  in  the  sentence,  you-never-will  come-back,  en  in 
never  should  be  joined  to  the  wordsign  for  you.  Lay, 
which  is  the  wordsign  for  will,  should  begin  at  the  end  of 
ve,  the  last  letter  in  the  wordsign  for  never,  all  three 
words  joined  by  hyphens  being  written  without  lifting  the 
pen  from  the  paper.  The  be  in  back  should  begin  at  the 
end  of  kay,  the  wordsign  for  come.  Thus,  in  writing  the 
sentence  above,  while  all  the  words  might  be  written  sepa- 
rately, the  pen  need  be  lifted  from  the  paper  but  once  in 
writing  the  outlines  for  the  five  words.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  the  words  never,  will  and  back,  when  joined  as  above, 
are  written  below,  or  through  the  line.  This  is  inevitable 
where  words  are  phrased.  Had  they  been  written  sepa- 
rately, it  would  have  been  necessary  to  begin  each  outline 


SHORTHAND  21 

so  that  the  first  upright  letter  in  each  word  in  which  there 
were  upright  letters  would  rest  on  the  line. 

2.  The  following  rules  should  be  observed  in  the  use 
of  the  principle  of  phrasing: 

(1)  The  first  word  in  a  phrase,  except  in  the  case  of 
certain  ticks  explained  in  the  latter  part  of  this  lesson,  should 
be  written  in  the  same  position  in  which  it  would  be  placed 
were  it  written  without  joining.     All  the  other  words  joined 
after  the  initial  word,  or  leader,  as  it  is  called,  are  written 
without  any  reference  to  the  line  upon  which  the  writing 
is  being  clone. 

(2)  Words  should  never  be  joined  when  the  last  stroke 
in  the  preceding  word  does  not  make  a  distinct  angle  with 
the  first  stroke  in  the  following  word. 

(3)  The   last   word   in   one   sentence   should   never   be 
joined  to  the  first  word  of  the  following  sentence,  and,  as 
a  rule,  words  separated  by  any  grammatical  or  rhetorical 
pause,  should  not  be  phrased. 

(4)  Proper   names    should    never   be   joined   to   words 
preceding  or  following  them. 

3.  In  order  to  form  a  better  angle  the  wordsign  for 
you  may  be  inverted  when  phrased  to  any  letter  with  which 
it  would  not  form  a  good  angle  when  written  in  the  usual 
way,   as  in  you-know  and  you-never,  the  sign  for  you 
should  be  inverted. 

4.  Beginners,  as  a  rule,  have  a  tendency  to  phrase  too 
much.     To  overcome  this,  students,  until  they  have  com- 
pleted this  book,  should  phrase  only  such  words  as  are  con- 
nected by  hyphens  in  the  following  exercises.     This  will 
give  the  beginner  a  sufficient  insight  into  the  general  plan 
of   joining   words   and   also   actual   practice   in   phrasing. 

5.  The  character  at  the  end  of  the  sixth  and  ninth  sen- 
tences in  the  exercise  to  be  translated  from  Shorthand  at 


22  PITMANIC 

the   close   of  this   lesson   is   the    Shorthand   interrogation 
point.     The  wordsign  for  that  is  a  half  length  stroke  the. 

EXERCISE  7. 
6.     Wordsigns. 


I,    high,      the         a,  an,      advan-        Ian-       help      popular    familiar    efficient 
aye,  eve  /  and  tage         guage 


\ 


V 


November          health       chapter     object     change     dignity     faithful          in 

faithfully      any 


Illegible      legible     perform      rather     reprefient-ed     reform       that          ye 

representative  year-s. 

7.  In  order  to  make  use  of  a  few  very  commonly  occur- 
ring words  in  the  preparation  of  the  exercises,  before  the 
principles  by  which  these  words  are  written  could  be  intro- 
duced, they  are,  with  their  proper  outlines,  given  as  word- 
signs.     The  word  that  is  an  illustration.     The  sign  given 
is  really  a  full  outline,  as  will  appear  in  lesson  41. 

8.  The,  a,  an,  and  and  he,  have  another  set  of  signs  in 
addition  to  the  signs  already  given.     They   are  the  only 
words  each  of  which  has  two  wordsigns.     The  reason  for 
this  is  explained  as  follows :    These  are  the  most  frequently 
occurring  words  in  the  language,  hence  they  are  usually 
represented  by  what  are  called  ticks,  the  simplest  and  most 
quickly  written  characters  which  can  be  formed  in  connec- 
tion with  other  outlines.     They  are  never  used  unless  joined 


SHORTHAND  23 

to  other  outlines.  It  sometimes  occurs  that  these  ticks 
cannot  be  phrased,  hence  the  necessity  of  the  signs  already 
given  for  these  words,  which  are  used  without  joining,  and 
which  are  the  most  quickly  formed  disjoined  characters. 
These  disjoined  signs  are  called  emergency  signs  because 
they  are  used  only  in  emergencies  where  the  tick  signs  can- 
not be  easily  and  readily  joined  or  some  rule  of  phrasing 
prevents  their  being  joined. 

9.  Since  these  words  occur  so  very  frequently,  especial 
care  should  be  given  to  firmly  fix  in  the  mind  each  set  of 
these  signs.  The  tick  signs  are  explained  as  follows : 

(1)  When  joined  the  sign  for  the  is  a  tick  like  either 
the  first  or  last  half  of  the  sign  for  I,  that  is  a  slanting  tick. 
It    is    written    either    upward    or    downward.     The    writer 
should  always  select  the  one  of  these  slanting  ticks  which 
makes  a  distinct  angle  with  the  word  to  which  it  is  joined. 
\Yhere  any  slanting  tick  will  make  a  distinct  angle  with  the 
letter  to  which  it  is  joined,  the  one  which  may  be  the  more 
quickly  written  should  be  used.     Thus :    the-day,  the-mon- 
ey,  the-name,  are  written  as  shown  in  the  illustration  in 
section   15  in  this  lesson.     In  the-day,   for  example,  any 
slanting  tick  would  have  made  a  distinct  angle  with  de. 
A  tick  like  the  last  half  of  the  sign  for  I,  written  upwards, 
should  be  used  because  it  is  the  most  quickly  written. 

(2)  A,  an  and  and,  are  represented,  when  joined,  by  a 
horizontal  or  vertical  tick,  the  sense  always  clearly  indi- 
cating which  one  of  the  three  words  is  meant.     One  should 
always  select  the  tick  which  forms  an  angle  with  the  word 
to  which  it  is  phrased.     Thus :  a-day,  and-go,  and-will,  an- 
enemy,  are  written  as  illustrated  below.     When  either  the 
vertical  or  the  horizontal  tick  makes  a  distinct  angle,  the 
latter  is,  in  most  cases,  preferable,  since  it  is  made  in  the 
direction  in  which  one  is  writing.     As  will  be  seen  from  the 


24  PITMANIC 

illustrations,  the  vertical  tick  for  a,  an  or  and  is  always 
written  downwards  and  the  horizontal  tick  from  left  to 
right. 

(3)  He,  when  joined,  is  represented  by  a  slanting  tick 
like  the  last  half  of  the  sign  for  I.  It  is  always  written 
with  a  downward  stroke.  Thus :  he-will  and  he-may  are 
written  as  shown  below. 

10.  The  joined  signs  of  a,  an,  and,  the  and  he  have 
no  position  of  their  own.     Their  position  is  governed  by 
the   words   to   which   they   are   phrased.     Hence,   when   a 
phrase  begins  with  any  one  of  these  words,  the  second  of 
the  joined  words  is  the  leader  and  is  written  in  the  same 
position  in  which  it  would  be  placed  if  it  were  standing 
alone. 

11.  The,  a  and  an  usually  begin  a  phrase  and  are  joined 
to  the  following  word  rather  than  to  the  preceding  word  at 
the  end  of  a  phrase,  since  these  words  belong,  gramatically, 
to  the  following  words.     This  rule,  however,  is  not  strictly 
observed.     He,  also,  is  usually  joined  to  the  following  word. 
And  is  joined  to  either  the  preceding  or  following  word 
since  it  belongs,  grammatically,  to  both. 

12.  For   convenience   in   referring   to   these   tick   signs, 
and  also  those  in  lesson  nine,  they  are  usually  called  by  the 
name  of  the  letter  made  in  the  same  direction  as  the  tick. 
Thus,  the  tick  for  the  made  in  the  same  direction  as  the 
stroke  pe  is  spoken  of  as  a  pe-tick ;  when  made  in  the  same 
direction  as  the  stroke  ray,  it  is  called  a  ray-tick;  when  a 
shaded  tick  is  made  in  the  same  direction  as  the  stroke  jay, 
it  is  called  a  jay-tick,  etc. 

13.  When  for  any  reason  it  is  not  convenient,  or  any 
of  the  rules   for  phrasing  make  it  impossible  to  use  the 
ticks  for  these  words,  then  the  signs  given  in  the  list  of 
wordsigns  are  used  and  must  be  written  in  the  position  in 


SHORTHAND  25 

which  they  are  there  given.  It  should  be  kept  in  mind, 
however,  that  the  joined  signs  for  these  five  words  should 
always  be  used  when  it  is  possible  to  join  them  because 
speed  is  gained  by  their  use. 

14.  It  is  customary  to  use  only  one  of  the  two  ticks  in 
the  wordsign  for  I  when  this  word  is  phrased,  that  half 
which  will  make  the  better  angle  with  the  word  to  which 
it  is  joined  being  selected.     When  the  first  half  only  is 
used,  it  must  always  be  written  downwards,  and  the  last 
half,  when  used,  is  written  upwards.     The  only  other  tick 
with  which  it  is  identical  is  that  for  the  word  the  and  the 
sense  will  always  make  it  perfectly  clear  whether  I  or  the 
is  meant.     The  tick  sign  for  he  is  always  written  down- 
wards hence  cannot  possibly  conflict  with  the  last  half  of 
the  sign  for  I  when  joined  as  the  latter  is  always  written 
upwards. 

15.  The  stroke  hay  for  he  is  sometimes  phrased.     This 
is  permissable  only  when  both  of  the  following  conditions 
exist:      (i)   When  the  tick  sign  for  he  does  not  make  a 
good  angle  and    (2),  when  hay,  the  emergency  sign  for 
he  does,  as  in  he-that.     It  is  only  rarely,  however,  that  the 
wordsign  hay  for  he  is  phrased  with  other  words. 

1 6.  The  following  examples  of  phrasing  illustrate  the 
principles  mentioned  above : 

/  i       r        i^  ^   /* 

.  I      V- +^^>     /\  i^-— N       \      ^..        — I         — v    ^ — »>      I/          *-     *>    *- 

the-      the-  the-          a-          and-          and-          an-  he-          he-         he- 

day        money         name       day      go  will  enemy       will        may       that 

17.  Phrases.     (69 — 1:05.) 

i  Will-you-come,  2  he-may-go,  3  may-you-come,  4  have- 
you-many,  5  a-day-may-come,  6  I-think-you-will,  7  I-will, 
8  he-will-make,-5  9  the-advantage,  10  you-may-help,  n  the- 


26  PITMANIC 

day,  12  the-change,  13  help-him,  14  I-object,  15  an-illegible, 
16  perform-your,  17  the-chapter,  18  your-health,  19  and- 
rather,  20  will-think,50  21  you-reform-them,  22  the-legible- 
copy,  23  you-represent,  24  the-language,  25  the-popular, 
26  take-him,  27  they-may-go,  28  I-perform.69 

18.  Sentences.     (65 — 1 105.) 

i  I-will  go  and-take-your-money.  2  You-say  you-know 
he-will  go  away?  3  The-copy  was-so  illegible  he-will  take- 
it  away.25  4  He-will-take  your  heavy-team.  5  He-came 
in  November  and-will  perform  in  New- York.  6  I-know 
you-will-have  money-enough  for-your50  November  pay-day. 
7  You-may  take-him  along  for  I-think  he-will-be  popular.65 

19.  It   is    especially    important   that   the    student    when 
phrasing  should  keep  constantly  in  mind  rule  two,  given 
in  section  2  of  this  lesson.     This  refers  to  angles  which  may 
be  formed  distinctly  and  at  the  same  time  written  rapidly. 
It  frequently  happens  that  two  words  may  be  joined  and  a 
sufficiently  clear  angle  made  between  them  if  written  slowly, 
while,  if  written  rapidly,  it  could  not  be  distinctly  formed. 
For  example,  pay-enough  might  be  joined  and  a  fairly 
distinct  angle   formed  between  pe  and  en,  if  the  outline 
were  written  slowly.     Such  distinction  could  not  possibly 
be  clearly  made  when  writing  at  a  high  rate  of  speed.     A 
little  care  and  observation  on  the  part  of  the  student  in 
such  cases  will  prevent  his  attempting  to  join  words  which 
should  not  be  phrased. 

20.  After  the  student  is  sure  that  he  has  the  proper  read- 
ing of  the   Shorthand  exercise  to  be  translated,  it  is  an 
excellent  plan  for  him  to  copy  the  whole  of  it  many  times. 
This  will  afford  splendid  drill  in  the  rapid   formation  of 
Shorthand  characters.     Such  practice  should  always  be  upon 
matter  which  the  student  knows  to  be  correct.     The  stu- 
dent should  write  these  exercises  over  and  over  again  until 


SHORTHAND  27 

he  is  able  to  form  the  characters  neatly  and  correctly  at  a 
rate  of  sixty  words  per  minute.  If  he  is  able  to  attain  a 
higher  rate  and  at  the  same  time  form  his  characters  dis- 
tinctly, giving  them  the  proper  curve,  length,  slant  and 
shade,  so  much  the  better. 
21.  Translation. 


IK 
LESSON  VIII. 

THE  S-CIRCI,E. 

I.  The  sounds,  represented  by  the  strokes  es  and  ze, 
are  also  frequently  represented  by  a  small  circle  called  the 
s-circle.  This  form  of  writing  s  and  z  is  used  only  in  con- 
nection with  some  other  consonant  stroke,  except  in  the 
case  of  the  wordsigns  "is,"  "his,"  "as,"  "has,"  given  in  this 
lesson.  It  may  be  joined  to  the  beginning  or  end  of  any 
stroke  either  curved  or  straight,  except  at  the  beginning  of 
hay.  When  written  upon  curved  strokes,  and  does  not 
occur  between  strokes,  it  is  formed  within  the  curve.  When 


28  PITMANIC 

written  upon  straight  letters,  and  does  not  occur  between 
strokes,  it  must  be  paced  upon  the  right  side  of  downward 
strokes,  upon  the  left  side  of  upward  strokes  and  on  the 
upper  side  of  horizontal  letters.  To  illustrate,  the  follow- 
ing words  are  written  thus  : 


v  r 


ease        face         safe      base    stay    mace        same         sung          race         days 

2.  When  the  s-circle  is  written  between  two  straight 
letters  which  form  an  angle  at  their  junction,  it  is  written 
on  the  outside  of  the  angle,  as  in  desk;  when  it  comes 
between  a  straight  and  a  curved  letter  it  follows  the  curve, 
as  in  passive,  and  when  it  occurs  between  two  curved  letters 
it  follows  both  curves,  if  both  curve  in  the  same  direction, 
as  in  nuisance.  When  it  cannot  follow  both  curves,  it  may 
come  within  either  the  one  or  the  other,  as  in  mason  and 
facility,  thus: 


rusty         desk     passive    nuisance         fasten  mason       facility    cousin 

3.  For  convenience  in  referring  to  s  or  z  when  the  circle 
is  used  it  is  pronounced  as  if  it  were  spelled  iss. 

4.  When  s  or  z  comes  between  a  sound  represented  by 
a  curved  stroke  and  an  1,  an  exception  may  be  made  to  the 
rules  for  the  use  of  el  or  lay,  if  thereby  the  s-circle,  coming 
between  the  strokes,  may  be  made  to  come  within  both 
curves.     For   example,   missile   is   written   em-iss-lay   al- 
though the  rule  calls  for  the  use  of  el  ;  lesson  is  written  el- 
iss-en. 

5.  The  rules  governing  the  use  of  the  stroke  es  or  ze 
and  the  circle  iss  for  s  or  z  are  as  follows  : 


29 

(i)  When  s  or  z  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word  and 
is  not  preceded  by  a  vowel  the  circle  is  used,  and  when  a 
vowel  precedes,  the  stroke  es  or  ze  is  written,  thus: 


sale         assail  sake  espy          some          assume       sun  assignee 

(2)  When  s  or  z  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and 
a  sounded  vowel  follows,  or  when  two  separately  pronounced 
vowels  immediately  precede,  the  stroke  is  used;  when  not 
followed  by  a  sounded  vowel  or  when  a  silent  vowel  follows, 
the  circle  is  used,  thus  : 

S  /)  y-  V)  ^-Q  i  i   ^ 

race        racy        police        policy        nose  noisy      fuss    fussy      Lots 

(  3  )  When  s  or  z  occurs  between  two  consonant  strokes 
in  a  word  the  circle  is  used,  except  when  it  is  not  possible 
or  easy  to  write  the  circle.  In  such  cases  the  stroke  es  or 
ze  is  used. 

6.  Usually  it  is  not  best  to  begin  a  phrase  with  an  s-cir- 
cle  standing  for  is,  his,  as  or  has  since,  in  translating  rap- 
idly, it  is  apt  to  be  taken  for  a  simple  s  beginning  some 
word,  and  hence  cause  a  halt  in  the  reading.     In  phrases  like 
as-that,  as-he,  is-that,  etc.,  the  s-circle  may  begin  a  phrase 
and  no  trouble  will  follow  in  translating. 

EXERC4SE  8. 

7.  List  Words.     (60  —  i  :i5.) 

i  Case,  2  face,  3  safe,  4  slave,  5  vase,  6  pace,  7  soap, 
8  muss,  9  knows,  10  mason,  TI  vessel,  12  mislay,  13  slope, 
14  fizzle,  15  speck,  16  some,  17  snow,  18  casing,  19  guessing, 


30  PITMANIC 

20  base,  21  goes,  22  toes,  23  gaze,  24  race,  25  reason. 
26  stay,  27  foes,  28  ways,  29  yes,  30  losing,  31  facing, 
32  museum,  33  insane,  34  muzzle,  35  casual,  36  resign, 
37  chosen,  38  basin,  39  unseat,  40  noisome,  41  gossip, 
42  recipe,  43  nuisance,  44  Mexico,  45  desk,  46  discuss, 
47  dismay,  48  disown,  49  missing,  50  inside,  51  chosing, 
52  disobey,  53  insanity,  54  Minnesota,  55  loosen,  56  Thomas, 
57  surface,  58  swung,  59  suppose,  60  slow. 
8.  Wordsigns. 


7 


\ 


as,   has    is,   his          always    acknowledge     New-York-City        public         knowledge 

publish 
published 


,    U 


several         special  subject      something      sufficient         advantageous 

Savior  spoke  sufficiently 


"^TV  ^r 

electric          for-the-purpoee-of    February  forsake  January 

electricity  for-the-sake-of 

g.     Phrases.     (60 — i  :oo.) 

i  He-has-come,  2  he-is-away,  3  is-that-yours,  4  he-may- 
acknowledge,  5  several-days,  6  special-case,  7  will-take-some- 
thing, 8  have-no-knowledge,  9  will-be-sufficient,25  10  will- 
forsake-him,  n  may-always-be,  12  make-him-stay,  13  in- 
the-museum,  14  will-disown-them,  15  was-some-reason,  16 
a-high-desk,  17  will-discuss-the-case,50  18  he-was-insane,  19 
will-stay-away,  20  disobey-him,  21  many- foes.60 

10.     Sentences.     (103 — 1:40.) 

i  The-slave  will-take-your  music-box  into-the-city.  2 
Will-you-acknowledge  he-has  some-rights  in-such  a-case? 


SHORTHAND  31 

3  He-will  forsake-you.25  4  He-has-no  knowledge  that  will 
help  us  in-this-case.  5  The-police  will  arrive  Saturday, 
and-take  Thomas  Jackson  into  custody.  6  In  January 
James50  will  arrive  in  New-York-City,  and-will-take  pas- 
sage for  Cuba.  7  That-is  sufficient  so-you-may  go-ahead. 
8  Several  public  officers  will-take75  the-electric  road  tot 
Jackson.  9  Somebody  may-carry  Nellie  Johnson's  music- 
book  away.  10  He- will  always  stay  in  Chicago,  Illinois, 
and- will-be  a-subject100  for  the-asylum.103 

11.  In  translating   Shorthand  writing,  the  student  will 
be  able  to  make  more  rapid  progress,  if,  when  he  comes  to 
an  outline  which  troubles  him,  he  will  not  stop  and  puzzle 
over  it,  but  will  drop  it  for  the  time  and  go  on  until  he 
gets  the  connection.     By  doing  this  the  difficult  word  or 
phrase  will  in  almost  every  instance  come  to  him  without 
further  effort. 

12.  Translation, 


32  PITMANIC 

LESSON  IX. 

LONG  VOWELS. 

1.  As  has  already  been  stated,  the  vowels  are  not  usually 
inserted  in  Shorthand  outlines.     It  is  seldom  necessary  to 
actually  insert  or  indicate  a  vowel  except : 

1 i )  In  cases  where  a  word  is  used  in  some  unusual  way. 

(2)  Where  an  unusual  word  occurs.    , 

(3)  In  the  very  few  instances  where  the  consonant  out- 
line is  the  same  for  two  or  more  words  any  one  of  which 
would  make  sense. 

In  such  cases  an  outline  may  be  made  perfectly  clear  by 
inserting  or  indicating  the  principal  or  accented  vowel  in 
the  word.  In  order  to  insert  or  indicate  vowels  readily  in 
the  rare  instances  where  legibility  requires  their  use,  they 
must  be  learned  thoroughly.  The  vowels  are  represented 
by  light  and  heavy  dots  and  dashes  placed  beside  the  con- 
sonant strokes. 

2.  They  are  designated  as  first,  second  and  third  place 
vowels,  that  is,  a  dot  or  a  dash  placed  beside  the  beginning 
of  a  stroke  is  called  a  first  place  vowel.     A  dot  or  dash 
placed  beside  the  middle  of  a  stroke  is  called  a  second  place 
vowel  and  a  dot  or  a  dash  placed  beside  the  end  of  a  stroke 
is  called  a  third  place  vowel. 

3.  Long  vowels   are  represented  by  heavy   dots  and 
dashes. 

4.  The  long  vowels  given  in  this  lesson  are  as  follows: 
E,  as  in  see,  first  place  dot ;  a,  as  in  dame,  second  place 

dot;  a,  as  in  park,  third  place  dot;  aw,  as  in  saw,  first 
place  dash;  o,  as  in  low,  second  place  dash;  oo,  as  in 
cool,  third  place  dash. 

5.  The    student    should    note   particularly   that    a   first 


SHORTHAND  33 

place  vowel,  if  written  beside  letters  made  with  an  up- 
ward stroke  as  hay,  lay  or  ray,  is  written  at  the  lower  end 
of  these  letters  since  first  place  vowels  are  placed  at  the 
beginning  of  strokes  and  not  necessarily  at  the  top  of  up- 
right letters. 

6.     The   following  words   will   show   the   different  posi- 
tions of  the  long  vowels : 


See         peek      dame    aid      barge       palm      saw    paw      low       poke      cool      coop 

7.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  dashes  are  written  at  right 
angles  to  the  strokes  with  which  they  occur.     They  should 
always  be  so  placed.     When  a  vowel  comes  before  an  up- 
right consonant  it  should  be  written  to  the  left  and  when  it 
follows,  to  the  right  of  the  consonant  stroke.     When  a 
vowel  precedes  a  horizontal  letter  it  is  written  above  and 
when  it  follows,  it  is  placed  below  the  consonant  stroke. 

8.  When   a  vowel   occurs  between   two  consonants   it 
becomes  possible  to  write  it  either   following  and  beside 
the  first  stroke  or  preceding  and  beside  the  second  stroke. 
The   following  rules   should  be  observed   in   writing  long 
vowels,  when  they  occur  between  two  consonants  and  it 
becomes  necessary  to  insert  them  : 

(1)  When  a  first  place  or  second  place  long  vowel 
is  used  between  two  consonants,  it  should  be  placed  beside 
and  after  the  first  of  the  two  strokes,  as  in  peek,  dame,  poke. 

(2)  When  a  third  place  long  vowel  is  used  between 
two  consonants  it  should  be  placed  beside  and  before  the 
second  of  the  strokes  between  which  it  occurs,  as  in  barge, 
cool. 

9.  These  rules  should  be  thoroughly  committed  to  mem- 
orv  since  the  vowels  are  so  seldom  used  that  the  rules  relat- 


34  PITMANIC 

ing  to  them  will  easily  be  forgotten  unless  firmly  fixed  in 
the  mind. 

10.  The  reasons  for  always  placing  all  first  place  vowels 
beside  the  first  and  all  third  place  vowels  beside  the  second 
stroke  when  used  between  two  consonants  is  to  avoid  having 
vowels  occur  in  angles.     In  such  a  position  it  would  be 
impossible  to  tell  whether  a  vowel  is  intended  as  a  third 
place  vowel  beside  the  first  stroke  or  a  first  place  vowel 
beside  the  second. 

11.  For  practice  in  the  use  of  the  vowels,  the  list  words 
in  this  lesson  are  to  be  written  from  fifty  to  one  hundred 
times,  if  need  be,  to  enable  the  student  to  write  them  readily 
and  accurately  in  the  time  specified.     They  should  be  read 
as  often  as  written.     The  student  should  understand  that  the 
words  in  this  lesson  are  not  usually  vocalized.     They  are 
given  merely  for  the  purpose  of  giving  the  student  practice 
in  inserting  the  vowels.     Section  one  in  this  lesson  explains 
when  the  accented  vowel  should  be  inserted  in  an  outline. 


EXERCISE  9. 

12.  List  Words.     (40 — 2:15.) 

i  Jaw,  2  sue,  3  tomb,  4  pay,  5  no,  6  may,  7  heap,  8  gape, 
9  peep,  10  league,  n  team,  12  ream,  13  tjfr,  14  tool,  15  peak, 
16  poke,  17  rope,  18  bar,  19  rogue,  20  reek,  21  cape,  22  roam, 
23  calm,  24  lark,  25  pale,  26  gale,  27  pojjr,  28  knoll,  29  joke, 
30  Paul,  31  porch,  32  make,  33  vale,  34  oat,  35  sheep, 
36  kneel,  37  coke,  38  vague,  39  bore,  40  tame. 

13.  The  signs  for  on  and  should,  in  the  following  list 
of  wordsigns,  are  written  with  upward  strokes.     All  the 
other  tick  signs  are  written  with  downward  strokes. 


SHORTHAND  35 

14.     Wordsigns. 


of      to        or  but     on   should     all       too   already    before   ought   who 

two  oh,  owe 


how         much       whom        thing         single  ah       awe  magazine 

home         English 

15.  The  word  much  is  sometimes  written  in  full  (em- 
chay).     This  is  done  when  it  is  desired  to  phrase  it  and  the 
wordsign,  chay,  does  not  form  a  distinct  angle  with  the 
preceding-  letter.     For  example,  the  phrase  so-much,  may 
be  written  more  quickly  by  joining  the  words  and  writing 
much  em-chay  than  to  use  chay  alone  for  much  and  disjoin- 
ing it,  as  would  be  necessary  if  chay,  the  wordsign  for 
much,  were  used. 

1 6.  Phrases.     (60— i  :oo.) 

i  Of-my,  2  of-that,  3  all-my-money,  4  to-make,  5  to-think. 
6  to-choose,  7  to-arrive,  8  two-checks,  9  too-much-money, 
10  br-go,  TI  already-going-back,25  12  come-and-go,  13  be- 
fore-going, 14  on-that,  15  on-that-day,  16  on-top,  17  you- 
should-take,  18  before-that,  19  should-think,  20  who-came, 
21  much-money,  22  how-many,50  23  single-thing,  24  should- 
take-it,  25  who-comes,  26  who-may-come.60 

17.  Whenever  possible,  the  student  should  have  some 
one  read  the  exercises  to  him  when  he  practices  upon  them, 
since  it  is  better  for  one  to  learn  to  write  from  dictation 
than  by  copying. 

18.  Sentences.     (104 — 1:45.) 

i  He-will  sell  all  of-his  potatoes  in-the-city.  2  I-will  re- 
ceive many-times  as-much  for-my  poem  as  James  will  for 


36  PITMANIC 

his.25  3  Is-he-coming  and-how-many  will  he  take? 
4  They  should-think  of  all  things  before  they-leave.  5  I- 
suppose  he-will-never  go.  6  They50  pay  a-low  rate  for  coal. 

7  You   ought  to-go   and-take-your   lesson   in-this   subject. 

8  I-will-inform  them  of  the-rate.     9    Joseph75  should-talk 
less  or  he-ought  to-leave  the-society.      10    I-am-going  so 
you-will  have  to-come  away,     n    I  rarely  take-your  car- 
riage100 as  I-dislike-it.104 

19.     Translation. 

J"^  \  'J-  S**-^.  ' 

N 


LESSON  X. 

REVIEW. 

i.    QUESTIONS: 

(i)     What  class  of  words  are  represented  in  Short- 
hand by  abbreviated  outlines,  or  wordsigns? 

(2}     Are  the  Longhand  abbreviations  commonly  used? 
(3)     About  how  many  words  are  represented  by  ab- 


SHORTHAND  37 

breviated  outlines,  or  wordsigns,  in  Shorthand? 

(4)  Are  the  outlines  for  words,  for  which  there  are 
wordsigns,  ever  written  in  full  ? 

(5)  How   do  you   write  outlines   for   words   derived 
from  primitives  represented  by  wordsigns?     Give  four  il- 
lustrations. 

(6)  What  part  of  the  outline  for  a  word,  for  which 
there  is  a  wordsign,  usually  constitutes  the  sign? 

(7)  What  is  the  purpose  of  phrasing  in  Shorthand? 

(8)  When    several    words    are    joined  by    phrasing 
which  word  governs  the  position  of  the  phrase? 

(9)  What  is  the  word  which  governs  the  position  of 
a  phrase  called? 

(  10)  Can  the  second  and  following  words  of  a  phrase 
be  given  any  special  position  in  reference  to  the  line? 

(n)  What  is  the  rule  in  regard  to  the  angle  which 
must  be  made  between  the  words  in  a  phrase? 

(12)  Is  it  proper  to  phrase  the  last  word  in  a  sen- 
tence with  the  first  word  in  the  following  sentence? 

(13)  Should  proper  names  ever  be  phrased  with  other 
words  ? 

(14)  What  is  the  usual  tendency  with  beginners  in 
the  use  of  the  principle  of  phrasing? 

(15)  What  method  has  been  adopted  in  this  book  to 
give  students  proper  practice  in  phrasing? 

(16)  Name  the  five  words  for  which  there  are  two 
sets  of  wordsigns, 

(17)  What  is  the  object  of  having  two  sets  of  signs 
for  each  of  these  words? 

(18)  What  effect  does  it  have  upon  the  leader  of 
a  phrase  to  have  it  begin  with  one  of  the  words  which  has 
two  signs? 

(19)  Which  of  these  two  sets  of  signs  is  the  more 


449532 


38  PITMANIC 

commonly  used? 

(20)  Describe  each  of  the  two  signs  for  the  words 
which  have  two  signs. 

(21)  When  both  of  the  tick  signs  for  a,  an  or  and 
make  a  distinct  angle  with  a  word  which  should  be  given 
the  preference? 

(22)  In  what  direction  is  the  tick  sign  for  he  always 
written  ? 

(23)  Why  should  the  joined  signs,  or  ticks,  always 
be  used  when  it  is  possible  to  use  them? 

(24)  When  the  wordsign  for  I  is  phrased  how  is  it 
usually  written? 

(25)  Under   what   conditions   is   it   allowable   to   use 
the  stroke  hay  for  the  word  he  in  phrasing?     Give  an 
example. 

(26)  In  what  way  besides  the  use  of  the  strokes  es 
and  ze  may  the  sounds  of  s  and  z  be  represented? 

/-    (27)      Is  the   s-circle  ever  used  to  represent  s  or  z 
except  when  written  in  connection  with  some  stroke? 
>i_       (28)     When   used    with    straight    letters   upon    which 
side  of  the  letters  must  it  be  written? 

(29)  Upon  which  side  of  curved  letters? 

(30)  When  the  s-circle  comes  between  two  straight 
letters  which  form  an  angle  where  is  it  written  ? 

(31)  When  between  a  straight  and  a  curved  letter  ? 

(32)  When  between  two  curved  letters? 

(33)  In  referring  to  the  s-circle  sign  for  s  or  z  how 
do  we  distinguish  it  from  es  or  ze,  the  names  of  the  strokes  ? 

(34)  When  s  or  z  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word 
\vhen  must  the  stroke  and  when  must  the  circle  be  used? 

(35)  When  s  or  z  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word 
when  must  the  stroke  and  when  must  the  circle  be  used? 

(36)  When  s  or  z  comes  between  two  other  conso- 


SHORTHAND  39 

nants  in  a  word  which  sign  is  usually  used? 

(37)  When  iss  comes  between  two  curved  letters  one 
of  which  represents  the  sound  of  1,  which  is  used,  el  or  lay? 

(38)  In  what  cases  is  it  necessary  for  vowels  to  be 
inserted  ? 

(39)  Name    all    the  long   vowels    and    describe    the 
character  by  which  each  is  represented. 

(40)  What  is  meant  by  first  place,  second  place  and 
third  place  vowels  ?  • 

(41)  Is  a  first  place  vowel  always  written  at  the  top 
of  upright  consonants  beside  which  it  may  be  placed? 

(42)  How  are  the  dash  vowels  written  in  reference 
to  the  strokes  beside  which  they  are  placed  ? 

(43)  When  a  vowel  is  to  be  read  before  a  consonant 
on  which  side  of  upright  and  on  which  side  of  horizontal 
letters  must  it  be  placed  ? 

(44)  Where  must  a  vowel  be  placed  when  it  is  to  be 
read  after  a  consonant? 

(45)»  When  a  first  place  long  vowel  is  written  be- 
tween two  consonants  beside  which  must  it  be  placed? 

(46)  When  a  second  place  long  vowel  is  written 
between  two  consonants  where  must  it  be  placed  ? 

(47)  Wrhen  a  third  place  long  vowel  is  written  be- 
tween   two    consonants    beside    which    stroke    must    it    be 
written  ? 

(48)  Why  is  it  necessary  to  place  third  place  long 
vowels  beside  the  second  of  the  two  consonants  between 
which  they  occur? 

EXERCISE  10. 

2.     List  Words.     (48 — :so.) 

Picnic  lady  comic  heavy  honey  assign  edge  keg  comedy 
poke  guinea  joke  army  ferry  delay  hurry  power  rogue  face 


40  PITMANIC 

slave  knows  mason  noisome  nuisance  yes25  muzzle  resign 
chosen  basin  fizzle  guessing  disown  Minnesota  suppose  gape 
poke  rope  rogue  roam  gale  pour  knoll  joke  porch  vale 
coke  bore  tame.48 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Y"Them,  was,  shall,  have,  for,  which,  come,  usual,  (usually,) 
think,  essential,  (essentially,)  together,  never,  your,  he, 
especial,  (especially,)  are,  regular,  irregular,  become,  you, 
notwithstanding,  peculiar,  (peculiarity,)  New- York,  will, 
him,  I,  (high,  aye,  eye,)  the,  a,  (an,  and,)  advantage,  lan- 
guage, help,  popular,  familiar,  efficient,  November,  health, 
chapter,  object,  change,  dignity,  faithful,  (faithfully,)  in, 
(any,)  illegible,  legible,  perform,  rather,  represent;  (repre- 
sented, representative,)  reform,  that,  ye,  (year,  years,)  as, 
(has,)  is,  (his,)  always,  acknowledge,  New- York-City,  pub- 
lic, (publish,  published,)  knowledge,  several,  (Savior,)  spec- 
ial, (spoke,)  subject,  something,  sufficient,  (sufficiently,) 
advantageous,  electric,  (electricity,)  for-the-purpose-of, 
February,  forsake,  (for-the-sake-of,)  January,  o,f,  to,  or, 
but,  on,  should,  all,  too,  (two,)  already,  before,  (oh,  owe,) 
ought,  who,  how,  much,  whom,  (home,)  thing,  (English,) 
single,  ah,  awe,  magazine. 

4.  Phrases.     (50 — :55.) 

Will-you-come,  he-may-go,  may-you-come,  have-you- 
many,  a-day-may-come,  I-think-you-will,  I-will,  he-will- 
make,23  the-advantage,  you-may-help,  the-day,  the-change, 
help-him,  I-object,  an-illegible,  perform-your,  the-chapter, 
your-health,  and-rather,  may-go.50 

5.  Sentences.     (139 — 2:20.) 

i  I-will  go  and-take-your-money.  2  You-say  you-know 
that  he-will  go  away.  3  The-copy  was-so  illegible  he-will 
take-it.1'"'  4  He-will-take  your  heavy-team.  5  The-slave 
will-take-vour  music-box  into-the-citv.  6  Will-vou-acknowl- 


SHORTHAND  41 

edge  he-has  some-rights  in-such50  a-case?  7  He- will  for- 
sake-you.  8  He-has-no  knowledge  that  will  help  us  in- 
this-case.  9.  He-will  sell  his  potatoes  in-the-city.75  10  I- 
will  receive  many-times  as-much  for-my  poem  as  James 
will  for  his.  1 1  Is-he-coming  and-how-many  will  he-take  ? 

12  They100   should-think   of  all   things  before  they-leave. 

13  I-suppose  he-will-never  go.     14    They  pay  a-low  rate 
for  coal.     15    You  ought  to-go125  and-take-your  lesson  in- 
this  subject.     16    I-will-inform  them  of-the-rate.139 


LESSON  XL 

SHORT  VOWELS. 

1.  The  short  vowels  are  represented  by  light  dots  and 
dashes  in  the  same  positions  as  the  long  vowels.     They 
are  as  follows :  i  as  in  sit,  first  place  dot ;  e  as  in  net,  second 
place  dot;  a  as  in  sat,  third  place  dot;  o  as  in  lot,  first 
place  dash;  u  as  in  cut,  second  place  dash;  oo  as  in  look, 
third  place  dash. 

2.  The  following  illustrations  show  the  use  of  the  short  . 
vowels : 


pick  ill      sit    egg          beg      edge        map  a«k  rock 


hug  look  rook 


3.     \Yith  one  exception,  the  rules  for  placing  the  short 
vowels   beside   the   strokes,    when   occurring  between   two 


42  PITMANIC 

consonants,   are   exactly  the  same   as  those   for  the  long 
vowels. 

4.  The  exception  is  in  the  rule  governing  second  place 
short  vowels  when  used.     A  second  place  short  vowel, 
when  written  between  two  strokes,  is  put  beside  and  before 
the  second  consonant.     The  following  is  a  summary  of 
the  rules  for  placing  both  long  and  short  vowels  when 
used  between  two  consonant  strokes : 

(1)  All  first  place  vowels,  long  or  short,  and  second 
place  long  vowels  are  written  beside  the  first  consonant. 

(2)  All  third  place  vowels,  long  or  short,  and  second 
place  short  vowels  are  written  beside  the  second  consonant. 

5.  When  two  separately  pronounced  vowels  are  to  be 
written  between  two  consonants,  as  in  Lewis,  the  vowel  oc- 
curring first  in  the  word  is  written  near  the  stroke,  beside 
which  it  would  be  placed,  if  it  were  the  only  vowel  occurring 
between  the  two  consonants,  and  the  second  vowel  is  written 
beside   and    slightly   removed    from   the   consonant   beside 
which  it  would  be  placed,  if  it  were  the  only  vowel  between 
the    two    consonants.     When    two    separately    pronounced 
vowels  are  to  be  written  either  before  or  after  a  single  con- 
sonant, as  in  iota  or  Leo,  the  vowel  occurring  first  when 
the  two  occur  before  the  stroke,  is  written  slightly  removed 
from  it  and  the  one  coming  next  is  placed  near  the  stroke. 
When  the  two  vowels  follow,  the  one  coming  first  is  written 
near  the  stroke  and  the  second  is  removed  slightly  from  it. 

EXERCISE  ii. 

Using  both  long  and  short  vowels  write  the  folowing 
words : 

6.  List  Words.     (41 — i  :3o.) 

i  marrow,  2  sell,  3  mob,  4  lap,  5  essay,  6  lip,  7  pony, 
8  funny,  9  Leon,  10  dairy,  u  big,  12  putty,  13  lazy,  14  bag, 


SHORTHAND  43 

15  dig,  1 6  rug,  17  tare,  18  petty,  19  dare,  20  tick,  21  pitch, 
22  catch,  23  egg,  24  edge,  25  smudge,  26  budge,  27  engage, 
28  dumb,  29  allay,  30  fellow,  31  pith,  32  ledge,  33  look, 
34  rock,  35  lock,  36  tuck,  37  knock,  38  nook,  39  smack, 
40  rack.  41  deck. 


Wordsigns. 

f 


A.   'M.          advertising          common     dollar      ever        give          hear 
advertisement  given       here 

advertise-d,  had  her 


y 

iarge 

\ 

must-be 

now 

P. 

M. 

watch 

income 

forthwith 

nothii 

8.  Phrases.     (45 — :4o.) 

i  An-edge,  2  will-engage-him,  3  however-much,  4  in-the- 
cage,  5  will-sell-it,  6  a-funny-sight,  7  a-tame-goose,  8  a- 
large-egg,  9  on-the-ledge,23  10  a-pretty-case,  n  in-the-rack, 
12  a-large-rock,  13  you-will-know,  14  you-may-go,  15  that- 
must-be,  16  go-forthwith.4'"' 

9.  Sentences.     (147 — 2:25.) 

i  James  may-leave  for-the-city  on  the-fourth  of  July. 
2  You-should  take-advantage  of-his-knowledge.  3  They 
have  oats  and-hay  for  sale.-5  4  Come  here  before  two  p. 
m.  and-take  all-your-money.  5  Study-the  English  lan- 
guage thoroughly  and-you-will  succeed  in-this  subject. 
6  Thomas  Adams'"'0  will-take  the-carriage  and-heavy-team 
for-two-weeks.  7  I-think-that  yon-must-be  going  to  take 
all-your  oats  to  the-depot.75  8  Will  any-of  the-officers  take- 
advantage  of  the-error?  9  Nothing  was-said  of  the-change 
of-time  for  his  office  duties.  10  They  make  many100  heavy 
carriages  for  sale,  n  Take  away  your  desks  Tuesday  for 
I-shall  occupy  all-the-room.  1-2  That  was  a-common-thing 


44  PITMANIC 

for  Ezra  to-go125  away  and-stay  a-day  or  two.  13  He-never 
says  before  he-goes  that-he-will  stay  away  for  so-many 
days.147 

10.     Translation. 


LESSON  XU. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

1.  In  addition  to  the  simple  vowels  already  explained, 
we  have  the  following  diphthongs  : 

2.  Oi,  as  in  toil  ;  wi,  as  in  wife,  written  in  the  first  posi- 
tion ;  and  ow  as  in  vow,  written  in  the  third  position.     Long 
i  is  treated  as  a  diphthong  and  is  represented  by  a  character 
like  the  wordsign  for  the  pronoun  I.     It  takes  the  first  posi- 
tion.    The  diphthongs  are  illustrated  as  follows: 


V.  "]    t   f  ") 


boll         oil  boy          wife     wide     twice      tile          Ice          endow 

c   7 


'M 

fowl        idea         wipe    wire     invoice         envoy         row         joy      cow          cowl 


SHORTHAND  45 

3.  When  any  of  the  first  place   diphthongs  precedes 
the  first  consonant  in  an  outline  and  forms  an  angle  with 
it,  or  the  third  place  diphthong  follows  and  forms  an  angle 
with  the  last  consonant  in  an  outline,  it  should  be  joined, 
as  shown  in  the  illustrations  above.     In  no  other  case  should 
the  diphthongs  ever  be  joined. 

4.  The  rules  governing  the  long  and  short  vowels  when 
used  between  two  consonant  strokes  apply  to  the  diphthongs 
given  in  this  lesson  when  they  occur  between  two  strokes. 

5.  The   student  should  write  and  re-write  many  times 
the  words  given  in  this  and  the  preceding  lesson,  inserting 
the  vowels  and  diphthongs,  wherever  they  occur,  in  each 
outline,  until  thoroughly  familiar  with  their  use. 

6.  The  diphthongs,  like  the  simple  vowels,  are  seldom 
inserted  in  actual  reporting.     It  is,  however,  important  that 
they  be  thoroughly  committed  to  memory  in  order  that,  in 
the  few  cases  where  it  is  advisable  to  write  them,  they  may 
be  inserted  readily.     The  fact  that  a  character  is  seldom 
used  in  actual  reporting  is  apt  to  lead  the  student  to  slight 
it.     He  should,  rather,  give  it  especial  attention.     If  he  does 
not  do  so,  he  is  certain  to  be  unable  to  recall  it  readily  when 
he  has  urgent  need  to  use  it  quickly. 

EXERCISE  12. 

Using  the  diphthongs  write  the  following  words: 

7.  List  Words.     (40 — 1 115.)  fa 

i  Pipe,  2  pike,  3  dime,  -"4  chime,  5  rhyme,  6  boy,  7  toy, 
8  coy,  9  alloy,  10  boil,  n  coil,  12  tile,  13  guile,  14  mile, 
15  soil,  1 6  revile,  17  loyal,  18  row,  19  vow,  20  cow,  21  envoy, 
22  fowl,  23  thigh,  24  dire,  25  hie,  26  towel,  27  wipe,  28  wide, 
29  wife,  30  wire,  31  dye,  32  pile,  33  toil,  34  cowl,  35  royal, 
36  invoice,  37  joy,  38  voyage,  39  vouch,  40  type. 


46  *  PITMANIC 

8.     Wordsigns. 


we       were    what    would    hath    as-well-as     mistake        wish  Ohio 

with  thank 

youth 

9.  Phrases.     (67 — 1 105.) 

i  That-dike,  2  an-envoy,  3  a-towel,  4  make-them,  5  I- 
may-go,  6  I-have-enough,  7  you-enjoy,  8  you-will-endow, 
9  take-the-cow,  10  he-may-come,25  n  you-revile-him,  12  and- 
say-you-will,  13  I-see-how,  14  on-the-pike,  15  hear-the- 
chime,  16  he-will-die,  17  take-a-cake,  18  a-heavy-invoice,5Ct 
19  a- funny- fellow,  20  what-do-you-like,  21  a-heavy-stock. 
22  will-you-come-up,  23  he-goes-away.67 

10.  Sentences.     (186 — 3:00.) 

I  Both  the-ladies  will-take  several  cakes  with-them  on 
Saturday.  2  They  both  think  that  two-hours'  study  a-day 
is  enough  for-this  subject.25  3  In-this  they-make  a-mistake 
for-all  should-give  several  hours  a-day  to-this  study. 
4  They  both  go  to  Duluth,  Minnesota,  and-will50  engage 
in-business  in-that  large  city.  5  Take-time  enough  to-day 
and-never-leave  a-thing  for  tomorrow  which-it-is  your  duty 
to-do75  to-day.  6  He-always-goes  on  Saturdays  to-the-city 
for  some  oat-meal  and-eggs  to-eat.  7  The-electric  road 
may-reach-here  in-four100  months  and-all  will  take-a-ride 
to-the-city.  8  Should  you-sell  your  cow  you-will  have  to 
go  for-milk  to  Joseph  Thompson's125  dairy  and-pay  a-high 
rate.  9  Your-son  James  will  take  both  the-pail  and- jug  to 
the-depot  and-will  hurry  home.  10  Any-boy150  who- will- 
stick  to-his-task  faithfully  will  succeed  in-his-business  in- 
time,  ii  You-may  take-them  a-case  of  herring  to-day 
12  Have  same175  come  on  the-electric  road  as-the-rate  is 
much  lower. lss 


SHORTHAND  47 

ii.     Translation. 


LESSON  XIII. 

CONSONANT   POSITION. 

1.  As  has  been  explained  before,  the  vowels  are  very 
seldom  inserted  in  actual  reporting.     Usually  the  consonant 
outline  and  the  context  are  all  that  are  required  to  secure 
legibility.     However,  constructions  sometimes  occur  where, 
in  addition  to  the  outline  and  context,  the  accented  vowel 
is   necessary   in   order   to   obtain   the   exact   meaning.     To 
actually   insert  this   vowel   would   often   require   too   much 
time.     In   such   cases,   where  legibility  makes  it  necessary 
that  the  accented  vowel  be  known,  it  is  seldom  necessary 
to  actually  insert  it.     By  the  use  of  what  is  called  consonant 
position,  the  accented  vowel  may  be  indicated,  thus  saving 
the  time  which  would  be  required  to  insert  it. 

2.  There   are   three   positions    for   consonant   outlines: 


48  PITMANIC 

i,  above;  2,  on;  and  3,  through  or  below  the  line.  These 
correspond  to  the  three  vowel  positions.  By  means  of 
these  three  positions  it  is  possible  to  indicate  whether  the 
accented  vowel  in  a  word  is  first,  second  or  third  place. 

3.  In  reference  to  position,  outlines  are  divided  into  two 
classes. 

(1)  Those  which  contain  one  or  more  upright  letters. 
These  are  called  upright  outlines. 

(2)  Those  in  which  all  the  strokes  are  horizontal.   These 
are  called  horizontal  outlines. 

4.  An  upright  outline  is  in  the  first  position  when  the 
first  upright  letter  rests  one-half  the  length  of  te  above  the 
line  upon   which  the   writing  is  being  done.     Horizontal 
outlines  in  the  first  position  are  placed  the  full  length  of 
te  above  the  line.       An  upright  outline  is  in  the  second 
position  when  its  first  upright  letter  rests  on  the  line.     Hor- 
izontal outlines  in  the  second  position  are  just  above  the 
line.     An  upright  outline  is  in  the  third  position  when  its 
first  upright  letter  rests  one-half  a  space  below  the  line. 
Horizontal  outlines  in  the  third  position  are  immediately 
below  the  line. 

5.  The  purpose  of  position  is  to  enable  the  reporter  to 
indicate  the  principal  or  accented  vowel  in  a  word  in  the 
cases  where  it  is  necessary  to  know  what  the  accented  vowel 
is,  thus  saving  the  time  it  would  take  to  insert  it.     If  a 
word  is  used  in  such  a  connection  that  it  is  necessary  to 
show  what  its  principal  vowel  is  in  order  to  make  it  clear, 
it  may  be  done  more  quickly  by  the  use  of  position  than  by 
actually  inserting  the  vowel. 

6.  If  the  accented  vowel  is  first,  second  or  third  place, 
it  may  be  indicated  by  writing  the  outline  in  the  first,  sec- 
ond or  third  consonant  position.     Thus  the  sentence,  He 
was  living  on  the  farm,  might,  when  written  in  Shorthand, 


SHORTHAND  49 

be  translated.  He  was  levying  on  the  farm.  Such  danger 
of  ambiguity  would  readily  be  overcome  by  writing  the  out- 
line for  living,  the  accented  vowel  of  which  is  first  place, 
if  that  were  the  wTord  desired,  in  the  first  position.  They 
are  taking  too  much,  and  They  are  talking  too  much, 
would  be  another  case  where  ambiguity  might  result.  All 
danger  would  be  avoided  by  placing  the  outline  for  the 
word  talking,  the  accented  vowel  of  which  is  first  place,  in 
the  first  position,  if  the  sentence  with  that  word  were  used. 
7.  Examples  of  first  and  third  position  outlines : 


miring          meekness        museum      apology      pealing      falsity         fealty 


\    \ 

V     vg^  o 


^ 

'    v  — 

purity        nuisance      abuse    absence         mooring       refuse         foolish        boorish 

8.  The  scheme  of  position  is  used  to  save  the  time  which 
would  otherwise  be  required  for  the  insertion  of  accented 
vowels  where  necessary  to  avoid  ambiguity.  This  is  likely 
to  occur  only  when  one  of  the  following  conditions  exists  : 

(  i  )  Where  an  outline  is  the  same  for  two  different 
words,  either  of  which  would  make  sense  where  that  outline 
is  used. 

(2)  When  some  unusual  word  is  used. 

(3)  When    a    common    wrord    is    used    in    an    unusual 
manner. 

Just  where  these  conditions  would  lead  to  ambiguity  by 
writing,  in  the  second  position,  outlines  for  words  with  first 
or  third  position  accented  vowrels,  is  a  question  each  one  must 
settle  for  himself.  Even  in  the  illustrations  given  above, 
what  precedes  would  in  most  cases  make  it  perfectly  clear 
whether  lay-ve-ing  meant  living  or  levying,  or  whether 


50  PITMANIC 

te-kay-ing  meant  taking  or  talking.     Consequently  the  fol-. 
lowing  general  rule  only  can  be  given : 

If  it  is  evident  that  a  word  with  either  a  first  or  third 
place  accented  vowel,  would  in  some  particular  connection 
be  ambiguous  if  written  on  the  line,  it  should  be  written  in 
the  position  of  its  accented  vowel. 

9.  Stenographers  will  find,  as  they  write  more  and  more, 
they  will  need  to  make  less  and  less  use  of  consonant  posi- 
tion, or  the  actual  insertion  of  vowels. 

10.  Outlines  for  single  syllable  words  are  always  the 
most  difficult  to  read  because  of  the  fact  that  they  contain 
but  few  consonants.     It  is  coming  to  be  the  custom,  there- 
fore, with  many  writers  to  give  outlines  for  such  words  the 
position  of  their  vowel.     This  is  an  excellent  rule  to  follow. 
When  outlines  are  actually  vocalized  there  is  no  occasion 
to  write  them  other  than  in  the  second  position. 

11.  With  wordsigns  the  rule  is  always  to  give  them"  the 
position  shown  in  the  text  when  they  are  written  alone  or 
when  they  begin  a  phrase. 

EXERCISE  13. 

The  following  list  contains  a  few  of  the  words  which  the 
reporter  will  find  it  necessary  most  frequently  to  place  in 
position.  These  words,  however,  need  not  in  ordinary  use 
be  given  the  position  of  the  accented  vowel.  This  is  neces- 
sary only  when  they  are  used  in  some  connection  where  it 
is  evident  that  the  accented  vowel  should  be  indicated.  They 
are  given  here  to  be  written  in  position  merely  to  give  the 
student  practice  in  position  writing. 

12.  List  Words.     (52 — 1 120.) 

i  Occupy,  2  abide,  3  joyous,  4  deity,  5  assign,  6  talking, 
7  lively,  8  icy,  9  meekness,  10  boiling,  n  ally,  12  sighing, 
13  living,  14  filing,  15  enjoy,  16  seating,  17  unseat,  18  easily, 


SHORTHAND  51 

19  rocking,  20  ticking,  21  bower,  22  untie,  23  poising, 
24  July,  25  tally,  26  allow,  27  folly,  28  envoy,  29  invoice, 
30  incite,  31  elegy,  32  issue,  33  incense,  34  music,  35  entomb, 
36  endow}  37  endue,  38  tower,  39  power,  40  imbue,  41  ca- 
rouse, 42  espouse,  43  atom,  44  museum,  45  unloose,  46  hon- 
esty, 47  sightly,  48  aloud,  49  aloof,  50  poorly,  51  nuisance, 
52  unseen. 

13.     Wordsigns. 

/        U-   t     


acquit         because    be-        catho-    etc.       continue      domestic      disadvantage 
acute  yond     lie 


Decem-    expect        ex-          en-        Europe     false-       failure       hope          howsoever 
ber  expected    change   large  hood  happy 


V 


holy       holiness  happiness    highly     highway       hence     height     higher     company 

Iowa 

14.  Phrases.     (64 — i  :oo.) 

i  I-will,  2  he-is,  3  my-life,  4  is-he,  5  he-said,  6  due-you, 
7  by-that,  8  by-which-many,  9.  by-doing-so,  10  a-poor- 
reason,  n  give-me,25  12  give-his,  13  keep-cool,  14  if-they, 
15  I-like,  16  I- feel-nothing,  17  I-have-nothing,  18  it-is- 
long,  19  due-many-months,  20  will-you-come,  21  you-come,50 
22  he-may-go-up,  23  as-that-is,  24  has-he-come-back,  25  will- 
take-him.64 

15.  Sentences.     (214 — 3:30.) 

i  If-you-will  come-back  he-will  give-up  all-your  books 
ancl-money.  2  I-think  I-will  come-back  in  December  and-I- 
may-r>  come  in  November.  3  The- jury  will  acquit-him. 


52  PITMANIC 

4  Because  of-the-loss  he-will  never  come-back.  5  He-goes- 
to  Europe  in-company  with-his50  cousin  who-lives  beyond 
the-lake.  6  I-expect  to  exchange  my  house  or  enlarge  it 
in-the-summer.  7  She-is  a-domestic  at  Ezra  Thompson's.75 
8  He-is-at  a-di  sad  vantage  so  he- will  soon  leave  with  a-new- 
company.  9  He-will  make  a-failure  if-he  stays  in-the-city.100 
10  Hence  I-think  he-would-be  much  happier,  if-he-would- 
make  a-change.  n  The-chimney  is  so  high  it-may  fall. 

12  You-will-have125    much   happiness    in-your   new-home. 

13  Howsoever  much-you  may  wish  to-do  so  you-should 
ne~ver  give-your  cousin  cause  to  feel  that-he150  has-to  look 
to-you  for  a-living.     14   You-should  look  him  right  in  the- 
eye  and-say  to-him  that-you  deny  the- falsehood.175     15    I- 
think  you- will  all  make  a-failure  if-you  give  but  four  hours 
to   the-study    each    day.      16     Ship    to-me   to-day    eight200 
reams  of  fair  stock  for  my  office  and-six  reams  for  our 
new  factory.214 

1 6.     Translation. 


SHORTHAND  53 

LESSON  XIV. 

THE  SEZ-CIRCLE. 

1.  The  consonant  sounds  of  es  and  ze,  or  some  combina- 
tion of  these  two  sounds,  frequently  occur  in  succession  in 
a   word.     When  these  two  consonants  so  occur  they  are 
represented  by  what  is  called  the  sez-circle.     This  is  a  circle 
made  several  times  larger  than  the  s-circle.     The  sez-circle 
is  written  upon  the  same  side  of  strokes  as  the  s-circle. 

2.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  sounds  represented  by 
this  circle  be  in  the  same  syllable.     In  the  majority  of  cases, 
this   large  circle  which  stands   for  es-es,   es-ze,  ze-es  or 
ze-ze,  has  the  first  sound  of  this  combination  at  the  end  of 
one  syllable  and  the  second  at  the  beginning  of  the  following 
syllable.     Care  should  be  taken  to  make  the  sez-circle  suffi- 
ciently large  that  there  may  be  no  danger  of  mistaking  it  for 
the  s-circle. 

3.  When  a  sez-circle  is  followed  by  the  sound  of  es  or 
ze  it  is  represented  by  an  s-circle  written  within  the  sez- 
circle  as  in  exercises. 

4.  The  use  of  the  sez-circle  is  illustrated  in  the  follow- 
ing words  : 

-0     ?     V      lo    £-. 


cases       races    bases     Texas    system    recess    Moses    empha-     sus-     exercises 

slz-e  plcious 

EXERCISE  14. 

Write  the  following  words  making  use  of  the  sez-circle: 
5.     List  Words.     (40—1  :io.) 

i  Texas,  2  races,  3  faces,  4  doses,  5  houses,  6  molasses, 
7  bases,  8  loses,  9  success,  10  nuisances,  n  exercise,  12  boss- 


54 


PITMANIC 


es,  13  system,  14  fences,  15  lances,  16  chases,  17  vases, 
1  8  invoices,  19  causes,  20  accessory,  21  masses,  22  emphasis, 
23  kisses,  24  laces,  25  noses,  26  pieces,  27  roses,  28  exist, 
29  suspicious,  30  maces,  31  necessary,  32  access,  33  amuses, 
34  resist,  35  rises,  36  hisses,  37  subsist,  38  desist,  39  neces- 
sity, 40  refuses. 

6.     Wordsigns. 


(o 


A*       Lo 


c 


this-is    eives-us    is-such    is-said 


lovee-us  takes-us  as-soon-as  is-as,  Is 
his,  his- 
has,  hls-ls 


as-is      is-seen 

influence 

signify          insignifl-       idea           lawyer 

mostly 

as-has 

signature     cant 

may-as- 

has-his 

significant 

well 

bas-as 

-V 

\ 

W~^     i         £ 

r 

—            V—- 

neverthe- 

postofflce 

postmark           half         thls-eyetem 

less 

7.  Phrases.     (75  —  1:15.) 

i  He-leases,  2  you-may-exist,  3  my-fuses,  4  it-is-neces- 
sary,  5  many-successes,  6  your-successor,  7  they-subsist, 
8  I-may-desist,  9  a-necessity,  10  I-insist,  II  my-exercises,25 
12  are-suspicious,  13  our-exercises,  14  took-the-axis,  15  pick- 
the-roses,  16  took-an-excess,  17  you-are-suspicious,  18  have- 
much-success,  19  take-some-laces,  20  you-  will-desist,50  21  he- 
exists,  22  he-will-desist,  23  will-take-the-masses,  24  he-gives- 
us,  25  this-is-time,  26  this-system-goes,  27  is-such-a-thing, 
28  has-his-come.73 

8.  Sentences.     (175  —  2:50.) 

i  Those  faces  are-familiar  to  me.  2  His  influence  on^ 
this-system  is-such  that-you-will  have  to-acknowledge  it. 


SHORTHAND  55 

3  I-will  go-back-to25  the-depot  and-take  the-lawyer's  cases 
to  the-postoffice  in-time  for  the-mail.  4  It-is-said  that-he- 
\\  ill  go-to  Iowa  this50  fall  and-stay  for  six  weeks.  5  He-may- 
as-well  come-back,  nevertheless,  for-all  of-his  influence  will- 
avail  nothing.  6  It-is75  significant  that-his  ideas  on-post- 
office  affairs  are  always  wrong,  notwithstanding  his  long 
and-thorough  study  of-that  business.  7  He-loves-us100 
though  we-do-make  many  mistakes  in-our  easy  lessons. 
8  As-soon-as  you  take  up  the-study  of  the-new  oil  business 
I-will125  help-you  by  taking  some  stock  in-it  and-by  giving- 
you  all  the-advice  which-you-may  desire.  9  The-youth  will- 
make  a-success150  of-his  study  of-this-system  of  book-keep- 
ing as-soon-as  you  give-him  a-job  to-help  with  the-books 
in-your  office.175 

g.     Translation. 

-/-  o_c ._  .  1  ^L^.^^^-^^r^^-^ 
„-».<  y  V  ^vVL^_±lLJLl 


A  r\-7-H  T,\  > 

' 


±^ 

h  / 


56  PITMANIC 


LESSON  XV. 

REVIEW. 

i.    QUESTIONS  : 

(1)  How    are   the   short   vowel    signs   distinguished 
from  the  long  vowels? 

(2)  When  a  short  first  place  vowel  is  written  between 
two  consonant  strokes,  beside  which  must  it  be  placed  ? 

(3)  When  a  short  second  place  vowel  is  written  be- 
tween two  strokes  beside  which  must  it  be  written? 

(4)  When  a  short  third  place  vowel  is  written  be- 
tween two  strokes  where  must  it  be  placed? 

(5)  How  do  these  rules  differ  from  those  given  for 
placing  the  long  vowels  between  two  consonant  strokes? 

(6)  When  two  separately  sounded  vowels  must  be 
written  between  two  consonant  strokes  where  must  each 
of  them  be  placed?     Give  example. 

(7)  What  is  the  rule  when  two  separately  pronounced 
vowels  must  be  written  beside  a  single  consonant?     Give 
example. 

(8)  Name   the   diphthongs   given    in   the   lesson   on 
diphthongs. 

(9)  Give  position  of  each. 

( 10)  May   these   diphthongs   ever  be   joined   to  the 
strokes  before  or  after  which  they  occur? 

(n)     If  so,  give  an  example  of  each  diphthong  so 
placed. 

(12)  What  is  the  rule  for  placing  diphthongs  beside 
the    consonants    when    occurring    between    two    consonant 
strokes  ? 

(13)  How  may  vowels  sometimes  be  indicated,  thus 


SHORTHAND  57 

making  it  unnecessary  to  write  them? 

(14)  How  many  consonant  positions  are  there? 

(15)  Name  them, 

( 16)  Where  is  an  upright  outline  written  when  placed 
in  the  first  position? 

(17)  When  in  the  Second  position? 

( 18)  When  in  the  third  position  ? 

(19)  Are   horizontal   outlines   when   in   the   first   or 
third  position  written  the  same  distance  from  the  line  as 
upright  outlines? 

(20)  What  is  the  purpose  of  position? 

(21)  WThat  vowel  in  a  word  is  indicated  by  the  con- 
sonant position  of  the  outline? 

(22)  Does  the  reporter  use  position  more,  of  less,  as 
he  becomes  more  experienced  as  a  stenographer? 

(23)  What  is  the  invariable  rule  in  reference  to  posi- 
tion in  writing  Wordsigns? 

(24)  What  does  the  sez-circle  represent? 

C       (25)     How  much  larger  than  the  s-circle  is  the  sez- 
circle? 

(26)  Is  it  ever  permissible  to  use  the  sez-circle  to 
represent  two  sounds  of  es  or  ze  in  two  different  syllables? 

(27)  On  which  side  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined 
should  the  sez-circle  be  written? 

EXERCISE  15. 
2.     List  Words.     (43 — -.55.) 

Essay  Leon  putty  pitch  edge  smudge  engage  allay  pith 
smack  pipe  dime  rhyme  alloy  revile  loyal  envoy  occupy 
joyous  assume  enjoy  folly  allow  carouse  espouse25  aloud 
Texas  races  doses  houses  molasses  success  nuisances  exercise 
accessory  masses  emphasis  pieces  suspicious  amuses  chases 
desist  refuses.43 


58  PITMANlfc 

3.  Wordsigns. 

A.  M.,  advertise,  (advertised,  advertisement,  advertising, 
had,)  common,  dollar,  ever,  give,  (given,)  hear,  (here,  her,) 
however,  large,  must-be,  now,  P.  M.,  watch,  income,  forth- 
with, nothing,  we,  (with,)  were,  what,  would,  hath,  (thank, 
youth,)  as-well-as,  mistake,  wish,  Ohio,  acquit,  (acute,) 
because,  beyond,  catholic,  etc.,  continue,  domestic,  disad- 
vantage, December,  expect,  (expected,)  exchange,  enlarge, 
Europe,  falsehood,  failure,  hope,  (happy,)  howsoever,  holy, 
holiness,  happiness,  highly,  highway,  (Iowa,)  hence,  height, 
higher,  company,  this-is,  gives-us,  is-such,  is-said,  loves-us, 
takes-us,  as-soon-as,  is-as,  (is-his,  his-has,  his-is,)  as-is, 
(as-has,  has-his,  has-as,)  is-seen,  influence,  signify,  (signa- 
ture, significant,)  insignificant,  idea,  lawyer,  mostly,  (may- 
as-well,)  nevertheless,  postoffice,  postmark,  half,  this-sys- 
tem. 

4.  Phrases.     (75 — i  :is.) 

i  Will-sell-it,  2  a-large-egg,  3  you-may-go,  4  that-must- 
be,  5  an-envoy,  6  they-may-go,  7  I-have-enough,  8  you-en- 
joy,  9  he-may-come,25  10  I-see-how,  n  he-will-die,  12,  a- 
heavy-stock,  13  he-goes-away,  14  he-is,  15  he-said,  16  by- 
that,  17  a-poor-reason,  18  give-me,  19  if-they,GO  20  I-have- 
nothing,  21  you-came,  22  as-that-is,  23  will-take-him,  24  he- 
leases,  25  it-is-necessary,  26  I-insist,  27  took-an-excess,  28  is- 
such-a-thing.75 

5.  Sentences.     (177 — 3:00.) 

i  James  may-leave  for-the-city  on  the-fourth  of  July. 
2  You-should  take-advantage  of-his-knowledge.  3  Will 
any-of  the-officers  take-advantage25  of  the-error?  4  They 
make  many  heavy  carriages  for  sale.  5  Any-boy  who-will- 
stick  to-his  task  faithfully  will  succeed  in-his-business  in50 
due  time.  6  You-may  take-them  a-case  of  herring  to-day. 
7  Have  same  come  on  the-electric  road  as-the-rate  is  much 


SHORTHAND  59 

lower.7"'  8  Hence  I-think  he-would-be  much  happier  if-he- 
would-make  a-change.  9  The-chimney  is  so  high  it-may 
fall.  10  Howsoever  much-yon100  may  wish  to-do  so  you- 
shoukl  never  make-your  cousin  feel  that-he  has-to  look  to- 
yon  for  a-living.  1 1  It-is  significant1-"'  that  all-his  ideas  on- 
postoffice  affairs  are  always  wrong,  notwithstanding  his 
long  and-thorough  study  of -that  business.  12  As-soon-as 
you  take  up1'"'"  the-stucly  of  the-new  oil  business  I-will  help- 
yon  by  taking  some  stock  in-it  and-giving-you  all  the-advice 
\vhich-you17r<  may  desire.177 


- 

LESSON  XVI. 
THE  KMP  SIGN. 

1.  When  p  or  b  follows  and  is  in  the  same  syllable  with 
an  m,  it  is  not  written,  but  is  indicated  by  shading  em.     Em 
thus  shaded  is  called  emp. 

2.  Emp  is  used  to  indicate  a  p  or  b  in  a  following  sylla- 
ble when  the  two  syllables  are  sounded  closely  together,  as 
in  embark.     The  use  of  emp  to  indicate  a  p  of  b  in  a  fol- 
lowing syllable  is  permissible  only  in   words  where  the  p 
or  b  coalesces  more  closely   with  the  preceding  em  than 
with   the    following   consonant.     This    is    usually    the   case 
where  an  m  ends  one  syllable  and  the  following  begins  with 
a  p  or  b. 

In  imply,  for  example,  emp  would  not  be  used  for  the 
reason  that  the  p,  although  beginning  the  syllable  following 
the  one  ending  in  m,  coalesces  more  closely  with  the  follow- 
ing 1  than  with  the  preceding  m. 

3.  The  use  of  emp  is  shown  by  the  following  illustra- 
tions ; 


60  PITMANIC 


7 


dump  lump      campaign         amply      symbol    rump    jnmp  champing  embark 

EXERCISE  16. 

Write  the  following  words  using  emp: 

4.  List  Words.     (33  —  145.) 

i  Bump,  2  amply,  3  jump,  4  camp,  5  damp,  6  ambitious, 
7  temple,  8  campaign,  9  thump,  10  gimp,  u  romp,  12  dump, 
13  tumble,  14  pomp,  15  ambiguous,  16  lump,  17  embezzle. 
1  8  fumble,  19  sympathy,  20  gamble,  21  ample,  22  encamp, 
23  pimple,  24  camping,  25  thumping,  26  jumping,  27  dump- 
ing. 28  limp,  29  pumping,  30  champ,  31  embellish,  32  im- 
becile, 33  scamp. 

5.  Too  often  students  neglect  to  give  the  exercises  suffi- 
cent  practice  to  enable  them  to  write  the  outlines  legibly 
and  readily  within  the  given  time.     The  student  will  obtain 
the  best  results  if  he  will  not  leave  an  exercise  until  he  is 
able  to  write  it  easily  within  the  required  time.     He  should 
also  make  it  a  point  to  read  each  exercise  every  time  he 
writes  it,  and  oftener,  if  necessary,  to  enable  him  to  read  it 
easily  in  the  time  that  it  takes  to  write  it.     Be  sure  that 
you  know  how  to  write  the  correct  outline  for  each  word 
in  an  exercise  and  then  keep  at  it  until  the  prescribed  time 
is  reached. 

6.  Wordsigns. 


similar 
v  —  4 

similarity    speak     yourself     impossible 
speech 

improve-d                United 
Improvement          States 
•may-be 

'    U 

unite 
unity 

uniform               quick           square     simple 
simply 

temperate        important 
temperance     Importance 

temperament 


SHORTHAND  61 

7.  Phrases.     (40— :35-) 

i    Similar-cases,  2  some-similar-things,  3  much-similarity, 

4  I-spoke,    5    a-speech,    6    a-$ignificant,    7    saw-the-savior, 
8  sought-the-savior,  9  the-message-came,  10  a-simple-thing,2S 

ii    a-square-case,    12    temperate-day,     13    will-unite-them,, 
\4  uniform-reasons,  15  may-unite,  16  will-be-temperate.40 

8.  Sentences.     (230 — 3 :45-) 

i  They  sell  oats  and-hay  in-the-camp  of-the-army. 
2  They  dump  the-coal  at  the-depot  for  the-mill  of  the-new 
company.2'"'  3  The-two  armies  are  soon  to  unite  and-will 
quickly  rout  the-enemy  arid-take  the-city.  4  If-they  suc- 
ceed, such  an-important  victory  will50  So  reduce  the-enemy's 
forces  that  I-think  they  may  soon  leave  the-vicinity* 

5  James  Morrison,  of  Iowa,  will  go  to  Missouri  in  January 
or7"'   February  and-will-take  all  of-his  stock  along  if-the- 
roads  are  such  as-to  allow  him  to-do  so.    6  Take  your  oats 
to100  the-mill  at  the-depot  and-leave-them  for  Thomas  Mills 
\vho-will  pay-you  for-them  on  the-fourth  day  of  May  and- 
will125  give-you  a-fair  rate  for-them.     7  If-you-will  take-my 
advice  and-do-this  I-know  you-will  help  all-those  who-are150 
in-the-business    with-you    as-well-as    receive    a-fair    income 
for-yourself  on-such  a-deal.     8    He  took  the-logs  to  the- 
company's17"'  ships.    9  All  the-ships  will  now  go  to  Chicago, 
Illinois,  to  the-immense  saw-mills  of-that-city.     10  The-new- 
company  will  buy  up  all200  the-tallow  in  Massachusetts,  Illi- 
nois, Minnesota  and  Iowa  and-raise  the-rate  as-soon-as  they 
receive  all  the-stock  so  that  retail  dealers  will225  have  to 
buy  of-them.230 


62  PITMANIC 

9.     Translation. 

-/-Lv 


LESSON  XVII. 

COALESCKNTS. 

1.  Way  and  yea  in  certain  combinations  do  not  form 
distinct    angles.     It    has    been    deemed    desirable    in  such 
cases  to  use  different  signs  for  these  letters.     The  signs 
made  use  of  represent  the  way  or  yea  and  also  the  follow- 
ing vowel  which  usually  closely  coalesces  with  the  preceding 
way  or  yea. 

2.  These  signs  are  called  coalescents.     They  consist  of 
half  circles  the  size  of  the  s-circle.     They  are  shaded  when 
used  for  a  y  or  w  with  a  following  long  vowel  and  not 
shaded  when  combined  with  a  following  short  vowel.     To 
represent  a  w  and  a  following  vowel  the  right  and  left 
halves  are  used,  the  left  half  for  w  and  dot  vowels  and  the 
right  half  for  w  and  dash  vowels.     To  represent  y  and  a 
following  vowel  the  upper  and  lower  halves  are  used,  the 
lower  half  for  y  and  a  dot  vowel,  and  the  upper  half  for 
y  and  a  dash  vowel. 


SHORTHAND  63 

3.  The  coalescents  are  treated  as  vowels,  bein^  placed 
beside  the  consonant  strokes  and  given  the  first,  second  and 
third  vowel  positions  according  as  the  coalescing  vowel  is 
first,  second  or  third  place.     The  y  coalescents  always  curve 
either  up  or  down,  and  the  w  coalescents   curve  to  the 
right  or  left ;  none  of  them  varying  to  correspond  with  the 
slant  of  any  strokes,  as  the  dash  vowels  do. 

4.  When  a  coalescent  is  written  between  two  consonant 
strokes  it  follows  the  same  rule  which  would  govern  its 
long  or  short  vowel,  were  the  simple  vowel  written. 

5.  Ine   fact  that  the  coalescents  are  so  seldom  used 
makes  it  all  the  more  necessary  that  they  should  be  thor- 
oughly  memorized.     Unless  they   are,   the   characters   will 
soon  be  forgotten. 

6.  1  he  student  will  be  enabled  to  recall  the  coalescent 
signs  more  readily  by  remembering  that  the  wordsign  you 
is  the  y  with  the  dash  vowel  oo,  hence  all  coalescents  of  y 
and  dash  vowels  bow  up.     Therefore  y  with  the  dot  vowels 
must  necessarily   bow   down.     Likewise   the   wordsign   we 
is  the  w  with  the  long  e.     As  this  bows  to  the  left,  all 
coalescents  of  w  and  dot  vowels  bow  in  that  direction,  and 
conversely  all  coalescents  of  w  and  a  dash  vowel  bow  to  the 
right. 

7.  While  many  of  the  following  words  are  not  written 
with   the   coalescents   always   inserted,   they   illustrate   the 
sounds  represented  by  the  coalescents  and  the  manner  in 
which  these  characters  are  made  as  well  as  the  position  in 
which  they  are  written  when  used. 

Y  With  Vowels. 

-Y~  r   i    ^   -*_ 

yearly       Yale          yacht         yawn  yoke  yule 


64  PITMANIC 


Yeddo  yam  yon  young 

W  With  Vowels. 


1     -I      J 


ed  wade  wa-d  walk  wore  womb 


?      '/      -.         f       ^         J 


wit         wedge         wag  wot  won  wood 

8.  The  coalescents  which  would  naturally  appear  in  the 
places  represented  by  stars  in  the  above  list  are  not  used 
for  the  reason  that  there  are  no  words  in  the  language  in 
which  these  particular  combinations  of  y  and  short  i  or 
short  oo  occur. 

9.  When  a  first  place  coalescent  precedes  the  first  con- 
sonant stroke  in  an  outline  and  makes  an  angle  with  it. 
or  a  third  place  coalescent  follows  the  last  consonant  and 
forms  an  angle  with  it,  it  may  be  joined  to  the  consonant 
stroke,  thus: 

IV2—          M 

__  I  _  V-  _  —  '    -1  _  1  __  I  -  *\  x^"\A  __  , 

widow      weave       walk         ague        wot     wit  que          mew 

10.  It  will  now  appear  from  whence  the  signs  for  such 
words  as  year,  yet,  you,  we,  with,  what,  beyond,  etc.,  are 
derived. 

11.  The  important  question  for  the  beginner  is:    When 
shall   he  use  the   coalescent   signs   representing  the  con- 
sonants y  or  w  and  the  coalescing  vowels,  or  instead  of 
these  signs,  when  shall  he  use  the  consonant  strokes  yea 
or  way  and  omit  the  vowels  as  all  vowels  are  usually  omit- 


SHORTHAND  65 

ted  ?  The  rule  is ;  whenever  the  stroke  yea  or  way  makes 
a  distinct  and  easily  formed  junction  with  what  precedes 
or  follows,  it  should  be  used.  In  other  cases  the  coales- 
cents must  be  written,  if  they  are  necessary  to  make  the 
meaning  of  the  outline  clear.  It  frequently  happens  that 
the  coalescents  may  be  omitted  just  as  simple  vowels  are 
omitted  and  no  ambiguity  result.  In  such  cases  it  is  use- 
less to  insert  them.  They  are  very  rarely  used  since  it  is 
but  seldom  that  the  stroke  yea  and  way  cannot  be  made 
use  of. 

Using  the  coalescents  write  the  folowing  words : 

EXERCISE  17. 

12.  List  Words.     (27 — i  :oo.) 

i  Yacht,  2  weave,  3  wit,  4  witch.  5  duel,  6  weed,  7  cue, 
8  Cube  9  widow,  10  hew,  n  Jew,  12  Dubuque,  13  Buel. 
14  pew,  15  fuel,  1 6  beauty,  17  wage,  18  wedge,  19  wed, 
20  wad,  21  wet,  22  wot,  23  few,  24  wood,  25  chew,  26  dew, 
27  stew. 

13.  Wordsigns. 

;     r      I  .    ^     1    N ^ 

whose        whole        witness          why        white        to-be          to-become 
use  wholly 


t 

^  J          / 

<i—S~\              / 

'         s~ 

testimony         junior 

N> 

senior      justice-of-       yet 
the-peace 

I 

salvation 

14.     Phrases.     (45  —  :4o.) 

i  Whose-came.  2  the-whole-day,  3  a-year-ago,  4  a-new- 
witness,  5  it-may-be-wrong,  6  to-become-famous,  7  in-his- 
testimony,  8  it-may-be-important,23  9  an-important-case, 
10  will-take-them.  n  the-senior-came,  12  was-a-witness, 
13  will-take-his-testimony,  14  and-take,  15  your-money.45 


66  PITMANIC 

15.     Sentences.     (258 — 4:15.) 

i  He-is-too  young  to  take  up  the-study  of  the-testimony 
in-such  an-important-case.  2  He-ought  to-become  efficient 
in-this  subject25  if-he-keeps  on  for-a-whole  year.  3  It-may- 
be  that  both  will  come  as  witnesses  in-such  an-important- 
case  if  the-lawyers50  will  pay  the-fare  for  both  of-them. 

4  The- junior  justice-of-the-peace  will  hear  all  the-witnesses 
in-the-case  and-will  review75  the-testimony  with-his  senior 
before  deciding  to-which  asylum  the-insane  youth  shall-go. 

5  They  go  to  the-city  by-way-of  the-avenue100  along  the- 
lake   because   it-is   usually   in-fair   shape   for  heavy   teams. 

6  It-was  muddy  all-day  Saturday  and  Sunday  but  on  Tues- 
day it123  became  so  dusty  that  it- was  injurious  to  our  eyes. 

7  It-is- wholly  insufficient  and-will  have-to-go  back  to  the- 
depot  to-day150  so  that-they  may  ship  it  tomorrow.    8   They 
wish  to-receive  the-bureau  at-the-same  time  the-team  takes 
all  the-smaller  things  which175  they  expect  to  use  in  the-new 
house.    9   What-do-you  think  has  become  of  all-the-money 
and-why  do-the-police  give-up200  the-search  for  the-thieves? 
10   The-side- walks  on-this  side  of  the-city  are  so-poor  that 
before  we-know-it  somebody  .will  receive225  an-injury  and- 
sue  the-city  for  heavy  damages.     1 1    The-packages  came  to 
the-factory  in  Toledo  by-way-of  Cincinnati,  Ohio,  and-will 
give250  the-company  enough  to-do  for-several  weeks.258 


SHORTHAND  67 

1 6.     Translation. 


I     -  -*<-•)     VM^--^' 

v_  /       /lA-  /    " 

l1^  ) 

/      \'       f 

O.V.  vL,.-.f-^ 

/ 
.^/U-. 

—  .j  -\    \ 

_>v             \ 

LESSON  XVIII. 

THE  L-HOOK. 

1.  When  pe,  be,  te,  de,  chay,  jay,  kay,  gay,  ef,  ve,  ith, 
the  and  shay  are  followed  by  the  sound  of  1,  the  1  is.  in  cer- 
tain cases,  indicated  by  a  slight  modification  of  these  letters, 
thus  saving  the  time  which  otherwise  would  be  required  to 
write  the  stroke  el  or  lay. 

2.  The  modification  of  these  letters  consists  in  the  for- 
mation of  a  small  hook  on  the  s-circle  side  and  at  the  begin- 
ning of  these  letters.     This  hook  is  called  the  1-hook. 

3.  The  formation  of  this  hook  on  the  letters  and  the 
names  by  which  these  modified  characters  are  designated  are 
shown  as  follows: 


r  c 


Pel  Bel  Tel  Del  Chel  Jel  Kel     Gel  Fel    Vel    Thl  Thel     Shel 


68  PITMANIC 

4.  For  convenience  in  referring  to  these  modified  letters 
they  are  always  spoken  of  by  the  above  names. 

5.  The  beginner  should  bear  in  mind  that  the  so-called 
1-hook  does  not  itself  stand  for  the  sound  of  1.     If  "it  did, 
the  1  would  be  read  before  the  stroke.     The  hook  is  simply 
a  scheme  of  modifying  or  changing  certain  consonant  stems 
in  certain  cases  to  show  that  the  sound  of  1  is  to  be  under- 
stood immediately  following  each  letter  so  modified.     The 
use  of  this  principle  is  illustrated  by  the  folowing  words : 


J     \y 

—  v 

J 

£              ^-^ 

s 

V—  , 

f 

table           buahel 

plume           lawful          clip 

tidal 

civil             gleam 

T  '/ 

1       ^ 

^ 

/"L            « 

^~*^ 

/ 

V  —  s 

cudgel      chilling 

mythology             club 

flame 

level               bloor 

6.     The  rules  governing  the  use  of  the  1-hook  are  as 
follows : 

1 i )  In  words  where  the  sound  of  1  immediately  follows 
one  of  these  strokes  in  the  same  syllable,  as  in  clip,  club, 
gleam,  plume,  the  modified  form  or  1-hook  is  used. 

(2)  When  a  long  vowel  comes  between  one  of  these 
letters  and   a   following  1,   as   in   coal,   bowl,   cajole,   the 
stroke  el  or  lay  is  used. 

(3)  When  a  short  vowel  intervenes  between  one  of  these 
letters  and  a  following  1  in  words  of  a  single  syllable,  as  in 
hii,  bill,  gill,  dell,  fell,  the  stroke  is  used. 

(4)  In  words  of  more  than  one  syllable,  where  a  short 
vowel  intervenes  between  one  of  these  strokes  and  a  follow- 
ing 1,  as  in  .civil,  bushel,  lawful,  the  modified  form  or  hook 
is  used,  except  when  1  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and 
is  followed  by  a  sounded  vowel,  as  in  pillow,  in  which  case 
the  stroke  is  used. 


SHORTHAND  69 

7.  The  student  should  remember  that  these  rules  apply 
only  to  the  use  of  1  when  it  follows  one  of  the  consonant 
strokes  mentioned  at  the  beginning  of  this  lesson.  He  should 
also  remember  that  in  the  many  thousands  of  combinations 
of  letters  there  will  sometimes  occur  words  where  the  writer 
will  readily  see  that  in  order  to  secure  a  more  easily  formed 
or   clearer  outline   some   rule   must  be   disregarded.     It   is 
impossible  to  formulate  a  set  of  rules  which  will  apply  to 
every  possible  combination  of  letters  in  the  English  language. 
It  is  therefore  perfectly  allowable  to  occasionally  vary  a 
rule  in  cases  where  to  follow  it  an  awkward  or  ambiguous 
outline  would  result. 

EXERCISE  18. 
Using  the  1-hook  write : 

8.  List  Words.     (61 — 1 120.) 

i  Label,  2  table,  3  blame,  4  flame,  5  gleam,  6  glaze,  7  glass, 
8  glow,  9  gloss,  10  flow,  ii  pluck,  12  plume,  13  angle, 
14  tangle,  15  wrangle,  16  flog,  17  flag,  18  flock,  19  inflame, 
20  influx,  21  uncle,  22  inflammable,  23  local,  24  total, 
25  black.  26  available,  27  smuggle,  28  tipple,  29  pliable, 
30  click,  31.  desirable,  32  fling,  33  rival,  34  ripple,  35  glue, 
36  official.  37  pupil,  38  Mabel.  39  foretell,  40  dissemble, 
41  plank,  42  tickle,  43  flows,  44  paddle,  45  tackle,  46  flash, 
47  blush,  48  climb,  49  clip,  50  sublime,  51  declare,  52  evil, 
53  legal,  54  dapple,  55  logical,  56  novelty,,  57  illegal.  58  fac- 
ulty, 59  pledge,  60  bloom,  61  Flora. 

9.  Wordsigns. 

/   j    i  "A  —  /    -f-        _ 

angel      at-all  follow  capable  collect  challenge  C.  O.  D.  difficult 

until  difficulty 


7o  PITMANIC 


develop  deliver      each-will          equal      glory   glorious   humble          comply 

developed          delivered  call 

development    delivery 


c 


it-will  most-         much-     people    such-         which-will    they-will 

tell  likely       will  will  children 

10.  Phrases.     (71 — i  :io.) 

i  An-angel,  2  at-all-places,  3  the-children,  4  which- will- 
go,  5  until-you-come,  6  they-will-make,  7  such-will-come, 
8  comply-with-it,  9  he-is-capable,25  10  collect-the-bill, 
ii  challenge-him,  12  he-will-collect-on-delivery,  13  a-diffi- 
cult-thing,  14  he-is-in-difficulty,  15  develop-the-case,  16  de- 
liver-some-coal,  17  tell-him,50  18  equal-to-the-case,  19  call- 
for-his-money,  20  each-will-go,  21  in-his-glory,  22  a-glor- 
ious-day,  23  it-is-most-likely.71 

11.  Sentences.     (178 — 2:55.) 

i  Like  angels'  visits  they-will  be  blessings  to  all.  2  Each- 
will  refuse  to-leave  until  all-are  ready  to-go.  3  It-was  a- 
glorious-day25  for-all  humble  people  and-I-hope  they-will 
enjoy-many  similar  days  in-times  to-come.  4  Look  closely 
to-your  tackle  if-you  expect50  to-catch  a-single  fish. 
5  Most-likely  each-will  wait  for  some  developments  before 
following  such  a-poor  course.  6  He-will  challenge  his 
enemy  to73  a-duel  and-will  likely  go  to-his  "death  in-such 
foolish  business.  7  The-whole  business  is  in-such  a-tangle 
that  it-will  be100  difficult  to-do  anything  at-all  with-it. 
8  He  collects  the-bills  daily  and-pleases  all  whom  he  deals 
with.  9  Please  to  wait  a-few125  hours  and-I-think  he-will 
raise  the-money.  10  I-live  on  the-south  side  of-the-city,  a- 
mile-and  a-half  south  of150  the-postoffice.  ii  Write  as- 


SHORTHAND  71 

much-as  possible  in-this  way  if-yoti  would-make  a-success. 
12   The-blowing  snow  will  keep  going  into  all  places175  for- 
several  hours.178 
12.     Translation. 


LESSON  XIX. 

THE  R-HOOK,  SEC.  I. 

i.  The  r-hook  is  a  hook  used  in  much  the  same  way  as 
the  1-hook.  On  straight  letters  it  is  the  modification  of  pe, 
be,  te,  de,  chay,  jay,  kay  and  gay,  to  represent  a  following 
r.  The  r-hook  is  formed  exactly  like  the  1-hook  except 
that  it  is  placed  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  stroke,  that  is, 
on  the  left  side  of  the  upright  strokes,  and  on  the  lower 
side  of  horizontal  letters.  The  following  illustrations  will 
show  the  proper  formation  of  the  r-hook  upon  the  straight 
letters,  and  the  names  of  the  characters  when  so  modified : 


•\      A    '  1     1     /     / 


Der          Cher  Jer  Ker  Ger 


72  PITMANIC 

2.  The  rules  governing  the  use  of  the  r-hook  on  the 
above  letters  are  the  same  as  those  which  govern  the  use  of 
the  1-hook. 

3.  The  use  of  the  r-hook  is  shown  by  the  following  illus- 
trations : 


l     \    \_  r\ 


V-L 


XT 

toper          praise          brake          labor          truck          filter          drunk          redress 


butcher       germ  crumb  liquor  gross  tiger  major 

4.  Especial  care  should  be  taken  to  fix  in  the  mind  the 
distinction  between  the  1-hook  and  the  r-hook.     Much  con- 
fusion will  result  unless  the  student  has  this  distinction  in- 
delibly impressed  upon  the  mind  so  that  he  will  be  able  to 
use  the  proper  hook  without  the  least  hesitation.     No  stu- 
dent should  think  of  passing  this  and  the  preceding  lesson 
until  he  is  able  to  write  all  the  words,  phrases  and  sen- 
tences in  each  lesson  using  both  the  1-hook  and  r-hook  cor- 
rectly in  every  instance. 

EXERCISE  19. 

Using  the  r-hook  write  the  following  words : 

5.  List  Words.     (68— 1 145.) 

i  Gray,  2  grace,  3  grim,  4  Greek,  5  grub,  6  grog,  7  brass, 
8  breech,  9  toper,  10  ledger,  IT  extra,  12  pry,  13  creeper, 
14  baker,  15  fakir,  16  educator,  17  courtesy,  18  monogram, 
19  preface,  20  deter,  21  cruel,  22  Nebraska,  23  crop,  24  trig- 
ger, 25  poker,  26  grasp,  27  brusque,  28  trunk,  29  crape, 
30  grape,  31  groom,  32  cry,  33  treason,  34  crusade, 
35  dream,  36  drake,  37  drum,  38  drug,  39  grip,  40  meagre, 
41  maker,  42  cablegram,  43  telegram,  44  wager,  45  cross, 


SHORTHAND  73 

46  trifle,  47  breaker,  48  bramble,  49  triangle,  50  neighbor, 
51  copper,  52  taper,  53  greedy,  54  gravy,  55  gruesome, 
56  group,  57  prop,  58  drop,  59  press,  60  clapper,  61  major, 
62  Edgar,  63  intrigue,  64  encourage,  65  digress,  66  grumble, 
67  cranny,  68  drunk. 
6.  Wordsigns, 

\  c     ~     ' 

accuracy     appear    accurate     brother     Christian  care  cure 

number     Christianity         occur 

r=L^z_J_L_^_^_VA- 

correct      character    degree     doctor    dear    during    danger     Dear-Sir    disappear 

dark 


J-  ^7     ?      ~\     A 


disagree        inaccurate    larger  liberty          member          neglect  negligent 

remember 


principle      practice        practicable       pure      Yours-truly        liberal 
principal     practical 

7.  Phrases.     (59 — i  :oo.) 

i  Was-inaccurate,  2  it-appears,  3  they-appear,  4  you-will- 
appear,  5  will-neglect,  6  my-brother,  7  your-brother-came, 
8  our-brother,  9  the-Christian,  10  in-a-Christian,  n  our- 
Christianityrr>  12  in-care-of,  13  no-care,  14  incurable-case, 
15  in-any-degree,  16  during-mass,  17  you-will-neglect,  18  it- 
is-inaccurate,  19  our-liberty,  20  large-number,  21  a-new- 
principle,r>°  22  your-practice,  23  a-character.  24  it-will-occur, 
25  take-care/"'9 

8.  In   writing   numbers   and   dates,   round   numbers   as 
5,    10,  30,   50,    loo,  400,    1000,  etc.   are  usually   written   in 


74  PITMANIC 

Shorthand  while  mixed  numbers  as  37,  73,   105,  369,  etc. 
are  expressed  by  the  common  numerals. 

9.     Letter.     (310 — 5:05.) 

New-York-City,  N.-Y.,  July  8,  1904. 
James  Lyon,  Jr., 

Jacksonville,  Florida. 
Dear-Sir : — 

Yours  of-the-sixth  came  to-day.25  I-was  looking  for  some 
news  and-am  happy  to  hear  that-your  affairs  are  moving 
along  as-you  desire.  I-think-that  in-time50  all-those  who 
are  in  the-business  with  you  will  agree  with  your  ideas. 
This  would-give-you  sufficient  backing  so  that-you  may  do78 
as-vou-like  in  carrying  on-your  celery  farm.  I-know  that- 
your  knowledge  of-celery  growing,  the-valuable  farm  you 
have  and-your  proximity100  to  so  large  a-city  as  Jacksonville 
will-bring-you  success  in-a-few-years.  I-expect  that  inside 
of- four  years  you- will  have125  enough  clear  cash. ahead  to 
buy  out  the-whole  business  and-I-hope  you-will  do-so. 
You-will  have  any-number  of-people  try150  to  persuade  you 
to-take  stock  in-something  outsid_e  of  the-celery  business. 
If -you  should-do  such-a-thing  and-neglect  your  regular  bus- 
iness1"' at-all,  you-will  see-the-day  in- which  you-will  rue 
it.  This-is  an-age  in-which  success  comes-to-him  who 
gives200  his  whole  time  to  a-single-thing  and-studies  all  its 
many  phases  so  thoroughly  that  nobody  will-know  how  .to- 
take  any-undue  advantage225  of-him. 

But  it-is  useless  to  talk  of-these-things.  Your  knowledge 
of  business  affairs  is  sufficient  to  enable-you  to  appreciate 
the-force250  of  what  I-have-said. 

I-may  possibly  be  in  Jacksonville  this  fall.  If  I-am  you- 
niay  expect  me  to-call  at  your  home275  and-make-you  a-nice 
long-visit. 


SHORTHAND  75 

I-expect  to  hear  soon  that  you  have  a-crop  of-celery  ready 
to  ship.     I-notice  that300  the-price  keeps  up.     I-am, 

Yours-truly, 

Thomas  Phillips.319 
10.     Translation. 


LESSON  XX. 

REVIEW. 
i.     QUESTIONS: 

1 i )  How   is  em  modified  to   represent   a   following 
p  or  b? 

(2)  What  is  this  modified  character  called? 

(3)  Is  it  ever  allowable  to  use  the  emp  sign  to  repre- 
sent a  p  or  b  in  a  syllable  following  the  one  in  which  the 
em  occurs? 

(4)  What   letters   in   the   Longhand    alphabet    some- 
times represent  vowels  and  sometimes  consonants? 

(5)  By    what    characters    are    these    consonants    and 
the  following  coalescing  vowels  sometimes  represented? 


76  PITMANIC 

(6)  In  what  way  are  the  long  vowels  distinguished 
from  the  short  vowels  in  the  coalescent  signs? 

(7)  How  are  the  dash  distinguished   from  the  dot 
vowels  with  the  w-coalescents? 

(8)  How  are  the  dash  distinguished   from  the  dot 
vowels  with  the  y-coalescents? 

(9)  What  governs  the  position  of  the  coalescents 
beside  the  consonant  strokes?   * 

( 10)  What  is  the  rule  for  placing  a  coalescent  when 
it  occurs  between  two  consonants? 

(n)     When  may  the  coalescent  signs  be  joined  to 
consonant  strokes? 

(12)  Give    six    or    more    Wordsigns    derived    from 
coalescents. 

(13)  When  should  the  coalescent  signs  be  used  and 
when  should  the  simple  strokes  way  and  yea  be  used  for 
the  consonant  sounds  of  w  and  y? 

(14)  How  may  the  sound  of  1  be  indicated  when  it 
follows  certain  strokes? 

(15)  What  strokes  may  be  thus  modified  to  show  that 
the  sound  of  1  follows  ? 

(16)  What  is  the  modification  to  indicate  a  following 
1  called? 

(17)  Does   the   1-hook   stand   for   the   sound   of  1? 

(18)  What  is  the  rule  for  representing  an  1  when 
it  immediately  follows  a  stroke  which  may  be  modified  by 
an  1-hook? 

( 19)  When  a  short  vowel  intervenes  between  a  stroke 
and  a  following  1? 

(20)  When  a  long  vowel  intervenes  between  a  stroke 
and  a  following  1? 

(21)  What    hook    is    written    at    the    beginning    of 


SHORTHAND  77 

straight  letters  and  on  the  side  opposite  the  1-hook? 

(22)  On  which  side  of  straight  letters  is  this  hook 
used  ? 

(23)  When  an  r  immediately  follows  a  straight  letter 
which  may  be  modified  by  the  r-hook  and  is  in  the  same 
syllable  with  the   stroke,  which   is   used,  the  hook   or  the 
stroke  ? 

(24)  If  a  short  vowel  intervenes  between  a  stroke 
and  a  folio  wing  r,  when  is  the  hook  and  when  is  the  stroke 
used  ? 

(25)  When   a  long  vowel   intervenes   which  is   used 
for  r,  the  hook  or  the  stroke? 

EXERCISE  20. 

2.  List  Words.     (65 — 1 130.) 

Jump  damp  ambitious  embezzle  fumble  sympathy  encamp 
dumping  champ  imbecile  scamp  weave  witch  duel  cue  cube 
widow  hew  Jew  Dubuque  fuel  beauty  wood  stew  label25 
angle  flag  influx  total  black  available  pliable  click  desirable 
rival  Mabel  foretell  tickle  blush  legal  logical  illegal  faculty 
pledge  extra  courtesy  monogram  cruel  crop  trigger50  grasp 
treason  meagre  telegram  trifle  bramble  triangle  neighbor 
greedy  group  Edgar  intrigue  encourage  digress  grumble.05 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Similar,  similarity,  speak,  (speech,)  yourself,  impossible, 
improve.,  (improved,  improvement,  may-be,)  United- States, 
unite,  (unity,)  uniform,  quick,  square,  simple,  (simply,) 
temperate,  (temperance,  temperament,)  important,  (impor- 
tance,) young,  whose,  whole,  (wholly,)  witness,  why,  white, 
to-be,  to-become,  testimony,  junior,  senior,  justice-of-the- 
peace,  yet,  salvation,  angel,  at-all,  (until,)  follow,  capable, 
collect,  challenge,  C.  O.  D.,  difficult,  (difficulty,)  develop, 
(developed,  development,)  deliver,  (delivered,  delivery,) 


78  PITMANIC 

each- will,  equal,  (call,)  glory,  glorious,  humble,  comply, 
it-will,  (tell,)  most-likely,  much-will,  people,  such-will, 
which- will,  (children,)  they-will,  accuracy,  appear,  accurate, 
brother,  (number,)  Christian,  (Christianity,)  care,  (occur,) 
cure,  correct,  character,  degree,  doctor,  dear,  during,  (dark,) 
clanger,  Dear-Sir,  disappear,  disagree,  inaccurate,  larger, 
liberty,  member,  (remember,)  neglect,  negligent,  principle, 
(principal,)  practice,  (practical,)  practicable,  pure,  Yours- 
truly,  liberal. 

4.  Phrases.     (51 — :45.) 

i  Similar-cases,  2  some-similar-things,  3  much-similarity, 
4  I-spoke,  5  a-speech,  6  a-significant,  7  saw-the-savior, 
8  the-message-came,  9  a-simple-thing,  10  a-square-case,25 
1 1  temperate-clay,  12  will-unite-them,  13  will-be-temperate. 
14  an-angel,  15  at-all-places,  16  the-children,  17  which-will- 
go,  18  comply-with-it,  19  collect-the-bill,  20  it-appears.51 

5.  Sentences.     (144 — 2:25.) 

i  James  Morrison,  of  Iowa  City,  Iowa,  will  go  to  Mis- 
souri in  January  or  February  and-will-take  all  of-his  stock 
along  if-the-roads25  are  such  as-to  allow  him  to-do  so. 
2  If-you-will  take-my  advice  and-do-this  I-know  you- will 
help  all-those50  who-are  in  the-business  with-you  as-well-as 
receive  a-fair  income  for-yourself  on  the-deal.  3  The-junior 
justice-of-the-peace75  will  hear  all  the-witnesses  in-this-case 
and-will  review  all  the-testimony  with-his  senior  before  de- 
ciding to-which  asylum  the-insane  youth100  shall-go.  4  It-is- 
wholly  insufficient  and  so-will  have-to-go  back  to  the-depot 
to-day  so  that-they  may  ship  it  tomorrow.125  He-will  chal- 
lenge his  enemy  to  a-duel  and-will  likely  go  to-his  death 
in-such  foolish  business.144 


SHORTHAND  79 


LESSON  XXI. 

THE   R-HOOK,    SEC.    II. 

1.  Iii   addition   to  the   eight   straight   letters   which   are 
modified  by  the  r-hook,  as  shown  in  lesson  nineteen,  the 
curved  letters  ef,  ve,  ith,  the,  ish,  zhe,  em  and  en  are  also 
modified  by  this  hook. 

2.  Since    the  r-hook    is    written    at    the    beginning    of 
strokes  upon  which  it  is  used  and  since  all  hooks  written  on 
curved  letters  must  come  within  the  curve,  it  was  necessary 
to  adopt  some  method  to  distinguish  between  the  1-hook 
and  r-hook  on  ef,  ve,  ith  and  the,  the  only  curved  letters 
on  which  both  the  1-hook  and  r-hook  are  used.    This  is  done 
by   reversing   these   four   letters   in   addition   to   modifying 
them  by  the  r-hook.    It  is  possible  to  do  this  without  danger 
of  confusion  since  ar,  way,  es  and  ze,  which  ef,  ve,  ith 
and  the  form  when  reversed,  are  not  modified  by  an  initial 
hook. 

3.  Ish  and  zhe  are  not  modified  by  the  1-hook  hence 
it  is  possible  to  use  the  r-hook  modification  at  the  beginning 
of  these  letters  and  on  the  curved  side  without  any  further 
change. 

4.  Em  and  en  have  an  initial  hook  for  w  the  same  size 
as  the  r-hook.     This  hook   will  be  explained  later.     It  is 
necessary,    therefore,    in    order   to    distinguish   the    r-hook 
from  the  w-hook,  to  modify  these  two  letters  in  some  man- 
ner in  addition  to  the  hook.     This  is  done'  by  shading  em 
and  en  when  modified  by  the  r-hook.     No  confusion  with 
emp  or  ing  arises  by  shading  em  and  en  when  modified 
by  the  r-hook  since  neither  emp  nor  ing  are  ever  modified 
bv  an  initial  hook. 


80  PITMANIC 

The  rules  which  govern  the  use  of  the  1-hook  apply  to  the 
use  of  the  r-hook  on  the  curved  letters. 

5.  The  r-hook  on  the  curved  letters  and  the  names  of 
the  letters  so  modified  are  shown  as  follows  : 


9     )    J  J 


Per  Ver  Thr  Th«r          Sher          Zher  Mer  Ner 

6.     Illustrations  of  the  use  of  the  curved  letters  modified 
b    the  r-hook  are  as  follows  : 


r*\   3  ^)  J    } 


frame  silver      others       lather   shirk    treasure   rumor   nourish 

EXERCISE  21. 

Using  the  r-hook  write  the  following  : 

7.  List  Words.     (60—  1  125.) 

i  Merge,  2  energy,  3  lunar,  4  tremor",  5  femur,  6  banner, 
7  donor,  8  leisure,  9  fisher,  10  verb,  n  verbal,  12  fracas, 
13  three,  14  frock,  15  gopher,  16  liver,  17  leverage,  18  aver- 
age, 19  Virginia,  20  dinner,  21  Denver,  22  numerous, 
23  sheriff,  24  sugar,  25  favorite,  26  liquor,  27  freeze,  28  cov- 
er, 29  thrush,  30  tanner,  31  bother,  32  pressure,  33  fissure, 
34  rover,  35  Homer,  36  nourish,  37  divers,  38  frame, 
39  proverb,  40  verbena,  41  lever,  42  reversal,  43  favor, 
44  farmer,  45  Francis,  46  frankincense,  47  former,  48  dor- 
mer, 49  camphor,  50  philosopher,  51  throng,  52  Andover, 
53  machinery,  54  dishonor,  55  verse,  56  venerable,  57  lover, 
58  nurse,  59  reverse,  60  movable. 

8.  Wordsigns. 


withdraw     which-are     West-Virginia     very       universe     university     universal 

every 


SHORTHAND  81 

£        ?        } 


myself     tell-us      truth     there,    their      therefore       South-America    recollect 
they-are 


tr 

re: 

V  J    \ 


respect         respectable  remark  proficiency         pleasure         probable 

respectability       remarkable      proficient  measure         probably 

mere,  Mr.  probability 


*\ 


proper  perhaps        sure  owner  overwhelm  near,  nor 

property  honor 


neighborhood          New-Hampshire       North-America  from  forgive 

9.  Phrases.     (38 — :so.) 

i  An-average-case,  2  a-rumor-came,  3  freeze-up,  4  in- 
trouble,  5  in-favor,  6  numerous-things,  7  saw-a-thrush,  8  a- 
new-frock, '9  low-pressure,  10  in-the- fracas,25  n  broke-his- 
femur,  12  nourish-him,  13  a-fisher,  14  with-much-energy, 
15  in-his-dishonor.38 

10.  Letter.     (2871—4:45.) 

Dubuque,  Iowa,  April  2,  1904. 
Mr.  Charles  Dawson, 

Minneapolis,  Minn. 
My-Dear-Sir  :— 

I-take  the-liberty  of-writing  you  for  some25  advice  and- 
help.  Two  weeks  ago  I-wrote  to  J.  P.  Glover  &  Co.,  of- 
your  city  asking  that  firm  to  ship  me  a-dozen50  cars  of  hay 
as-soon-as  possible.  Expecting  to-receive  this  hay  in-two- 
weeks,  the-usual  time  for-hay  to-come  through,  I-took75 


82  PITMANIC 

advantage  of  the- steady  rise  in  price  here  to  dispose  of 
the-dozen  cars  for-delivery  in-three-weeks  from  the-time 
it  was-to100  arrive.  To-day  I-have  a-message  from  Glover 
&  Co.,  which  by  mistake  had  the- wrong  address  thus  caus- 
ing a-delay  in  its-arrival,1-3  saying  in  answer  to  a- 
telegram  that-their  supply  has  given  out  and-that  it-is  im- 
possible to  ship  a-single  car  to-me.  Am150  at  a  loss  what 
to-do  so-write-you.  Do-you  think  it-is  at-all  possible  for- 
you  to-help-me  out  by  shipping175  me  some  of  the-hay  you 
have  in-stock  for  summer  use  ? 

I-know  that  the-price  wall-drop  sufficiently  to  enable  me 
to-replace200  the-same  in  ample  time  for-your  use  and-at 
no  loss  to  myself.  Otherwise  I-fear  I-shail  lose  heavily  for 
the-price  of225  hay  in-this  city  is  very  high.  "If-you-will 
help-me  out  I-assure  you  that  I- will  thoroughly  appreciate 
the-favor. 

Please-to250  answer  by  wire  as-soon-as  you-receive  this. 
I-await  your-reply  with-much  anxiety,  and-hope  that-you- 
will  spare  enough  of-your275  supply  to  save-me  from  very 
heavy-loss. 

Yours-truly, 

Thomas  Johnson.287 
ii.     Translation. 


SHORTHAND  83 

LESSON  XXII. 
TRIPLE  CONSONANTS. 

1.  It  frequently  happens  that  the  letter  s  precedes  one 
of  the  straight  letters  modified  to  represent  a  following  r. 
In  such  cases  the  r-hook  need  not  be  written  as  it  may  be 
indicated  by  placing  the  s-circle  on  the  r-hook  side.     The 
s-circle  at  the  beginning  and  on  the  r-hook  side  of  pe,  for 
example,  would  represent  iss-pe-ar,  thus  representing  three 
consonants,  hence  the  name,  triple  consonants. 

2.  The  triple  consonants  are  as  follows : 


Spr        Sbr         Str      Sdr      Schr      Sjr          Skr  Sgr 

3.     The  use  of  the  triple  consonants  is  shown  in  the  fol- 
lowing words : 


spring     sober  stream    cedar   scrape    such-are    segregate    sojourner       sister 

4.  As  appears  in  the  illustrations  either  a  long  or  short 
vowel  may  occur  between  the  s-circle  and  a  following  stroke 
with  which  ah  r-hook  is  understood. 

5.  There   is   no   word    in   which   the   combination    schr 
occurs.     The   character  is   used,   however,    for   the   phrase 
signs  such-are,  such-were,  etc. 

6.  It  will  be  evident  to  the  student  of  Shorthand  that 
the  combination  of  the  three  consonants  explained  above 
cannot  be  used  with  any  of  the  curved  letters. 

7.  The  sez-circle  may  also  be  placed  upon  the  r-hook 
side  of  straight  letters  to  indicate  the  r-hook  as  in  the  word 
sister. 


84  PITMANIC 

8.  In  such  words  as  discourage,  subscribe,  describe. 
and  others  with  similar  outlines,  the  r-hook  cannot  be  indi- 
cated, the  context  being  depended  upon  to  show  that  the 
r  is  to  be  understood. 

9.  The  large  majority  of  cases  in  which  the  triple  con- 
sonants are  used  is  with  the  combinations  spr,  str,  and  skr. 

EXERCISE  22. 
Using  the  triple  consonants  write : 

10.  List  Words.     (45 — i  :oo.) 

i  Scrap,  2  scraper,  3  scruple,  4  soaker,  5  seeker,  6  scrub, 
7  strap,  8  scourge,  9  skirmish,  10  sober,  n  cider,  12  solder, 
13  strip,  14  scream,  15  scrim,  16  scratch,  17  spring,  18  sperm, 
19  spurs,  20  stroke,  21  stream,  22  superstitious,  23  sabre, 
24  stretch,  25  stress,  26  strew,  27  streak,  28  strow,  29  succor, 
30  discourage,  31  supper,  32  prescribe,  33  strop,  34  subscribe, 
35  proscribe,  36  scrawny,  37  super,  38  sacrifice,  39  strike, 
40  superb,  41  striker,  42  screech,  43  secrecy,  44  stripe, 
45  suitor. 

11.  Wordsigns. 

*\  9  ° — 

-     °^      X     .         /     / \- 

surprise      express    suppress      eecure      such-are     such-were    scripture    as-it-were 

describe 


America       belong         commercial      external       humor       honorable         more 
belonged  mercy 


must-have  satisfy-led  in-re- 
satisfactory  ply-to 
satisfaction 


SHORTHAND  85 

12.  Phrases.     (56 — 150.) 

i  A-spring-day,  2  secure-a-copy,  3  such-are-here,  4  a- 
scripture-topic,  5  have-no-mercy,  6  pay-the-mortgage, 
7  will-forgive-them,  8  more-money,  o,  commercial-dealings,25 
10  in-such-manner,  n  have-mercy,  12  honor-all-people, 
13  may-forgive-them,  14  large-measure,  15  every-case, 
1 6  scripture-lesson,  17  give-them-honor,  18  express-the-case, 
19  honorable-life,50  20  will-homor-them,  21  they-receive- 
more.56 

13.  Letter.     (185 — 3:00.) 

New- York-City,  N.-Y.,  Feb.  4,  1904. 
Mr.  Thomas  Boyle,  Sr., 

Duluth,  Minn. 
Dear-Sir: — 

Your  notice  to  Mr.  Titus  Bailey  telling25  him  that-you 
must-have  your  pay  before-you-would  ship-him  the-coal  he 
should-have  on  March  fourth,  was  a-surprise  to  me.50  I- 
know  you-must-have  a-wrong  idea  as-to  Mr.  Bailey's  ability 
to  pay  his  bills.  I-have  for  some  years  had  business  deal- 
ings with75  Mr.  Bailey  and-I-have  never-had  a-bill  due  from- 
him  but  which  he-has  given  the-proper-care.  I-hope  this 
assurance  will100  cause  you  to-take  a-more  favorable  view 
of-the-case  and-ship  this  week  the-coal  Mr.  Bailey  desires 
for  his  factory.  If-you125  refuse  to-do  so  I-am-sure  you- 
will  lose  a-customer  who,  otherwise,  would  I-think,  continue 
to  buy  of-you  for-many  years150  to-come.  I-hope  you-will 
take-my  advice  in-this  for  I-know  Mr.  Bailey  will  do  what- 
is  right  and-fair  in-his175  dealings  with-you.  I-am, 

Yours-very-truly, 

James  Gilmer.185 


86  PITMANIC 

14.  Letter.     (130 — 2:10.) 

Toledo,  Ohio,  July  2,  1904. 

Mr.  Ezra  Weeks, 

Chicago,  111. 
My-Deaf:Sir : — 

I-have  your  favor  of  May  3oth.  I-have25  looked  for  a- job 
for-you  as  clerk  in  fully  forty  business  houses  in-this  city 
but  so  far  it-is  impossible  for  me  to50  write-you  very  encour- 
aging news.  Hence  my  long-delay  in  answering-you. 
There-are  several-places  in-which  I-was  given  some  hope 
and-at75  the-bazaar  I-may  yet  succeed  in-inducing  the-pro- 
prietor  to-give-you  a-trial.  If  I-succeed  I-will  write-you 
forthwith.  Would  you100  be-ready  to-come  in-a-few  days 
in-case  I  secure  a-place  for-you?  Please  to-write-me  as- 
,soon-as  you-receive125  this. 

Truly-yours, 

Samuel  Culver.130 

15.  Letter.     (143 — 2:15.) 

Cincinnati,  Ohio,  March  6,  1904. 

Messrs.  Cady  &  Co., 

Jacksonville,  Fla. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

Hearing  that-you  were  thinking  of-employing  some-more25 
help  in-your  grocery  I-take  the-liberty  of-applying  for-the- 
place.  I-know  something  of  the-grocery  business  having 
given  nearly  eight  years50  of-my-life  to-it.  As  I-am-very 
anxious  to-go  south  I-hope  you-will  favor  me  in  the-choice 
of  a-clerk.75  I-know  I-would  suit-you.  My-reason  for  de- 
siring to-leave  here  is  to  secure  a-change  for-my-health. 
The-doctor  advises  me100  to-do  this  as-soon-as  possible. 
I-would-be  satisfied  with  very  low  wages  for  a-few  months 


SHORTHAND  87 

during    which    time    I-will    satisfy125    you    of-my    ability. 
Please  to-reply  at  an-early  day  ami-oblige. 

Very-truly-yours, 

Francis  Keller.143 
16.     Translation. 


-7-r  y]  I  v^.  /^v.v_^(  VTA  1  .  ^  —  J  L 


LESSON  XXIII. 

THE   W-HOOK,    SEC.    I. 

1.  The  consonant  sound  of  w,  when  it  precedes  and  is 
in  the  same  syllable  with  em,  en,  ray  or  lay,  is  represented 
by  a  small  initial  hook,  called  the  w-hook.     This  hook  is 
the  same  size  as  the  1-hook,  but  differs  from  it  in  that  the 
hook   itself   is   a   modified    coalescent    and    represents   the 
sound  of  w.     It  must,  therefore,  be  read  before  the  stroke 
upon  which  it  is  formed.     Either  a  long  or  short  vowel  or 
diphthong  may  intervene  between  the  w  represented  by  the 
w-hook  and  a  following  em,  en,  ray  or  lay.     The  strokes 
thus  modified  are  called  wem,  wen,  wer  and  wel. 

2.  The  formation  of  the  w-hook  and  its  use  is  illustrated 
in  the  following  words: 


88  PITMANIC 


won       window  womb     welfare  unwell  work          wore  swore 

3.  The  w-hook  on  em  and  en  cannot  be  confused  with 
the  r-hook  on  these  letters  since  with  the  latter  hook  these 
two  letters  are  shaded. 

4.  When  this  hook  precedes  the  sound  of  1,  lay  is  used 
even  though  the  general  rule  calls  for  el,  as  in  wail,  well, 
etc. 

EXERCMSE  23. 

Using  the  w-hook  write  the  following  words  : 

5.  List  Words.     (36  —  140.) 

i  Edwin,  2  window,  3  swim,  4  work,  5  worth,  6  William. 
7  swear,  8  wealth,  9  Welch,  10  willing,  n  win,  12  worthy, 
13  welfare,  14  Wilsey,  15  beware,  16  wen,  17  worker, 
18  willingness,  19  wine,  20  wear,  21  warble,  22  wallow, 
23  Wilkes,  24  Wilson,  25  wail,  26  wool,  27  weal,  28  wile, 
29  winsome,  30  winning,  31  wench,  32  worse,  33  swell, 
34  wince,  35  wean,  36  unworthy. 

6.  Wordsigns. 

^r   Vo    \/7     .  y  </  ,/    /    ^ 

IS 

more-or     member-of-      member-of-         nowhere     we-are    where    aware       when 
less  congress  the-legislature 


while     well     awhile  with-me  with-   him      with-      inquiry  welcome 

we-will  with-my   we-may  whom     anywhere 

7.     Phrases.     (62 — i  :oo.) 

i    See-the-window,  2  in-the-window,  3  in-the-river,  4  be- 
ware-of-wine,  5  the-inquiry-came,  6  pure-wool,  7  an-angle- 


SHORTHAND  89 

worm,  8  winsome-lass,  9  the-sparrow-warbles,25  10  a-worse- 
case,  ii  make-more-worry,  12  was-a-member-of-congress, 
13  he-is-aware,  14  he-is- worthy,  15  unworthy-youth,  16  was- 
a- worker,  17  in-the-work,r>0  18  where- was-it,  19  any-one, 
20  willing-to,  21  worth-much,  22  in-the-commonwealth.02 

8.     Letter.     (281 — 4:40.) 

Columbus,  Ohio,  April  14,  1904. 

Professor  William  Wilson, 

Sioux  City,  Iowa. 
My-Dear-Professor : — 

Replying  to-your  very  welcome  favor  of23  March  31.  It- 
is  very  pleasing  to  me  to-hear  how  much  you-are  doing  to 
secure  me  the-place  in  the-college  at50.  Sioux  City.  I-feel 
that  if-the-place  is  given  to  me  I-will  please  the-trustees. 
I-think  from  my  long  and-thorough  drill75  in-teaching  the- 
subject  of  biology  I  would  have  no-difficulty  in-satisfying 
the-trustees  as-to  my-ability  as  teacher  of-this  subject.  All100 
I-desire  is-a-fair  trial.  If-my  work  suits  I-would  be  willing 
to-take  the-place  at  the-same-salary  which- was  given123  the- 
former  professor.  I-know-that  the-class  of-work  which  the- 
college  should-have  and-such-as  the- faculty  expects,  judg- 
ing from  what  you150  have-said  to-me,  is  well  worth  that- 
much. 

I-think  it-is  impossible  for  the-college  to  secure  for  a- 
smaller  salary  a-teacher175  who-has  sufficient  ability  to  fill 
the-place  and-please  all  the-officials  of  the-school. 

If-there  is  any-thing-more  that  I  should200  do  to  enable 
the-trustees  to  settle  the-business,  I-wish  you-would  wire 
me  what-it-is,  also  the-proper  way  to  take-it225  up  with  the- 
officials. 

I-hope  some  day  to-fully  repay-you  for  the-help-you  have 
given-me  in-trying  to  secure  this  place250  for-me.  I-feel 


90  PITMANIC 

that  I-shall  succeed  and-am  well-aware  to-whom  I-shall  owe 
my-success  in-case  the-trustees  select  me.275     I-am, 

Yours-truly, 

Thomas  Wilbur.281 
9.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXIV. 

THE   W-HOOK,   SEC.    II. 

i.  In  addition  to  the  small  w-hook  used  on  em,  en,  lay 
and  ray  and  representing  the  w  preceding  the  stroke  to 
which  it  is  joined,  we  have  what  is  called  the  large  w-hook, 
formed  at  the  beginning  and  on  the  s-circle  side  of  te,  de, 
kay  and  gay.  This  hook  is  a  modification  of  these  four 
straight  letters  to  indicate  that  a  w  immediately  follows 
these  letters.  The  form  and  use  of  this  hook  are  shown  in 
the  followincr  words : 


twig     twice    dwell      quorum         squaw  anguish  twinkle  quoth 


SHORTHAND  91 

2.  This  w-hook,  like  the  1-hook  and  the  r-hook,  does 
not  stand  for  a  letter  preceding  the  stroke,  but  is,  instead, 
a  modification  of  the  strokes  te,  de,  kay  and  gay,  to  indicate 
a  following  w.     The  w-hook  on  te,  de,  kay  and  gay  is 
used  for  w  only  when  it  immediately  follows  one  of  these 
letters  and  is  in  the  same  syllable  with  it. 

3.  This  hook  should  be  made  sufficiently  large  to  avoid 
any  danger  of  confusion  with  the  1-hook,  which  is  used  on 
these   same   strokes.     The  letters   modified   with  the   large 
w-hook  are  called  twa,  dwa,  kwa  and  gwa. 

4.  It   should   be   noted   that   the   hooks   are   divided,   in 
regard  to  size,  into  two  classes;   ist,  small  hooks,  like  the 
1-hook,  r-hook  and  small  w-hook;  2nd,  large  hooks,  like 
the  w-hook  explained  above. 

EXERCISE  24. 

Using  the  large  w-hook  write  the  following : 

5.  List  Words.     (39 — i  :oo.) 

i  Quip,  2  quibble,  3  quash,  4  quarry,  5  Guelph,  6  guano, 
7  twill,  8  dwell,  9  liquid,  10  quiver,  n  squeak,  12  squire, 
13  quad,  14  vanquish,  15  queer,  16  equip,  17  requite, 
18  squabble,  19  squatter,  20  squaw,  21  squeal,  22  squawk, 
23  squawker,  24  equator,  25  lingual,  26  sequel,  27  require, 
28  requisite,  29  bequeath,  30  quake,  31  loquacious,  32  ex- 
quisite, 33  quarter,  34  quoth,  35  queerly,  36  query,  37  twin- 
kle, 38  quote,  39  quail. 

~"/~ 

6.  Wordsigns. 


liberty-of        liberty-of-     messenger         this-  in-reference-to  influential 

the-prees         the-people  will 


92  PITMANIC 


\  , 


ownership    in-respect-to     behalf       Jesus-      L,ord-Jesus-       just-had 

Christ      Christ 

7.  Phrases.     (50 — :45.) 

i  Many-quips,  2  in-their-quibble,  3  quash-it,  4  such- 
squibs,  5  require-such,  6  liquid-mass,  7  a-squatter,  8  use-a- 
quill,  9  loquacious-fellow,  10  may-requite-him,  1 1  such-twin- 
kles,25 12  many-queer-things,  13  they-equalize-it,  JJ4  wili- 
vanquish,  15  a-queer-thing,  16  the-earth-quakes,  17  very- 
loquacious,  18  quoth-the-doctor,  19  quote-him,  20  your- 
d welling,  21  bequeath-money.50 

8.  Letter.     (321 — 5:20.) 

Toledo,  Ohio,  March  i,  1904. 
Professor  Edison, 

Chicago,  111. 
Dear-Sir : — 

Replying  to-yours  of  the-6th,  I-think  you-must-be25  very- 
much  in  error  in-reference-to  the-editor  of-the  Times.  I-am 
sure  he-has  no-such  ideas  as-you  seem  to-suppose50  judging 
from  the-speech  which-you  delivered  at  the- jubilee  dinner 
in  Cincinnati,  Ohio.  I-know  Mr.  Watson,  the-editor  of-the 
Times,  very  well75  and-call  at-his  office  every  day  or  two 
and-discuss  with-him  the-social  topics  of  the-day.  While 
he-is  always  very-liberal100  in-his-views  he-thinks-it  unwise 
to-give  any-more-liberty  to-the-press.  He-is  well-aware 
that  usually  no-danger  would-arise125  if  the-press  were  given 
all  the-liberty  possible.  At  the-same  time  he-says  that-it-is 
possible  for  some  person  who-has-no130  sympatny  with  our- 
system  of-laws  to  acquire  the-ownership  of-some  large  and- 
influential  city  paper.  In-this-day  with  the-press  having 
so175  wide  an-influence,  would-it  be-wise,  therefore,  he-asks, 
to  annul  all-laws  which  in-any-manner  lessen  the-liberty-of- 


SHORTHAND  93 

the-press?  Hence200  he-thinks-that  the-press  is  already 
sufficiently  free  for  all-practical  purposes.  I-think  Mr.  Wat- 
son is  right  and-shall,  as  presiding  officer  of225  the-senate, 
veto  the-bill  now  before  that  body  in-case  it-passes  the- 
house  and-comes  before  me.  I-am  sure  that-when  you250 
think -this  subject-over  more  thoroughly  you-will  agree-with 
Mr.  Watson  as-to  the-proper  course  to-pursue.  I-am  aware 
it-is  unlikely275  that  any-such-dangers  will-ever  arise,  yet 
it-is  the-wise  thing  to-prepare  for-all  possible  evils  which- 
may  arise,  and  which-are300  the-more-likely  to-come  if-we 
leave  the-doors  swinging  wide  to-them.  I-am, 

Very  sincerely-yours, 

James  Irwin.321 
9.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXV. 

REVIEW. 


v 


i.     QUESTIONS: 

(  i  )     Which  curved  letters  are  modified  by  the  r-hook  ? 
(2)     Which  of  the  curved  letters  with  which  the  r-hook 


94  PITMANIC 

is  used  have  no  other  modifications  except  the  addition  of 
the  r-hook?      Jj 

(3)  In  what  way  are  ef,  ve,  ith  and  the  modified, 
besides  adding  the  hook,  to  indicate  a  following  r? 

(4)  In  what  way  are  em  and  en  modified,  besides 
adding  the  hook,  to  show  a  following  r? 

(5)  Are  the  letters  ar,  way,  es,  or  ze  ever  modified 
with  any  initial  hook? 

(6)  Why  is  it  necessary  to  shade  or  reverse  some 
curved  letters  and  not  others  when  an  r-hook  is  added? 

(7)  Does  emp  or  ing  ever  have  an  initial  hook? 

(8)  Name  the  triple-consonants. 

(9)  How  are  they  formed? 

( 10)  With   what   strokes   are  the   triple-consonants 
used  ? 

(n)     Give  a  few  illustrations  in  which  triple-conso- 
nants are  used. 

(12)  Can  the  triple-consonant  principle  be  used  with 
curved  strokes  ? 

(13)  Are  there  any  words  in  which  the  combination 
schr  may  be  used? 

(14)  For  what  purpose  is  this  combination  of  Short- 
hand characters  used? 

(15)  May  the  sez-circle  ever  be  placed  on  the  r-hook 
side  of  straight  letters  the  same  as  the  s-circle  is  in  triple- 
consonants? 

( 16)  In  what  class  of  words  is  the  r-hook  understood  ? 

(17)  With   which   strokes   do   the   triple-consonants 
most  frequently  occur? 

(18)  What  is  the  small  w-hook? 

(19)  What  letters  are  modified  by  it?  ' 

(20)  In  what  way  does  it  differ  from  the  1-hook? 


SHORTHAND  95 

(21)  May   any   v<nvel  occur  between  a  w-hook  and 
the  following  stroke? 

(22)  Ho\v  is  all  danger  of  confusion  avoided  between 
the  w-hook  on  em  and  en  and  the  r-hook  on  these  letters? 

(23)  On   what   letters  besides  lay,   ray,   em  and  en    J~ 
may  a  w-hook  be  used? 

(24)  In  what  three  ways  do  the  two  w-hooks  differ? 

(25)  On  which  side  of  the  stroke  is  the  large  w-hook 
written? 

EXERCISE  25. 

2.  List  Words.     (60 — i  :2o.) 

Energy  banner  fracas  frock  Virginia  thrush  tanner  pres- 
sure nourish  tuner  Francis  frankincense  Andover  machinery 
reverse  scraper  soaker  scrub  strap  skirmish  scratch  stress 
strew  discourage  prescribe25  scrawny  striker  screech  secrecy 
suitor  Edwin  work  William  Welch  win  worker  willingness 
wine  warble  Wilson  wool  wile  wench  worse  wince  quibble 
unworthy  quip  Guelph  guano50  twill  dwell  liquid  squeak 
squaw  squeal  bequeath  loquacious  exquisite  twinkle.60 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Withdraw,  which-arc.  West- Virginia,  very,  (every,)  uni- 
verse, university,  universal,  myself,  tell-us,  truth,  there, 
(their,  they-are,)  therefore,  South- America,  recollect,  re- 
spect, respectable,  (respectability,)  remark,  (remarkable, 
mere,  Mr.,)  proficient,  (proficiency,)  pleasure,  (measure,) 
probable,  (probably,  probability.)  proper,  (property,)  per- 
haps, sure,  owner,  overwhelm,  near,  (nor,  honor.)  neighbor- 
hood, New-Hampshire,  North-America,  from,  forgive,  sur- 
prise, express,  suppress,  secure,  such-are,  such-were,  scrip- 
ture, (describe,)  as-it-were,  America,  belong,  (belonged.) 
commercial,  external,  humor,  honorable,  more,  (mercy,) 
manner,  merciful,  mortgage,  must-have,  satisfy,  (satisfied, 


96  PITMANIC 

satisfactory,  satisfaction,)  in-reply-to,,  more-or-less,  mem- 
ber-of-Congress,  member-of-the-legislature,  nowhere,  we- 
are,  where,  aware,  when,  while,  (we-will,)  well,  awhile, 
with-me,  (with-my,)  with-him,  (we-may,)  with- whom,  in- 
quiry, (anywhere,)  welcome,  liberty-of-the-press,  liberty-of- 
the-people,  messenger,  this-will,  in-reference-to,  influential, 
ownership,  in-respect-to,  behalf,  Jesus-Christ,  Lord-Jesus- 
Christ,  just-had. 

4.  Phrases.     (83 — 1 120.) 

i  A-rumor-came,  2  in-trouble,  3  in-favor,  4  numerous- 
things,  5  low-pressure,  6  nourish-him,  7  a-fisher,  8  with- 
much-energy,  9  a-spring-day,  10  more-money,  II  have- 
mercy,25  12  honor-all-people,  13  large-measure,  14  every- 
case,  15  give-them-honor,  16  express-the-case,  17  will-honor- 
them,  18  they-receive-more,  19  in-the-window,  20  in-the- 
river,50  21  beware-of-wine,  22  a- worthy-case,  23  a- worse- 
case,  24  he-is-aware,  25  he-is-worthy,  26  was-a-worker, 
27  where-was-it,  28  any-one,  29  worth-much,75  30  many- 
quips,  31  quash-it,  32  require-such,  33  very-loquacious.83 

5.  Letter.     (321 — 5:20.) 

Toledo,  Ohio,  March  i,  1904. 
Professor  Edison, 

Chicago,  111. 
Dear-Sir : — 

Replying  to-yours  of  the-6th,  I-think  you-must-be25  very- 
much  in  error  in-reference-to  the-editor  of-the  Times.  I-am 
sure  he-has  no-such  ideas  as-you  seem  to-suppose50  judging 
from  the-speech  which-you  delivered  at  the- jubilee  dinner 
in  Cincinnati,  Ohio.  I-know  Mr.  Watson,  the-editor  of-the 
Times,  very  well75  and-call  at-his  office  every  day  or  two 
and-discuss  with-him  the-social  topics  of  the-day.  While 
he-is  always  very-liberal100  in-his-views  he-thinks-it  unwise 
to-give  any-more-liberty  to-the-press.  He-is  well-aware 


SHORTHAND  97 

that  usually  no-danger  would-arise125  if  the-press  were  given 
all  the-liberty  possible.  At  the-same  time  he-says  that-it-is 
possible  for  some  person  who-has-no150  sympathy  with  our- 
system  of-laws  to  acquire  the-ownership  of-some  large  and- 
influential  city  paper.  In-this-day  with  the-press  having 
so175  wide  an-influence,  would-it  be-wise,  therefore,  he-asks, 
to  annul  all-laws  which  in-any-manner  lessen  the-liberty-of- 
the-press  ?*/  Hence200  he-thinks-that  the-press  is  already  suffi- 
ciently free  for  all-practical  purposes.  I-think  Mr.  Watson 
is  right  and-shall,  as  presiding  officer  of2-5  the-senate,  veto 
the-bill  now  before  that  body  in-case  it-passes  the-house 
and-comes  before  me.  I-am  sure  that-when  you250  think- 
this  subject-over  more  thoroughly  you-will  agree- with  Mr. 
Watson  as-to  the-proper  course  to-pursue.  I-am  aware  it-is 
unlikely275  that  any-such-dangers  will-ever  arise  yet 
it-is  the-wise  -thing  to-prepare  for-all  possible  evils  which- 
may  arise,  and  which-are300  the-more-likely  to-come  if-we 
leave  the-doors  swinging  wide  to-them.  I-am, 

Very  sincerely-yours, 

James  Irwin.321 


LESSON  XXVI. 
!/ 

THE  REL-HOOK  AND  LER-HOOK. 

1.  The  sound  of  1  very  frequently  follows  the  sound  of 
m,  n  or  r  and  usually  coalesces  very  closely  with  it.    In  such 
cases  the  en,  em  or  ray  is  modified  by  a  large  initial  hook 
called  the  rel-hook  to  indicate  that  an  1  follows.    This  hook 
is  several  times  larger  than  the  w-hook  on  these  letters. 

2.  Similar  to  this  hook  is  a  large  initial  hook  on  lay 


98  PITMANIC 

to  indicate  a  following  r.     This  is  called  the  ler-hook. 

3.     The  use  of  the  rel-hook  and  ler-hook  is  shown  in 
the  following  words  : 


penal       barrel  family  polar  collar  lurch 

4.  These  two  hooks  may  be  used  when  either  a  long  or 
short  vowel  intervenes  between  the  stroke  and  the  1  or  r 
indicated  by  the  rel-hook  or  the  ler-hook.    The  1  or  r  indi- 
cated is  usually  in  the  same  syllable  with  the  stroke,  but 
not  necessarily  so.    The  characters  mel  and  nel  are  not  used 
in  single  syllable  words  or  where  they  would  be  the  only 
consonants  in  the  word  as  kneel,  nail,  annual,  mole.     This 
of  course,  does  not  apply  to  their  use  as  wordsigns. 

5.  These  characters  are  spoken  of  as  mel,  nel,  rel  and 
ler. 

EXERCISE  26. 

Using  the  rel-hook  and  the  ler-hook  write  the  following 
words  : 

6.  List  Words.     (57  —  1  125.) 

i  Enroll,  2  relic,  3  rule,  4  final,  5  penal,  6  journal,  7  rail- 
way, 8  tunnel,  9  signal,  10  analyze,  n  female,  12  spinal, 
13  relish,  14  chronology,  15  analogy,  16  barrel,  17  scholar, 
18  polar,  19  secular,  20  choler,  21  jocular,  22  camel,  23  senti- 
nel, 24  release,  25  penalty,  26  original,  27  Nelson,  28  millen- 
ium,  29  plural,  30  relate,  31  rural,  32  spiral,  33  temporal, 
34  autumnal,  35  lurch,  36  larva,  37  larynx,  38  larceny, 
39  larch,  40  signalize,  41  canal,  42  analagous,  43  Daniel, 
44  kernel,  45  calomel,  46  malfeasance,  47  malefactor,  48  Mal- 
colm, 49  animal,  50  pommel,  51  nominal,  52  realize,  53  realm, 
54  rulable,  55  rolling,  56  color,  57  squirrel. 


DALLAS,  TEX43 

SHORTHAND  99 

7.     Wordsigns. 


only  unless  reliable  railway-car  relinquish       laws-of-life 


^c 


iaws-of-        everlasting        evtrlasting-     ever-and-          for-ever-  muet-like 

health  life  ever  and-ever 

\ 

8.  Phrases.     (58* — i  :oo.) 

i  Release-them,  2  their-penalty,  3  all-their-camels,  4  they- 
relate,  5  you-will-realize,  6  a-malefactor,  7  a-large-canal, 
8  tell-the-colonel,  9  railway-track,  10  an-autumnal-day,25 
ii  the-king's-realm,  12  saw-a-signal,  13  the-original-canal, 
14  very-many-colors,  15  a-j ocular- fellow,  16  he-will-relate, 
17  rolling-stock,  18  a-relic,  19  a-fmal-case,50  20  a-new-signal, 
21  they-relish,  22  in-a-tunnel.58 

9.  Letter.     (200 — 3  120.) 

Sandusky,  Ohio,  July  4,  1904. 
Mr.  Edgar  Thomas,  Jr., 

Denver,  Colorado. 
My-Dear-Sir  :— 

I-am  this-day  in  receipt  of-your25  final-notice.  The-sum 
of-money  which-you-will  realize  from  the-business  is,  I-am- 
sorry  to  say,  very-much  below  what  I-was50  expecting.  I- 
was  sure  that-you  would  secure  enough  to  pay  off  ail-that 
you  are  owing  and-have  enough  besides  to-set  you  up75  in- 
business  in  Denver.  Was-there  a-fall  in-prices,  or  what-was 
the-trouble?  I-am  unable  now  to  see  why  your  property 
should100  sell  for  so-small  a-sum  unless  there-was  fear  the- 
supply  of-ore  would  soon  give-out.  I-scarcely  think,  how- 
ever, that-this-is123  the-cause.  I-shall  await  with-much 


ioo  PITMANIC 

iety  more  details  from-you.  I-hope,  however,  that-you  real- 
ize the-necessity  of-keeping  up  your  courage150  notwith- 
standing your  heavy-losses.  I-know  that-you-will  come- 
out  all-right  in-time  if-you- will-only  keep  up  your  courage. 
I-hope175  to-have  a-reply  from-you  inside  of  a-week  with- 
details  in-reference-to  the-sale  of-your  property. 

Very-truly-yours, 

Jacob  Nelson.200 

10.     Letter,     (ioo — i  :4O.) 

Minneapolis,  Minn.,  May  9,   1904. 
Sears,  Roebuck  &  Co., 

Chicago,  111. 
Sirs : — 

T-enclose    eight    dollars    for   which    please-to   ship    me25 
the-following  by-express  as-soon-as  possible: 

1  No.  6  baby  cab $3-QO 

2  doz.  No.  4  tooth  brushes 2.2550 

i  doz.  2  oz.  tooth  powder 2.25 

i  pair  No.  2  lady's  scissors .50 


Total $8.00 

I-shall  look-for75  these  on  Thursday.  It-will-be  neces- 
sary, therefore,  for-you  to  ship  them  the-same  day  you-re- 
ceive  this.  I-am, 

Yours-truly, 

Amos  Benson.100 


SHORTHAND  101 

ii.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXVII. 

THE  H-TICK. 

i.  The  stroke  hay  when  followed  by  kay,  gay,  em,  lay, 
way  or  ar,  does  not  form  an  angle  that  is  easily  or  quickly 
made.  In  such  cases,  therefore,  a  tick  is  used  to  represent 
the  aspirate  h  when  it  is  followed  by  one  of  these  letters. 
The  tick  made  use  of  is  like  the  last  half  of  the  sign  for  I. 
Like  the  wordsign  for  he,  this  tick  when  used  for  the  aspirate 
before  kay,  gay,  lay,  em,  way  or  ar  must  always  be  written 
with  a  downward  stroke.  Written  thus  it  forms  a  distinct 
angle  with  the  letter  to  which  it  is  joined.  This  tick  takes 
the  position  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined.  The  follow- 
ing words  will  illustrate  the  use  of  the  h-tick: 

V     _ 

harp          hack     whip        hale  hag     hem       whiskey     whistle  bam 


102  PITMANIC 

EXERCISE  27. 
Using  the  h-tick  write  the  following: 

2.  List  Words.     (36—  :so.) 

i  Horse,  2  harp,  3  hark,  4  hem,  5  Hector,  6  harsh,  7  ham, 
8  Hume,  9  hum,  10  wheel,  n  whip,  12  whack,  13  whistle, 
14  wheedle,  15  whale,  16  whig,  17  hecatomb,  18  hoax, 
19  hack,  20  horsewhip,  21  whipple,  22  Higley,  23  hook, 
24  hug,  25  hame,  26  hare,  27  hale,  28  howl,  29  hill,  30  hick- 
ory, 31  harmony,  32  hymn,  33  whisper,  34  holiday,  35  hex- 
agonal, 36  hymnal. 

3.  Wordsigns. 

S"     8"    "> ^     ^\         V)          l/\^       / £r"-\         x""d ? , 

must-make  one-or-       two-or-    three-or-    most-  must- 

two  three        four  important          expect 

4.  Phrases.     (50 — :45.) 

i  Manv-horses,  2  a-new-harp,  3  a-long-time,  4  a-hectic- 
glow,  5  two-hames,  6  humming-noises,  7  in-harm's-way, 
8  new-hymnal,  9  many-whales,  10  a-long-horsewhip,25 
ii  a-funny-hoax,  12  several-hacks-came,  ,13  no-harmony, 
14  all-holidays,  15  several-hooks,  16  the-hill-top,  17  raise-a- 
howl,  1 8  take-the-money,  19  one-or-two-more.50 

5.  Letter.     (136 — 2:15.) 

Wheeling,  West-Virginia,  July  6,  1904. 
Messrs.  Craig  Bros., 

Syracuse,  N.-Y. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

I-have  your  telegram  to  J.  B.  Hayes25  and-hasten  to 
reply.  I-mail  you  to-day  circular  which-will  give-you  the- 
sizes  of  all  the-wheels  I-make.  I-hope  that50  my-prices, 
which-are  very-low,  will-induce-you  to-give  my  new  make 
of  car  wheels  which  I-design  especially  for  heavy  passenger 


SHORTHAND  103 

coaches75  a-fair  trial.  I-am  sure  that-they-will  bear  up  as- 
well  and-wear  as-long-as  any-wheels  now  in-use.  They- 
have100  an-exceedingly  smooth  bore,  while  the-dressing  on 
trie-outer  rim  is  unusually  true,  thus-causing  the-wheels  to- 
revolve  very-smoothly  on  the-axle.12"' 

I-hope  to-receive  a-favorable  reply. 

Yours-truly, 

Michael  Mechem.130  s 

6.     Letter.     (137 — 2:15.) 

Newburg,  New- York,  March  10,  1904. 
Cole  Bros., 

Sioux  Falls,  South  Dakota. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

Replying  to-your  favor  of  March  8.25  We-are  sorry  to 
in  form -you  that-it- will-be  impossible  for  us  to  ship-you  any- 
of  the-smaller  sizes  of  shoes  inside  ofr'°  two-weeks.  Since 
the-fourth  of  the-month  calls  have  come  from  jobbers  for- 
several  unusually  large  supplies,  mostly  of-children's  shoes, 
hence  our-stock75  of-small  shoes  is  exceedingly  low/-  We- 
will  rush  the-work  on-these  sizes  and-hope  to-help-you  out 
in-time  to-supply  your100  customers.  Please  to  inform  us 
what  sizes  you-require  right-away  and-we-will  make  a-rush 
job  of  the-special  sizes  you-must-have.1-5 

Thanking-you  for-your  favor,  we-are, 

Yours-truly, 

Higley  &  Co.137 


104  PITMANIC 

7.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXVIII. 

THE  F-HOOK. 

1.  The  f-hook  is  a  small  final  hook  written  upon  the 
s-circle  side  of  all  straight  letters.     A  letter  thus  modified 
indicates  a  following  f  or  v.     The  context  will  in  every  case 
indicate  whether  f  or  v  is  meant.     The  letters  modified  by 
the  f-hook  are  called  pef,  pev,  bef,  bev,  tef,  tev,  etc. 

2.  Any   vowel,  diphthong  or  coalescent  may   intervene 
between  a  stroke  and  an  f  or  v  indicated  by  the  f-hook. 

3.  The  f-hook  is  shown  in  the  following  words : 


Vv     ~L     I,    /    / 


4.  When  f  or  v  follows  a  straight  letter  and  comes 
before  another  consonant  in  the  same  word,  the  writer  must 
use  his  own  judgment  whether  to  use  the  hook  or  the  stroke 
for  f  or  v,  always  selecting  the  one  which  forms  the  better 


SHORTHAND  105 

angle  with  what  follows.  In  case  each  forms  an  equally 
good  angle,  preference  should  be  given  to  the  hook,  as  it 
is  more  quickly  written.  Usually,  when  medial,  a  hook, 
following  one  of  the  straight  letters,  makes  fully  as  good 
an  angle  as  the  stroke  and  hence  is  the  more  frequently 
written. 

5.  As  a  rule  the  f-hook  is  used  only 'for  an  f  or  v  in 
the  same  syllable  with  the  stroke  upon  which  it  is  formed. 
When  a  better  angle  or  a  more  easily  formed  outline  may 
be  made  it  is  allowable  to  vise  the  f-hook  for  an  f  or  v  in 
a  following  syllable,  as  in  devote. 

6.  When  an  f  or  v  is  the  last  consonant  in  an  outline 
and  is  followed  by  a  sounded  vowel,  the  stroke  is  used.     If 
not   followed  by  a  sounded  vowel,  the  f-hook  is  used  as 
shown  in  the  following  words : 


grave          gravy          huff  heavy          puff         puffy        deaf  defy 

7.  When  an  iss  follows  the  f-hook  it  is  written  within 
the  hook. 

EXERCISE  28. 

Using  the  f-hook,  when  proper,  write  the  following 
words : 

8.  List  Words.     (60— i  rss.) 

i  Cave,  2  grave,  3  rave,  4  dove,  5  glove,  6  grove,  7  pave, 
8  gave,  9  traffic,  10  devote,  n  havoc,  12  graphic,  13  cough, 
14  gravely,  15  bivouac,  16  bluff,  17  brief,  18  chief,  19  cliff, 
20  cuff,  21  chaff,  22  skiff,  23  behave,  24  reef,  25  David, 
26  gruff,  27  groove,  28  cleave,  29  engrave,  30  reprove, 
31  bereave,  32  hive,  33  hove,  34  deserve,  35  serve,  36  ob- 
serve, 37  rove,  38  braves,  39  heaves,  40  cloves,  41  deafen, 
42  lithograph,  43  surf,  44  province,  45  clef,  46  trough, 


io6 


PITMANIC 


47  rough,  48  defense,  49  rive,  50  toughen,  51  Jove,  52  cavil, 
53  graven,  54  strive,  55  drive,  56  above,  57  huff,  58  crave, 
59  beef,  60  provincial. 
9.     Wordsigns. 


i         / 

1 

/ 

I 

I 

ought-to-have          which-have 
it-ought-to-have     whichever 

out-of 
it-would-have 

which-ought 
to-have 

whatever 

So                           % 

\ 

^ 

1. 

belief    •                 perfect 
believe 

poverty 

careful 
carefully 

differ-ed 
different 
difference 

I             / 

/ 

S 

i    n  r* 

derive            each-will-have 

which-will  have 

much-will- 
have 

govern-ed 
governor 
government 

10.  Phrases.     (72 — i  :io.) 

i  In-a-cave,  2  a-grave-case,  3  see-the-dove,  4  a-pretty- 
grove,  5  in-the-grove,  6  pave-the-way,  7  gave-money, 
8  heavy-traffic,  9  has-a-cough,25  10  over-the-bluff,  n  brief- 
case, 12  a-new-cuff,  13  in-the-skiff,  14  on-the-reef,  15  drive- 
it-away,  16  the-hive,  17  he-will-engrave,  18  they-reprove- 
him,50  19  the-noise-deafens,  20  some-lithographs-came, 
21  a-long-trough,  22  in-his-defense,  23  a-new-incentive, 
24  strive-to-succeed,  25  each-will-have-enough.72 

11.  Letter.     (257 — 4:15.) 

Savannah,  Georgia,  Nov.  28,  1904. 
Miss  Jessie  Ladue, 

Dallas,  Texas. 
Dear  Miss  Ladue : — 

Replying  to-yours  of  a-week  ago  Saturday25  I-mail  you 
to-day  a-circular  which-will  inform-you  when  our-term 


SHORTHAND  107 

closes.  The-new  law,  in-reference-to  the-length  of-terms50 
at  schools  of-our  class,  goes-into  effect  at  the-close  of- 
this  year. 

.  \s-soon-as  you  decide  what  work  you- will  take  up75  write- 
me  fully  and-I-will  take-pleasure  in-having  everything 
ready  for-you  when-you-come. 

Our   school   is   very   thorough   in   every   course.100     We 
give  especial  drill  in-piano  and-v.ocal  music.     We(jils9^ha ve  » 
an-unusually  capable  teacher  for  the-harp.     Our  large  chor- 
al-class of  eighty^5.-  ladies  gives  ample  drill  in-vocal-work. 

Our  scholars,  as-a-rule,  have-no-difficulty  in  securing  all 
the-pupils  it-is  possible  for-themir'°  to  teach  as-soon-as  the}r 
locate  and-people  come  to  know  from  what  school  they  have 
a-diploma.  If-you-will  take  our  course175  and-do  the- work 
thoroughly,  you-will-have  every-reason  to-look  for-success. 

I-shall  expect  to  hear  from-you  fully  a-week  or-00  more 
in-advance  of-your  leaving  home  for  Savannah. 

When-you  arrive  in-this  city,  take  a-hack  and-tell  the- 
driver  to  take-you-25  to-my  home  where  you-will-be  welcome 
to-stay  until  you-are  ready  to-move  into  the-quarters  which 
we  shall  engage  for-you-50  in-advance. 

Very  sincerely-yours, 

Orville  Matteson.257 

12.     Translation. 


joS  PITMANIC 


LESSON  XXIX. 
THE;  N-HOOK,  SEC.  i. 

1.  The  sound  of  n  is,  in  certain  cases,  indicated  by  a 
small  final   hook  called  the  n-hook.     It  is   similar  to  the 
f-hook.     This  hook  is  used  on  all  straight  letters.     It  is 
written  opposite  the  s-circle  side.     The  straight  letters  with 
the  n-hook  modification  are  called  pen,  ben,  ten,  den,  ken, 
gen,  etc.     This  hook  may  be  used  for  an  n  when  it  follows 
a  straight  stroke  immediately  or  when  a  long  or  short  vowel, 
diphthong  or  coalescent  intervenes.     A  medial  n  following 
a   straight  letter  may  be  represented  by   an  n-hook   even 
though  it  may  be  in  the  syllable  following  the  stroke  which 
the  n-hook  modifies,  as  in  denote. 

2.  The  use  of  the  n-hook  on  straight  letters  is  illustrated 
by  the  following  words : 

\\     3     3    J  _  _   /  S    J 

pain      bone       drain      train      Jane        cone        gain          rain         hen       denote 

3.  The  rules  governing  the  use  of  the  n-hook  on  straight 
strokes  are  as  follows : 

1 i )  A  medial  n  following  a  straight  letter  is  represented 
by  the  n-hook  unless  the  stroke  en  may  be  more  quickly 
or  easily  written. 

(2)  When  it  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word,  an  n  fol- 
lowing a  straight  letter  is  represented  by  the  n-hook,  if  it 
is  the  last  letter  in  the  word,  or  is  followed  by  a  silent  vowel, 
as  in  drain  and  cone. 

(3)  When  n  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  a  sound- 
ed vowel  follows,  the  stroke  en  is  used,  as  in  tiny  and  deny. 

(4)  The  n-hook  may  be  indicated  by  placing  an  s-circle 


SHORTHAND  109 

or  a  sez-circle  on  the  n-hook  side  of  straight  letters  as  in 
cadence. 

4.     The  application  of  these  rules  is  shown  in  the  fol- 
lowin    illustrations  : 


L 


tone          tiny  dun  deny          pain        puny  dense  cadence 

5.     List  Words.     (62  —  1  140.  ) 

i  Pain,  2  bin,  3  town,  4  down,  5  satin,  6  deepen,  7  cane, 
8  chaplain,  9  grain,  10  boon,  n  kine,  12  plain,  13  blown, 
14  plan,  15  glean,  16  clean,  17  clan,  18  cone,  19  gin,  20  de- 
cline, 21  pagan,  22  candy.  23  dandy,  24  denote,  25  taken, 
26  Ljgan,  27  strain,  28  sudden,  29  legion,  30  kitchen, 
31  beacon,  32  unclean,  33  shaken,  34  pinch,  35  punch, 
36  gainer,  37  glance,  38  bunch,  39  guns,  40  dines,  41  gains, 
42  dunes,  43  chance,  44  chains,  45  joins,  46  quince,  47  trance, 
48  bounce,  49  bones,  50  curtain,  51  twins,  52  spleen,  53  ob- 
tain, 54  pretense,  55  prudence,  56  retains,  57  Hortense, 
58  disdain,  59  residence,  60  brown,  61  green,  62  greens. 

^  6.     Wordsigns. 

J    s    —    X.  ""*    \    - 


at-once    at-length    again-and-    benevolent       begin  beneficial  begun 

again  benevolence 


^ 


began      darkens     denominate     darken    doctrine    determine    experl-     European 
darkness  denomination  ence 


> 


for-in-     question     general        happen      it-will-have    is-said    In-hls-      Imagine 
stance  generally  twelve  to-hav«  situation 


no  PITMANIC 


must-do         must-come        musl-give    more-than     magnificent       Northwestern 

magnificence 

I 

7.  Phrases.     (59 — i  :oo.) 

i  Come-at-once,  2  at-length-it-came,  3  he-is-benevolent, 
4  begin-it,  5  it-was-begun,  6  the-day-darkens,  7  such-doc- 
trine, 8  will-determine,  9  the-people's-government,25 10  when- 
it-happcns,  n  he-will-imagine,  12  both-must-come,  13  you- 
must-give-up,  14  a-magnificent-day,  15  how-many-dances, 
1 6  he-can-come,  17  a-large-cone,50  18  take-his-chances, 
19  a-mere-pretense,  20  took-a-quince.59 

8.  Letter.     (125 — 2:00.) 

Adams,  Massachusetts,  April  6,  1904. 
Mrs.  Lillie  Miley, 

Decatur,  111. 
Dear  Mrs.  Miley : — 

Replying  to-your  questions  in-reference-to-the  Ladies'25 
Aid^,  Society  branches.  It-is-impossible  for  me  to-give-you 
any  help.  Since  I-have-never  belonged  to  the-society  I- 
know  nothing  of50  the-society's  plan  of-work.  I-think-that 
if-you-would  write  Mrs.  Ella  Beach,  of  Denver,  Colorado^ 
you-will  obtain  answers  to  all-your75  questions  and-from 
a-source  that-is-reliable  as  Mrs.  Beach  is  one-of  the-chief 
workers  in-this  society.  I-am  sorry  that-my100  inability  to 
answer-your  questions  will-make-it  necessary  for-you  to 
wait  until-you-can  hear  from  Mrs.  Beach. 

Very-truly-yours, 

Jennie  Bolton.125 

9.  Letter.     (134 — 2:10.) 

Clear  Lake,  Iowa,  June  8,  1904. 
Mr.  Shelby  Dixon, 

Earlville,  Mo. 
My-Dear-Sir  :— 

I-see   from-yonr   advertisement   in-the   Earlville25   Globe, 


SHORTHAND  in 

that-you  have- for  sale  a-number  of-heavy  work-horses. 
I-expect  soon  to-begin  work  upon  a-railroad  job  near  Earl- 
ville.  As50  I-now  have  but-one-team,  it-will-be  necessary 
for-me  to  purchase  several-more.  If  I-can  secure-them  in 
Missouri  as  cheaply75  as-they  may-be  had  here,  I-would 
much  prefer  to  buy-them  there  and-thus  save  the-expense 
of  shipping-them  from  this  city.100  Will-you,  therefore, 
please  to-write-me  at-once  and-give  age,  weight  and-prices 
which-you  ask  for-your  heavy  teams.  Your  early  reply125 
will-be  an-especial  favor. 

Very-truly, 

Enos  Jackson.134 
10.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXX. 

REVIEW. 

i.    QUESTIONS: 

(i)      What  sound,  when  it  follows  en,  em  and  ray, 
is  sometimes  indicated  by  a  large  initial  hook? 


ii2  PITMANIC 

(2)  How  does  this  hook  compare   in  size  with  the 
w-hook  on  these  letters  ? 

(3)  What  is  this  hook  .called? 

(4)  Give  five  words  showing  use  of  this  hook. 

(5)  What   vowels   may   occur   between   em,   en   and 
ray  and  the  following  1  indicated  by  the  rel-hook? 

(6)  What  large  hook  is  used  on  lay?    ^^ 

(7)  What  is  this  hook  called? 

(8)  Give  three  words  in  which  this  hook  is  used. 

(9)  By  what  names  are  the  strokes  modified  by  these 
hooks  called? 

( 10)  Name  the  letters  with  which  hay  does  not  make 
a  distinct  and  easily  formed  angle? 

(n)     When  the  aspirate  sound  of  h  precedes  these 
letters  by  what  character  is  it  represented? 

(12)  How  is  this  character  written? 

(13)  In  what  direction  must  this  tick  for  h  always 
be  written? 

(14)  Give  five  words  illustrating  the  use  of  this  tick. 
^    (15)     What  sounds  are  represented  by  a  small  final 

hook  on  the  s-circle  side  of  straight  letters? 

( 16)  Is  this  hook  merely  a  modification  of  the  stroke 
or  does  it  stand  for  the  letter  itself? 

(17)  What  vowels  may  intervene  between  a  straight 
letter  and  a  following  f  or  v  represented  by  the  f-hook? 

( 18)  Is  it  ever  allowable  to  use  the  f-hook  to  indicate 
an  f  or  v  in  a  syllable  following  that  which  contains  the 
stroke  modified  by  the  f-hook? 

(19)  When  f  or  v  comes  between  a  straight  letter 
and  a  following  stroke  in  the  same  word,  when  should  the 
hook  and  when  should  the  stroke  be  used  ? 

(20)  When  an  f  or  v  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word 


SHORTHAND  113 

when  should  the  stroke  and  when  should  the  hook  be  used? 

(21)  Give  three  words  where  f  is  the  last  consonant 
and  the  hook  should  be  used. 

(22)  Give  three  words  where  f  is  the  last  consonant 
and  the  stroke  should  be  used.    <* 

(23)  Give  three  words  where  v  is  the  last  consonant 
and  the  hook  should  be  used. 

(24)  Give  three  words  where  v  is  the  last  consonant 
and  the  stroke  should  be  used. 

(25)  What  hook,   similar  to  the  f-hook,   is  used   at 
the  end   of  straight  letters,  but  on  the   side   opposite  the 
f-hook? 

v      (26)     What  vowels  may  occur  between  a  stroke  and 
i.  following  n-hook? 

(27)  May  the  n-hook  ever  be  used  to  represent  an 
n  in  a  syllable  folowing  the  one  containing  the  stroke  modi- 
fied by  the  n-hook? 

(28)  When  n  comes  between  two  strokes  in  a  word, 
when  should  the  n-hook  and  when  should  the  stroke  en 
be  used? 

(29)  When  n  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  when 
should  the  stroke  and  when  should  the  hook  be  used? 

(30)  What  is  the  effect  of  placing  the  s-circle  or 
sez-circle  on  the  n-hook  side  of  straight  letters? 

(31)  Give  five  words  in  which  the  s-circle  or  sez- 
circle  is  used  on  the  n-hook  side  of  straight  letters. 

EXERCISE  30. 

2.     List  Words.     (58 — i  :so.) 

Journal  railway  analyze  chronology  barrel  secular  jocular 
penalty  Nelson  millenium  plural  relate  larynx  Daniel  Mal- 
colm rolling  whistle  wheedle  hecatomb  whipple  Higley  howl 
harmony  holiday  hexagonal-5  graphic  cough  David  groove 


n4  PITMANIC 

deserve  braves  heaves  lithograph  clef  trough  defense  tough- 
en cavil  crave  provincial  satin  blown  decline  pagan  denote 
taken  strain  legion  gainer  glance50  chance  joins  quince 
trance  Hortense  residence  brown  greens.58 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Only,  unless,  reliable,  railway-car,  relinquish,  laws-of-life, 
laws-of-health,  everlasting,  everlasting-life,  ever-and-ever, 
for-ever-and-ever,  must-like,  must-make,  one-or-two,  two- 
or-three,  three-or-four,  most-important,  must-expect,  ought- 
to-have,  (it-ought-to-have,)  which-have  (whichever,)  out- 
of,  (it-would-have,)  which-ought-to-have,  whatever,  belief, 
(believe,)  perfect,  poverty,  careful,  (carefully,)  differ,  (dif- 
fered, different,  difference,)  derive,  each- will-have,  which- 
will-have,  much- will-have,  govern,  (governed,  governor, 
government,)  at-once,  at-length,  again-and-again,  benevo- 
lent, (benevolence,)  begin,  beneficial,  begun,  began,  darkens, 
(darkness,)  denominate,  (denomination,)  darken,  doctrine, 
determine,  experience,  European,  for-instance,  question,  gen- 
eral, (generally,)  it- will-have,  (twelve,)  is-said-to-have,  in- 
his-situation,  imagine,  must-do,  must-come,  must-give,  more- 
than,  magnificent,  (magnificence,)  Northwestern. 

4.  Phrases.     (90 — i  :so.) 

Release-them,  their-camels,  they-relate,  you-will-realize, 
autumnal-day,  the-king's-realm,  many-horses,  two-hames, 
hummingj-noises,  in-harm's-way,  several-hacks23  all-holidays, 
the-hill-top,  raise-a-howl,  pave-the-way,  heavy-traffic,  on- 
the-reef,  in-the-hive,  some-lithographs-came,  a-long-trough50 
a-new-incentive,  strtve-to-succeed,  each-will-have-enough, 
come-at-once,  at-length-it-came,  he-is-benevolent,  the-day- 
darkens,  will-determine,73  he-will-imagine,  a-magnificent- 
day,  take-his-chances,  a-mere-pretense,  took-a-quince.90 


SHORTHAND  115 

5.     Letter.     (100 — 1:40.) 

Minneapolis,  Minn.,  May  9,   1904. 
Sears,  Roebuck  &  Co., 

Chicago,  111. 
Sirs : — 

I-enclose    eight    dollars    for    which    please    to-ship    me25 
the-following  by-express;  as-soon-as   possible: 

i  No.  6  baby  cab $3-OO 

2.  doz.  No.  4  tooth  brushes 2.25r'° 

i  doz.  2  oz.  tooth  powder 2.25 

i  pair  No.  2  lady's  scissors .50 


Total $8.00 

I-shall  look-for75  these  on  Thursday.  It-will-be  necessary, 
therefore,  for-you  to  ship  them  the-same  day  yott-receive 
this.  I-ain, 

Yours-truly, 

Amos  Benson.100 
6.     Letter.     (137 — 2:15.) 

Newburgh,  New-York,  March  10,  1904. 
Cole  Bros., 

Sioux  Falls,  South  Dakota. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

Replying  to-your  favor  of  March  8.25  We-are  sorry  to 
inform-you  that-it- will-be  impossible  for  us  to  ship-you  any- 
of  the-smaller  sizes  of  shoes  inside  of50  two-weeks.  Since 
the-fourth  of  the-month  calls  have  come  from  jobbers  for- 
several  unusually  large  supplies,  mostly  of-children's  shoes, 
hence  our-stock75  of-small  shoes  is  exceedingly  low.  We- 
will  rush  the-work  on-these  sizes  and-hope  to-help-you  out 
in-time  to-supply  your100  customers.  Please-to  inform  us 
what  sizes  you-require  right-away  and-we-will  make  a-rush 
job  of  the-special  sizes  you-must-have.125 

Thanking-you    for-your   favor,   we-are, 

Yours-truly, 

Higley  &  Co,137 


ii6  PITMANIC 


LESSON  XXXI. 

THE)    N-HOOK,    SEC.    II. 

a  • 

1.  In  addition  to  the  straight  letters,  the  n-hook  is  also 
used  on  all  the  curved  letters,  excepting  zhe,  way,  yea  and 
ing.     With   the   curved    letters   the   n-hook   is    necessarily 
written  within  the  curve,  the  only  side  of  curved  letters  upon 
which  a  hook  may  be  easily  and  quickly  formed. 

2.  The  curved  letters  with  the  n-hook  modification  are 
designated  as  fen,  ven,  men,  nen,  etc. 

3.  When  an  s-circle  follows  an  n-hook  on  a  curved  letter 
the  circle  must  be  written  within  the  hook,   as  in   fence, 
illustrated  below. 

4.  The  use  of  the  n-hook  is   shown   in  the   following 
words  : 


I, 


r 


fancy          vanish          then       aseign     ozone          meaning     saloon  fence 

5.  When  n  occurs  in  an  outline  between  two  consonant 
strokes,  either  straight  or  curved,  and  the  preceding  is  one 
to  which  an  n-hook  may  be  attached,  the  hook  is  used  in  all 
cases  excepting  where  its  use  will  not  give  an  easily  or 
quickly  formed  outline  or  distinct  angle  with  what  follows. 
In   the   word   finch,    for   example,   the   stroke   en   is   used. 
Though  requiring  a  longer  outline,  it  is  more  quickly  and 
easily  written  than  if  the  n-hook  were  used  on  the  stroke 
ex.     Likewise  in  nonsense  the  n-hook  should  not  be  used. 

6.  The  rules  governing  the  use  of  an  n-hook  and  the 
strckc  en  in  words  where  n  is  the  last  consonant,  and  also 
the  use  of  the  n-hook  to  occasionally  represent  a  medial  n 
in  a  syllable   following  the  stroke  modified  by  an  n-hook 
are  the  same  for  curved  letters  as  those  given  in  the  pre- 


SHORTHAND  117 

ceding  lesson  for  the  use  of  the  n-hook  on  straight  letters 
except  that  an  n-hook  cannot  be  indicated  on  the  curved 
strokes,  as  is  done  on  the  straight  letters,  by  putting  the 
s-circle  on  the  n-hook  side. 

EXERCISE  31. 

7.  List  Words.     (60  —  i  :2O.) 

i  Famine,  2.  vain,  3  main,  4  fine,  5  ransom,  6  dining, 
7  renown,  8  venom,  9  sunshine,  10  vanish,  n  finish,  12  van, 
13  bean,  14  noun,  15  moon,  16  thinness,  17  leaner,  18  nun- 
nery, 19  fencing,  20  lance,  2.1  earn,  22  finance,  23  lining, 
24  ravine,  25  earthen,  26  machine,  27  Michigan,  28  Monday, 
29  workman,  30  raven,  31  bench,  32  French,  33  almanac, 
34  infancy,  35  noon,  36  examine,  37  violin,  38  Nathan, 
39  dominion,  40  throne,  41  muslin,  42  lonesome,  43  Spanish, 
44  specimen,  45  malign,  46  minute,  47  leaven,  48  lunch, 
49  learn,  50  permanence,  51  Roman,  52  Benjamin,  53  dis- 
pense, 54  dense,  55  resistance,  56  leans,  57  omen,  58  cle 
ency,  59  changes,  60  finances.  •  jf 

8.  Wordsigns. 


Washington       Western          within         who-have        union        upon-his       try-to- 
heathen       whoever  have 


C     f 


set-off      set-          said-          some-     spoken  such-     religion      rather-      responsible 
forth       to-have     one  a-one  than 


J—4 


provi-    providence       punish-ed          opinion          organize          over-and-         our-own 
dential  punishment  over-again 

happen 


4 

17 


_ 

larger-than       human       human-life       heaven       every-one       cross-examine 


ii8  PITMANIC 

g.     Phrases.     (57 — i  :oo.) 

i  A-heathen,  2  within-hearing,  3  encroach-upon-his, 
4  whatever-came,  5  will-try-to-have,  6  twelve-cases,  7  in- 
his-religion,  8  rather-than-say-so,  9  a-responsible-man,25 
10  he-will-never-punish,  n  in-his-own-opinion,  12  they-may- 
organize,  13  they-may-come-back,  14  larger-than-ever, 
15  he-will-cross-examine,  16  he-was-human,50  17  every-one- 
saw-him,  18  in-heaven-above.57 

10.  Letter.     (160 — 2:40.) 

"When-you  write  to~-your  cousin  in  Kansas  be-sure  to- 
tell-him  to-take  up  the-study  of-this  very-brief  way  of-tak- 
ing2r>  down  what  a-person  says.  I-know  that-he-would  en- 
joy the-study  and-if-he  learns  the-subject  very  thoroughly 
it-will-be  possible50  for-him  to-eanx  fully  twice  as-much-as 
he-is  receiving  as  a-book -keeper  where  he-is-now  at- work. 
Young-people  who  know75  how  to-keep  books  and-also  know 
how  to-run  a-writing  machine  and-do  amanuensis  work  are 
always  sure  of-plenty  to-do  at100  a-large  salary.  It-will 
please-me  to  learn  that-it-is  possible  for-you  to  persuade 
him  to-take  up  the-study  of-this125  new  subject.  If-he  be- 
comes a-pupil  at-our  school  we-will  do-everything  possible 
to  assist  him  to-make  a-success  of-the-study.150  I-believe  he- 
will  have-no-difficulty  in-doing  so."160 

11.  Letter.     (130 — 2:10.) 

Akron,  Ohio,  July  7,  1904. 
Mr.  John  Robinson, 

Jackson,  Michigan. 
My-Uear-Sir  :— 

Since-thinking  over  what  you  said  to-me  Tuesday25  I- 
wrote  to-my  cousin  James  in  Salina,  Kansas,  giving-him 
the-substance  of-your  remarks.  I-am  very-sure  it-will  im- 
press-him  favorably.50  As-soon-as  he-has-had  sufficient 
time  to-think  the-subject  over  you- will  very-likely  hear- 


SHORTHAND  119 

from-him  as-he-is  exceedingly  anxious75  to-make  some 
change  looking  to  an-increase  in  salary.  He  believes  that- 
he-is  capable  of-earning  more  and-is  willing  to-do  what- 
ever100 may-be  necessary  to-prepare  for  a-place  that-will 
bring-him  a-larger  income.  T-am  very-sure  you-will  hear- 
from-him  soon.1-1"' 

Very  sincerely-yours, 

James  Webb.130 
12.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXXII. 

THI5   INITIAL    N-HOOK. 

i.  When  n  is  the  first  consonant  in  a  word  and  it  is 
immediately  followed  by  one  of  the  triple  consonants,  iss- 
ern  or  iss-lay  and  in  a  few  other  instances,  as  iss-fer,  in 
insufferable,  the  stroke  en  does  not  form  a  good  angle  or 
is  not  easily  joined  to  what  follows.  In  such  cases,  what  is 
called  the  initial  n-hook  is  made  use  of.  This  is  a  small 
initial  hook,  about  half  the  size  of  the  s-circle,  made  just 
before  and  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  stroke  from  the 


120  PITMANIC 

s-circle  which  it  always  precedes.  The  words  in  which  it 
is  necessary  to  apply  this  principle  are  not  very  numerous. 
The  student  should,  however,  thoroughly  familiarize  him- 
self with  this  hook  in  order  that  he  may  write  it  without 
hesitation  in  the  few  instances  in  which  it  is  necessary  to 
use  it.  The  use  of  the  initial-n-hook  is  shown  in  the  fol- 
lowin' words  : 


\ 


Insoluble  insole  insuperable      nasturtium    unseemly         inscribe 

2.  When   a   word  begins   with   an  initial-n-hook,   it   is 
never  phrased  with  a  preceding  word. 

EXERCISE  32.       ., 

3.  List  Words.     (31.;  —  150.) 

i  Enslave,  2  insoluble,  3  inscribe,  4  enslaving,  5  nastur- 
tium, 6  insuperable,  7  inscribing,  8  unscrupulous,  9  insole, 
10  insufferable,  IT  enslaver,  12  unscrupulousness,  13  un- 
screw, 14  unseal,  15  unsealing,  16  unscrupulously,  17  insol- 
ing,  18  unscrewing,  19  unsalable,  20  unsparing,  21  unspar- 
ingly, 22  insoles,  23  insolvency,  24  unsolvable,  25  insomnia, 
26  insolence,  27  insolidity,  28  enslavable,  29  unseemly,  30  un- 
seemliness, 31  ensilage. 

4.  Wordsigns. 


J    ^    \  I 


/L 


in-his-  in-some  in-his-          suspicion     such-          such-         in-eeeminj: 

usual  experience  would         ought- 

have  to-have 


I 


in-ae-  which-      which-       which-          such-  such- 

many  are-to        were-to-     would-          are-to-  were-tc 

have          have  have  have  have 


SHORTHAND  121 

5.  Phrases.     (61 — i  :oo.) 

i  In-his-usual-way,  2  in-his-usual-manner,  3  in-some- 
manner,  4  in-some-way,  5  in-some-cases,  6  such-would-have- 
come,  7  unseal-it,  8  enslave-them25  9  in-some-difficulty, 
10  unseemly-doings,  n  inscribe-his-name,  12  unseal-many- 
cases,  13  unsealing-the-stock,  14  insolence-of-the-man, 
15  unseemly-appearance,  16  unscrew-the-case,  17  insoluble- 
substance,50  18  ensilage-cases,  19  inscribing-a-riame,  20  en- 
slave-many-people,  21  insoles-may-come.61 

6.  Letter.     (155 — 2:30.) 

Kalamazoo,  Mich.,  June  21,  1904. 
Messrs.  Thompson  Bros., 

Lincoln,  Neb. 
Sirs : — 

We-take  the-liberty  to-write-you  in-reference-to25  J.  K. 
Southworth,  of  Lincoln.  He-asks  us  to  ship  him  a-ton  of- 
our  twine  on  thirty  days'-time.  It-is  impossible  for  us50  to 
learn  of-his  financial  rating  from  any-of  the-commercial 
firms  with-which  we-have  dealings.  We  therefore  write  to- 
you.  We  would  like70  very-much  to-sell  this-quantity  of- 
stock  to  Mr.  Southworth,  but  feel  that-we  should-have  some- 
assurance  that-he-is  able  and-would100  be-likely  to  pay-for- 
same  as-soon-as  it  becomes  due.  Your  early  reply,  with 
the-knowledge  you  surely  have  of-his  rating,  will125  help 
us  out-of  our-difficulty.  We-thank-you  in-advance  for  the- 
favor  we-are  sure  to-receive  from-you.  We-are, 

Yours-truly,150 

J.  M.  Belden  &  Son.155 

7.  Letter.     (136 — 2:15.) 

Lincoln,  Neb.,  June  24,  1904. 
William  Belden  &  Son, 

Kalamazoo,  Mich. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

Replying  to-your  favor  of  June  2i.2r>     Will  say  that-we 


122  PITMANIC 

know  Mr.  J.  K.  South  worth  very  well.  We-are  doing-busi- 
ness with-him  every  few-days  so-that  we  know  something50 
of-his-financial  ability.  We-believe  you-will  run  no  risk 
whatever  in-shipping  Mr.  Southworth  the-stock  of  twine 
which  he  desires,  and-on75  the-terms  he-proposes.  It-is-our 
opinion  that-when  the-thirty  days  are  up  you-will  have-the- 
cash  for-your  stock.  It-is100  a-pleasure  for  us  to-do-you 
this  favor  for-we  know  Mr.  Southworth  is  worthy  of  the- 
high  financial  rating  which  we-are  sure125  you-will  now 

give-him.    We-are, 

Sincerely-yours, 

Thompson  Bros.130 
8.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXXIII. 

THE  SHUN-HOOK. 

i.     The   syllables    represented   by   tion,    sion,   cion   and 
sometimes  cian,  usually  coming  at  the  end  of  words  and 


SHORTHAND  123 

always  at  the  end  of  syllables,  are  represented  by  a  large 
final  hook  called  the  shun-hook.  This  hook  is  used  on  both 
straight  and  curved  letters.  Like  all  hooks  with  the  curved 
letters  it  is  written  within  the  curve.  With  the  straight 
letters  it  is  written  on  the  s-circle  side.  The  shun-hook 
may  be  used  when  either  a  long  or  short  vowel,  diphthong 
or  coalescent  comes  between  the  hook  and  the  preceding 
stroke.  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  confuse  it 
with  the  f  or  n-hook.  When  the  s-circle  follows  the  shun- 
hook  it  should  be  written  within  the  hook.  The  use  of 
the  shun-hook  is  shown  as  follows : 

As 


petition      revisions      exceptional     violation     impression     education     lotion 

EXERCISE  33. 

Using  the  shun-hook  write  : 
2.     List  Words.     (60 — 1 125.) 

i  Nation,  2  relation,  3  animation,  4  portion,  5  dissension, 
6  emigration,  7  invocation,  8  intimation,  9  exception,  10  oc- 
cupation, ii  allusion,  12  probation,  13  option,  14  caution, 
15  logician,  16  diction,  17  reaction,  18  station,  19  sedition, 
20  section,  21  fiction,  22  legation,  23  passionate,  24  rational, 
25  dictionary,  26  sectional,  27  occupations,  28  locations, 
29  implications,  30  adoption,  31  dissolution,  32  submission, 
33  mission,  34  ammunition,  35  creation,  36  dimension, 
37  restoration,  38  division,  39  evolution,  40  progression, 
41  inflammation,  42  prevention,  43  isolation,  44  nutrition, 
45  assertion,  46  attention,  47  plantation,  48  definition,  49  in- 
duction, 50  elevation,  51  execution,  52  intimation,  53  repu- 
tation, 54  omission,  55  edition,  56  digression,  57  invasion, 
58  emulation,  59  persecution,  60  erection. 


124  PITMANIC 

3.     Wordsigns. 


connection       confession         cross-  dissatis-       destruction    deliberation 

examination     faction 


examination    explanation    expression    generation    consideration    in-his- 

description 


V  ^       A 


invention  information  operation  oppression  objec-    perfec-    represen-    reduc- 

tion       lion          tation          tion 


\ 

u 


reformation    revela-    revolution    signifi-     in-his-        determination    inclination 
tion  cation     expression 

4.  Phrases.     (59 — i  :oo.) 

i  In-this-connection,  2  hear-his-motion,  3  a-long-cross- 
examination,  4  in-his-generation,  5  a-terrible-revelation, 
6  in-his-inclination,  7  secure-his-invention,  8  make-some-re- 
duction,23  9  will-make-objection,  10  the-wrong-dimension, 
ii  no-signification,  12  make-no-admission,  13  take-no-action, 
14  on-the-occasion,  15  give-you-attention,  16  an-elevation, 
17  a-poor-representation,50  18  in-your-mission,  19  in-that- 
section,  20  a-new-dictionary/'9 

5.  Letter.     (130 — 2:10.) 

Franklin,  Kansas,  Feb.  n,  1904. 
Ferry  &  Co., 

Wayne,  Michigan. 
Sirs : — 

Your  Mr.  Nichols  was-in-this  city  a-week  ago25  and-I- 
gave-him  notice  that  I-must-have  a-much-larger  supply  of- 


SHORTHAND  125 

seed  than  I-had  a-year-ago.  T-spoke  to-him50  in-reference- 
to  the-extras  to  ship  with  the-ustial  supply.  I-now  see  that- 
it-\vill-be  necessary  for-me  to  increase  the-supply75  very 
largely,  therefore  please  to-delay  shipping  until-you  hear 
from  me  again  at  which  time  I-will  enumerate  all  the-sup- 
plies  I-can  use100  this-year.  I-hope  this-will  reach-you  in- 
plenty  of-time,  that-is,  before-you  ship  the-seed  for-which- 
you  already  have  instructions.1" 

Yours-very-truly, 

Thomas  Kane.130 

6.  Letter.     (75—1:15.) 

Des  Moines,  Iowa,  March  i,  1904. 
William  Ball, 

Delhi  Mills,  Michigan. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

Will-you  please  to-mail  to  my  address25  at-once  whatever 
circulars  you-may  have  giving  a-description  of-your  fine 
wool  sheep.  I-am  expecting  to  purchase  a-large  number 
of-that50  variety  of  sheep  this  spring.  If-your  sheep  are 
such  and-the-price  reasonably  low,  you-will  hear-from-me 
again  soon.  Yours, 

Samuel  Ellsworth.75 

7.  Translation. 


PITMANIC 


LESSON  XXXIV. 

THE  S-SHUN-HOOK. 

i.  When  the  syllable  represented  by  the  shun-hook  is 
preceded  by  the  sound  of  s  or  z,  it  would  be  necessary  to 
use  the  stroke  es  or  ze,  if  the  usual  form  of  the  shun-hook 
were  used.  By  making  use  of  what  is  called  the  s-shun- 
hook  it  is  possible  to  use  the  circle  iss  for  s  or  z  and  also 
use  a  hook  to  represent  the  syllables  tion,  cion,  sion,  etc. 
This  hook  is  formed,  after  writing  the  s-circle,  by  crossing 
the  stroke  to  which  the  s-circle  is  joined  and  forming  a 
small  hook  half  the  size  of  the  s-circle  on  the  opposite  side. 
When  an  s  or  z  follows  the  s-shun-hook  it  is  represented 
by  an  s-circle  written  within  this  hook.  This  hook  is  used 
only  for  a  final  shun  in  a  word  and  is  never  joined  to  a 
following  character  except  an  s-circle,  as  shown  in  the  word 
vexations,  except  in  a  few  words  like  sensational  and 
suppositional.  The  s-shun-hook  may  be  written  on  the 
s-circle  side  when  the  circle  preceding  is  written  on  the 
n-hook  side  of  straight  letters  to  indicate  an  n. 

The  use  of  the  s-shun-hook  is  illustrated  in  the  following 
words : 

~A--      V-     _.i*_     _J_       L  c i_ 


decision          procession        physician          transition  vexations          cessation 

EXERCISE  34. 
2.     List  Words.     (30 — -50.) 

i  Position,  2  proposition,  3  decision,  4  possession,  5  in- 
cision, 6  pulsation,  7  exposition,  8  deposition,  9  vexation, 
10  succession,  n  acquisition,  12  cessation,  13  imposition, 
14  supposition,  15  disposition,  16  procession,  17  positions, 


SHORTHAND  127 

18  transitions,  19  expositions,  20  sensation,  21  propositions, 
22  decisions,  23  physicians,  24  pulsations,  25  depositions, 
26  acquisitions,   27  sensations,   28  causation,  29  musician, 
30  suppositions. 
3.     Wordsigns. 

/ 


circumstances-  in-response-to     just-what          just-been  just-come 

of-the-case 

4.  Phrases.     (57—  rss.) 

i  In-his-position,  2  they-sanction,  3  what-does-it-signify, 
4  a-new-action,  5  a- wrong-decision,  6  cause-vexation, 
7  many-vexations,  8  such-a-supposition,  9  saw-many-expo- 
sitions,25 10  the-new-physician.  n  like-his-disposition,  12  a- 
miserable-sensation,  13  he-was-a-musician,  14  on-that-sup- 
position,  15  gave-many-decisions,  16  will-take-his-position, 
17  several-positions,50  18  it-was-an-imposition,  19  a-peculiar- 
decision.57 

5.  Letter.     (163—2:35.) 

"When  the-pupil  has  come  to-this  lesson  he  or  she  should- 
feel  that-this  subject  is  really  very-much  easier  than  he-had 
expected25  when-he-began.  All-that-is  really  necessary  for 
any-boy  or  girl  with  the-average  capacity  is-a-determination 
to-keep  at  the-study50  and-he-will  succeed  in-due  time.  Too- 
many  beginners  seem  to-overlook  the-special-importance 
of  learning  every  principle  thoroughly.  Especially  is-this 
true75  in-the-very  beginning  of  the-study  of-this  important 
subject.  It-is  too  often  the-case  that  the-pupil  desires  to- 
go  ahead  before100  he-has  given  nearly  enough  time  to  and- 
careful  study  of  the-early  lessons  of-this-book.  Everything 
which  follows  these  early  lessons  embodies,125  in-some-way 
or-other,  the-use  of  the-simple  characters  which-are-given 
in  the-early  lessons  of  the-book.  If-you  study  them150  very 


128  PITMANIC 

thoroughly  you-will  in-time  derive  much  advantage   from 
having  done-so."103 
6.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXXV. 

REVIEW. 
i.     QUESTIONS: 

(1)  On  which  curved  letters  is  the  n-hook  used? 

(2)  Where  is  the  s-circle  written  when  it  follows  an 
n-hook  upon  a  curved  letter? 

(3)  What  is  the  initial-n-hook? 

(4)  When  should  this  hook  be  used? 

(5)  Before  what  combinations  of  consonants  is  this 
hook  most  frequently  used  ? 

(6)  Is  this  hook  of  frequent  use? 

•I  (7)  What  final  syllables  are  represented  by  a  large 
final  hook  within  curves  and  on  the  s-circle  side  of  straight 
strokes  ?  r 

(8)     May  any  vowel  occur  between  a  stroke  and  a 
following  shim-hook? 


SHORTHAND  129 

(9)  Where  is  the  s-circle  written  when  it  follows  the 
shun-hook? 

( 10)  When  an  s-circle  immediately  precedes  a  sylla- 
ble represented  by  a  shun-hook,  how  is  this  hook  written? 

( 1 1 )  When   an   s   follows   a   syllable   represented   by 
the  s-shun-hook,  how  is  the  s  written  ? 

EXERCISE  35. 

2.  List  Words.     (47 — 1:10.) 

Ransom  sunshine  van  nunnery  earthen  machine  Michigan 
workman  raven  French  infancy  enslave  inscribe  enslaver 
unscrupulous  unseal  inscribing  unsparing  insole  insolvency 
insomnia  enslavable  unseemliness  relation  occupation23  allu- 
sion reaction  legation  submission  restoration  elevation  di- 
gression erection  position  possession  vexation  succession 
cessation  supposition  transitions  expositions  physicians  pul- 
sations depositions  acquisitions  sensations  musician.47 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Washington,  Western,  within,  (heathen,)  who-have, 
(whoever,)  union,  upon-his,  try-to-have,  set-off,  set-forth, 
said-to-have,  some-one,  spoken,  such-a-one,  religion,  rather- 
than,  responsible,  providential,  providence,  punish,  (pun- 
ished, punishment,  happen,)  opinion,  organize,  over-and- 
over-again,  our-own,  larger-than,  human,  human-life, 
heaven,  every-one,  cross-examine,  in-his-usual,  in-some,  in- 
his-experience,  suspicion,  such-would-have,  such-ought-to- 
have,  in-seeming,  in-as-many,  which-are-to-have,  which- 
were-to-have,  which-would-have,  such-are-to-have,  such- 
\vere-to-have,  connection,  confession,  cross-examination, 
dissatisfaction,  destruction,  deliberation,  examination, 
explanation,  expression,  generation,  consideration, 
in-his-description,  invention,  information,  operation, 
oppression,  objection,  perfection,  representation,  reduction, 


130  PITMANIC 

reformation,  revelation,  revolution,  signification,  in-his-ex- 
prcssion,  determination,  inclination,  circumstances-of-the- 
case,  in«-response-to,  just- what,  just-been,  just-come. 

4.  Phrases.     (126 — 2:00.) 

Encroach-upon-his  rather-than-say-s@  he-will-never-pun- 
ish  in-his-own-opinion  they-may-come-back  he-was-human 
in-heaven-above25  in-his-usual-way  in-some-manner  in-some- 
way  enslave-them  unsealing-the-stock  unseemly-appearance 
insolence-of-the-man  insoluble-substance  ensilage-cases50 
inscribing-a-name  insoles-may-come  in-connection  a-long- 
cross-examination  will-make-objection  .  wrong-dimension 
no-signification  make-no-admission  take-no-action75  on-the- 
occasion  give-you-attention  an-elevation  a-poor-representa- 
tion  in-your-mission  in-that-section  a-new-dictionary  in-his- 
position  they-sanction100  what-does-it-signify  many- vexa- 
tions such-a-supposition  a-miserable-sensation  he-was-a-mu- 
sician  gave-many-decisions  will-take-a-position  a-peculiar- 
decision.126 

5.  Letter.     (160 — 2:40.) 

"When-you  write  to-your  cousin  in  Kansas  be-sure  to- 
tell-him  to-take  up  the-study  of-this  very-brief  way  of-tak- 
ing25  down  what  a-person  says.  I-know  that-he-would  en- 
joy the-study  and-if-he  learns  the-subject  very  thoroughly 
it-will-be  possible50  for-him  to-earn  fully  twice  as-much-as 
he-is  receiving  as  a-book-keeper  where  he-is-now  at-work. 
Young-people  who  know75  how  to-keep  books  and-also  know 
how  to-run  a-writing  machine  and-do  amanuensis  work 
are  always  sure  of-plenty  to-do  at100  a-large  salary.  It-will 
please-me  to  learn  that-it-is  possible  for-you  to  persuade  him 
to-take  up  the-study  of-this125  new  subject.  If-he  becomes 
a-pupil  at-our  school  we-will  do-everything  possible  to  as- 
sist him  to-make  a-success  of-the-study.150  I-believe  he- 
will  have-no-difficulty  in-doing  so."100 


SHORTHAND  131 

6.  Letter.     (136 — 2:15.) 

Lincoln,  Neb.,  June  24,  1904. 
William  Belden  &  Son, 

Kalamazoo,  Mich. 
Dear-Sirs : — 

Replying  to-your  favor  of  June  2i.25  Will  say  that- we 
know  Mr.  J.  K.  Seuthworth  very  well.  We-are  doing-busi- 
ness with-him  every  few-days  so-that  we  know  something""'" 
of-his-financial  ability".  We-believe  you-will  run  no  risk 
whatever  in-shipping  Mr.  Southworth  the-stock  of  twine 
which  he  desires,  and-on75  the-terms  he-proposes.  It-is-our 
opinion  that-when  the-thirty  days  are  up  you-will  have-the- 
cash  for-your  stock.  It-is100  a-pleasure  for  us  to-do-you 
this  favor  for-we  know  Mr.' Southworth  is  worthy  of  the- 
high  financial  rating  which  we-are  sure125  you-will  now 
give-him.  We-are, 

Sincerely-yours, 

Thompson  Bros.136 

7.  Letter.     (75—1:15.) 

Des  Moines,  Iowa,  March  i,  1904. 
William  Ball, 

Delhi  Mills,  Michigan. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

Will-you  please  to-mail  to  my  address25  at-once  whatever 
circulars  you-may  have  giving  a-description  of-your  fine 
wool  sheep.  I-am  expecting  to  purchase  a-large  number 
of-that50  variety  of  sheep  this  spring.  If-your  sheep  are 
such  and-the-price  reasonably  low,  you-will  hear-from-me 
again  soon.  Yours, 

Samuel  Ellsworth.75 

8.  Letter.     (163—2:35.) 

"When  the-pupil  has  come  to-this  lesson  he  or  she  should- 
fecl  that-this  subject  is  really  very-much  easier  than  he-had. 


132  PITMANIC 

expected25  when-he-began.  All-that-is  really  necessary  for 
any-boy  or  girl  with  the-average  capacity  is-a-cletermination 
to-keep  at  the-study50  and-he-will  succeed  in-due  time.  Too- 
many  beginners  seem  to-overlook  the-special-importance 
of  learning  every  principle  thoroughly.  Especially  is-this 
true73  in-the-very  beginning  of  the-study  of-this  important 
subject.  It-is  too  often  the-case  that  the-pupil  desires  to- 
go  ahead  before100  he-has  given  nearly  enough  time  to  and- 
careful  study  of  the-early  lessons  of-this-book.  Everything 
which  follows  these  early  lessons  embodies,125  in-some-way 
or-other,  the-use  of  the-simple  characters  which-are-given 
in  the-early  lessons  of  the-book.  If-you  study  them150  very 
thoroughly  you-will  in-time  derive  much  advantage  from 
having  done-so."183 


LESSON  XXXVI. 

THF,    TIV-HOOK. 

1.  A  large  final  hook  called  the  tiv-hook,   written  on 
the  n-hook  side  of  straight  letters,  represents  the  frequently 
occurring  combination  tv,  as  in  active,  captive,  talkative. 
A  long  or  short  vowel  or  diphthong  may  intervene  between 
the  tiv-hook  and  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined. 

2.  This  hook  is,  as  a  rule,  used  only  when  the  sounds 
of  the  letters  tv  are  in  the  same  syllable.     It  is,  however, 
sometimes  allowable  to  use  the  tiv-hook  for  a  t  in  a  syllable 
preceding  the  one  in  which  the  v  occurs.     This  is  permissi- 
ble where  the  two  syllables  closely   mingle,   as   in  active, 
divided    thus,    act-ive,    but    written    kay-tiv.     When    an    s 
follows  the  tiv-hook,  it  is  written  within  the  hook,  as  in 
operatives. 


SHORTHAND  133 

3.  Care  should  be  exercised  to  make  this  hook  fully 
as  large  as  the  shun-hook  in  order  to  avoid  its  being  con- 
fused with  the  n-hook. 

The  use  of  the  tiv-hook  is  shown  in  the  following  words: 


_ 

effective  active  captive  talkative  operatives 

EXERCISE  36. 

4.  List  Words.     (30  —  145.  ) 
Using  the  tiv-hook  write  : 

i  Dative,  2  detective,  3  active,  4  talkative,  5  actively, 
6  operative,  7  adjective,  8  receptive,  9  receptively,  10  cap- 
tivity, IT  expletive,  12  corrective,  13-  ineffective,  14  fugi* 
tive,  15  indicative,  16  respectively,  17  creative,  18  elective, 
19  executive,  20  imitative,  21  negative,  22  illustrative, 
23  instructive,  24  negatives,  25  operatives,  26  prerogative, 
27  curative,  28  protective,  29  detectives,  30  deceptive. 

5.  Wordsigns. 


subjective      descriptive      connective  collective  reflective         figurative 

collectively       reflectively     figuratively 


\ 

legislative  consecutive  inductive  objective  herein 

consecutively         inductively        objectively 

6.     Phrases.     (50 — :45.) 

i  He-was-subjective,  2  a-descriptive-case,  3  collective-as- 
sembly, 4  was-reflective,  5  spoke-figuratively,  6  legislative- 
affairs,  7  a-consecutive-case,  8  reason-is-inductive,  9  was- 
the-dative,  10  such-talkativeness,25  n  a-new-adjective, 
12  it-is-indicative,  13  creative-power,  14  executive-days, 


134  PITMANIC 

15    elective-officers,     16    he-is-elective,     17    very-imitative, 
18  in-his-active-way,  19  he-was-the-operative.50 

7.     Letter.     (94 — i  :so.) 

Dayton,  Ohio,  May  7,  1904. 
John  Loomis, 

Milan,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir  :— 

On  Friday  I-delivered  to  the-express  company  six-cases25 
of  paper.  These-should  have-been  in  Milan  on  Saturday. 
I-am-sure  there  is  something  wrong.  The-delay  is  likely 
due  to-carelessness  of50  the-express-men.  I-presume  it-will 
take  several-days  to-trace  the-package.  I-shall  have  the- 
company  trace-it  at-once.  Should-you78  fail  to-receive  the- 
stock  within  a-few  days,  be-sure  to-write  again. 

Very-truly-yours, 

Moore  Brothers.04 

S.     Letter.     (125 — 2:00.) 

Tecumseh,  Mich.,  May  n,  1904. 

New  Boston  Hotel, 

Boston,  Mass. 
Dear-Sirs :  — 

When-I-was  at-your  Ocean  Beach  House  near25  Boston 
two-weeks  ago  I-came  away  in-a-hurry  in-response-to  a- 
telegram  to-look  up  a-very-important-sale  at-this  place.50 
I-have-been  too  busy  to-write-you  before  this.  I-have-been 
fearful  that  you  would  begin  to-think  I-was  trying  to  es- 
cape75 my  bill  at-your  house.  I-hope  the-check  herein  will 
relieve  you  of  any-such  feeling,  if-you  have-been  harboring 
such  an-idea.100  I  rather  expect  to-be  with  you-again  in-a- 
few  months.  Please  to-acknowledge  receipt  of  the-check  I- 
enclose.  Truly-yours, 

Peter  Cooper.125 


SHORTHAND  135 

g.     Letter.     (125 — 2:00.) 

Chelsea,  Mich.,  April  12,  1904. 
Digby  Harness  Co., 

Chicago,  111. 
Sirs  :— 

Will-you  please-to  explain  why  I-fail  to-receive25  the-four 
sets  of-carriage  harness  and-the-set  of-heavy  farm  harness 
for-which  I-gave  you  my  check  in-person  when-in  Chicago50 
on  March  27?  You  said-that-you  would-require  but  two- 
days  to-havc  all  of-them  ready  and-that  you-would  ship 
same75  by-express.  It-has-now  been  more-than  two-weeks 
and-my  customers  are-in  a-hurry  for-them.  I- will  lose  all- 
five  sales100  unless  thc-harness  reach-here  within  a- very  few 
days.  Please  to-give  this-your  early  attention.  I-am, 

Very-truly-yours, 

Isaac  Blake, 

10.     Translation. 


~3-\ 


136  PITMANIC 


LESSON  XXXVII. 

THE  ST-LOOP. 

1.  The  consonant  sounds  of  st,  sd  and  zd  very  frequently 
occur  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  a  syllable  without  an  inter- 
vening sounded  vowel.     In  such  cases  the  two  are  generally 
represented  by  elongating  the  s-circle,  forming  what  is  call- 
ed the  st-loop.       It  is  the  same  width  as  the  s-circle  and 
about  one-half  the  length  of  the  stroke  to  which  it  is  joined. 
Sometimes,  though  rarely,  the  st-loop  is  used  to  represent 
an  s  or  z  at  the  end  of  one  syllable  and  a  t  or  d  at  the  begin- 
ning of  the  following  syllable,  as  in  gesticulation.     When 
used  on  straight  letters  the  st-loop  is  written  on  the  s-circle 
side,  except  in  cases  where  it  is  desired  to  indicate  the  n- 
hook  by  placing  the  loop  on  the  n-hook  side  of  straight  let- 
ters, as  in  against.     On  curved  letters  the  loop  is  written 
within  the  curve. 

2.  When  an  s  or  z  follows  the  loop  it  is  written  across 
the  stroke  at  the  end  of  the  st-loop,  as  in  rests. 

3.  The  st-loop  is  not  used  when  st,  sd  or  zd  occur  at 
the  end  of  the  first  or  of  a  medial  stroke  and  the  balance  of 
the  word  would  require  one  to  cross  the  stroke  to  which 
the  st-loop  is  attached,  and  make  a  following  stroke  on  the 
opposite  side.     For  example,  the  word  vestige  is  not  writ- 
ten ve-st-jay,  but  rather  ve-iss-te-jay.     The  reason  for  this 
is  that  in  rapid  writing  the  tendency  would  be  to  broaden 
the  st-loop  so  much,  if  thus  used,  that  it  would  be  mistaken 
for  a  sez-circle  and  thus  lead  to  confusion  in  reading.     This 
tendency  has  in  a  measure  been  overcome  by  shortening  the 
st-loop  into  an  s-circle  and  forming  Wordsigns  for  the  more 
commonly  occurring  words  where  the  st-loop  would  nat- 
urally come  and  would  be  followed  by  a  stroke  on  the  oppo- 


SHORTHAND  137 

site  side.  This  is  shown  in  such  Wordsigns  as  mostly, 
postoffice,  etc.  The  st-loop  is  not  used  when  the  t  or  d 
is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  has  a  sounded  vowel 
following  it,  as  in  tasty,  written  te-iss-te. 

The  use  of  the  st-loop  is  shown  by  the  following  words  : 


• 


->! 

7 


past      fast         rests      investing     star         razed      gesticula-    lasting       against 

tion 


EXERCISE  37. 


Using  the  st-loop  write  : 

4.  List  Words.     (58  —  1:15.) 

i  Best,  2  breast,  3  blast,  4  blasting,  5  cast,  6  crest,  7  dust, 
8  fast,  9  infest,  10  feasting,  n  chaste,  12  roast,  13  ghost, 
14  zest,  15  mist,  16  protest,  17  honest,  18  forced,  19  drug- 
gist, 20  forest,  21  justify,  22  investigation,  23  text,  24  vex- 
ed, 25  manifest,  26  chastised,  27  abused,  28  steel,  29  hosts, 
30  mists,  31  raised,  32  staff,  33  utmost,  34  majestic,  35  elas^- 
tic,  36  reposed,  37  danced,  38  advised,  39  professed,  40  des- 
tiny, 41  voiced,  42  pleased,  43  waste,  44  glazed,  45  accused, 
46  perused,  47  foist,  48  west,  49  mast,  50  against,  51  pro- 
posed, 52  bounced,  53  noised,  54  yeast,  55  rejoiced,  56  boast- 
ing, 57  incrust,  58  statistics. 

5.  Wordsigns. 


V^ 


we-must    six-or-    tempta-    stenography       one-of       one-of     first       next       next- 
seven      tion  stenographer     the-best   the-most  time 

stenographic 

6.     Phrases.     (62  —  i  :oo.) 

i  We-must-do,  2  take-one-or-two,  3  he-will-take-one-or- 
two,  4  two-or-three-cases,  5  six-or-seven-machines,  6  five-or- 
six-days,2r>  7  resist-the-temptation,  8  stenographic-work, 


138  PITMANIC 

9  they-receive-money,  10  one-of-the-best-cases,  n  took-one- 
of-the-most,  12  he-has- just-come,  13  the-next-time,50 14  must- 
expect-many-cases,  15  you-come-next,  16  he-was-accused, 
17  they-rejoiced.62 

7.  Letter.     (177 — 3:00.) 

Lansing,  Mich.,  May  n,  1900. 
Hon.  Wm.  McKinley, 

Executive  Mansion, 

Washington,  D.  C. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

I-am  in  receipt  of25  information  from  Hon.  J.  C.  Bur- 
roughs, member  of-the  U.-S.  senate  from  this  state,  to  the- 
effect  that  the-petition  in-favor  of  Thomas50  Burke,  as  rep- 
resentative at  Rome,  has  your  approval.  It-pleases  me  very- 
much  to  hear-this  for  I-know-that  Mr.  Burke  has  ample 
ability75  to  fulfil  the-cluties  of-such  an-office.  I-feel  pleased 
at  the-outcome  of-my  work  for  Mr.  Burke,  for,  as-you 
well  know,100I-was  the-first  one -to  propose  his  name  for  that- 
place.  I-was  very  well-aware  that  if-your  spare  time  would 
allow  you125  to-look-into  the-question  of  Mr.  Burke's  qualifi- 
cations for-the-place  you- would  have-no  objection  to  select- 
ing him  for  so-important  a-station.150  T-desire  to-assure-you 
that-he-will  do  honor  to  thVhigh-position  in-which  you  have 
placed  him.  I-am, 

Sincerely-yours, 

Wm.175  Alden  Smith.177 

8.  Letter.     (121 — 2:00.) 

Lexington,  Ky.,  Nov.  22,  1900. 
Col.  James  Otis, 

Nashville,  Tenn. 
My-Dear-Colonel  :— 

I-have  your  favor  of  the-tenth.  Your25  plan  to  push  vig- 
orously the-petition  in-favor  of  General  Ashton  for  the- 


SHORTHAND  139 

office  of  U.-S.  Marshal  for  the-next  term  has  my-approval.50 
The-general  deserves  the-honor  and-it-is-my  sincere  hope 
that  both-members  of  the-senate  from-your  state  will-do 
everything  possible  to75  induce  Mr.  McKinley  to-select  Gen. 
Ashton.  I-am  at-your  service  if-there  is  anything  I-can-do 
to-aid  you  in-his-behalf.100  Be-sure  to-write-me  if-you  see 
wherein  I-can  assist-you  in-any-manner-whatever. 

Sincerely-yours, 

Thomas  Eaton.121 
9.     Translation. 

r 


LESSON  XXXVIII. 

THE  StR-LOOP. 

i.  A  loop  the  same  length  as  the  st-loop,  but  fully  twice 
as  wide  at  the  center,  is  used  to  represent  the  consonants 
str  and  is  called  the  str-loop.  Usually  all  three  of  the 
sounds  represented  by  the  str-loop  occur  in  one  syllable, 
either  at  the  beginning  or  end.  However,  s  may  occur  at 
the  end  of  one  syllable  and  tr  at  the  beginning  of  the  next, 
as  in  register,  or  st  may  come  at  the  end  of  one  and  r  at 


140  PITMANIC 

the  beginning  of  the  next,  as  in  poster. 

2.  The   str-loop   is  used   on   both   straight   and   curved 
letters.     If  the  letters  str  are  the  last  consonants  in  a  word 
and  a  sounded  vowel  follows,  as  in  vestry,  the  str-loop  is 
not  used.     If  an  s  follows  the  str-loop  it  is  represented  by 
crossing  the  stroke  at  the  end  of  the  loop  and  writing  an 
s-circle  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  letter  from  the  str-loop, 
as  in  ministers,  shown  below.     If  one  of  the  endings  tion, 
sion,  or  cion  follows  the  str-loop,  it  is  represented  by  cross- 
ing the  stroke  at  the  end  of  the  str-loop  and  forming  the 
s-shun-hook,  as  in  demonstration,  shown  below. 

3.  The  str-loop  may  be  written  on  the  n-hook  side  of 
straight  letters  to  indicate  an  n  as  in  the  word  punster. 

4.  Some  teachers  advise  that  the  st-loop  and  the  str- 
loop  should  not  be  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  stroke,  as  in 
the  word  stale,  written  st-loop-lay,  or  in  strong,  written 
str-loop-ing.     It  is  claimed  that  it  is  awkward  and  retards 
one's  speed  to  so  use  these  loops.     We  cannot  agree '  with 
this  idea  and  recommend  the  use  of  these  loops  at  the  be- 
ginning as  well  as  at  the  end  of  consonant  strokes. 

5.  Care  should  be  taken  to  form  this  loop  fully  twice 
as  wide,  or  even  wider,  at  the  middle,  than  the  st-loop  so 
that  it  will  not  be  confused  with  that  loop. 

6.  The  str-loop,  like  the  st-loop,  is  not  used  if  str  are 
the  last  consonants  in  a  word  and  a  sounded  vowel  follows, 
as  in  pastry,  written  pe-iss-ter. 

The  use  of  the  str-loop  is  shown  in  the  following  words : 

\>        ^  ^-^  \  U^, 

boaster          plaster  ministers  punster    demonstration  strength 

EXERCISE  38. 
Using  the  str-loop  write  the  following  words: 


SHORTHAND  141 

7.  List  Words.     (45  —  i  :oo.) 

i  Master,  2  faster,  3  luster,  4  roaster,  5  bluster,  6  cluster, 
7  spinster,  8  poster,  9  bolster,  10  dexter,  n  rooster,  12  sinis- 
ter. 13  cluster,  14  posters,  15  register.  16  strangle,  17  strong, 
1  8  administer,  19  strange,  20  stranger,  21  illustration,  22  ob- 
struction, 23  songster,  24  tester,  25  gamester,  26  fosters, 
27  administers.  28  casters,  29  f  casters,  30  jester,  31  pastor, 
32  blister,  33  fester,  34  coaster,  35  dusters,  36  clusters, 
37  strung,  38  strings,  39  demonstration,  40  disaster,  41  dis- 
asters, 42  coasters,  43  toaster,  44  Brewster,  45  twister. 

8.  Wordsigns. 


1   j 


at-         at-the-      Baptist     by-the-      by-way-of-      constitution-of-      circumstance 
first        first  first  illustration.    the-United-  circumstances 

States 


£_  V^ 


denomina-      deliver-  extra-  for-the-        from-first-       mystery      Northwest 

tional  ance  ordinary       first-time    to-last 

g.     Phrases.     (61 — i  :oo.) 

i  A-ne\v -tester,  2  a-new-duster,  3  purchase-toasters,  4  he- 
\vas-pastor,  5  I-broke-the-caster,  6  several-disasters,  7  pick-a- 
cluster,  8  i:sc-thc-(!r.£ter,  9  your-plaster,-r>  10  causc-a-blistcr, 
ii  he- will-administer,  12  he-was-a-gamester,  13  examine- 
the-register,  14  a-large-rooster,  15  he-was-master,  16  will- 
add-luster,  17  make-a-bluster,™  18  a-large-poster,  19  the- 
obstruction,  20  has-much-luster,  21  was-a- jester.01 

10.     Letter.     (189 — 3:05.) 

Ann  Arbor,  Mich.,  June  i,  1904. 
Mr.  Jerome  Freeman, 

Mason,  Michigan. 
My-Dear-Sir:— 

I-hear  that-you-expect  soon  to-employ-5  one-or-two  more 


142  PITMANIC  • 

stenographers  in-your  factory.  If-I-am  correct  in-this,  I- 
clesirc  to-make  application  for  a-position  with-your  com- 
pany.50 I-have  taken  a-course  at  the-school  here  and-can- 
now  take  dictation  at  a-rate  which-would  enable-me  to-do 
your  work75  in-a-manner  satisfactory  to-you.  I-am  willing 
to  begin  at  a-low  rate  and-continue  at  a-small  salary  until 
I-shall  prove100  to-you  that-my  services  are  worth  more. 
I-can  come  at  any-time.  I-enclose  a-number  of-testimonials 
and-can  furnish  as-many125  more  as-you-may  desire  as-to- 
character  and-ability  as-an-amanuensis.  Ail-that  I-wish  to- 
begin  with  is-a-chance  to  show150  what  I-can-do  and-what 
I-am  worth  to  an-employer.  I-hope  that-you  may  have  a- 
place  for-me  in  a-very175  few-days.  I-shall  await  your 
reply  with-much  anxiety. 

Sincerely-yours, 

Thomas  Worden.189 

ii.     Letter.     (188 — 3:05.) 

Homer,  Mich.,  April  22,  1904. 
William  Dickerson, 

Dayton,  Ohio. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

This  morning  I-noticed  your  advertisement  in-the  Toledo25 
Bee  stating  that-you  desire  to-employ  a-traveling  man  for- 
this  section  of  Michigan.  I-write  for-more  information  on 
the-subject.  I-desire50  such  a-position  and-am  sure  that-my 
experience  has-been  such  that  I-can  give  you  perfect  satis- 
faction in  case  the-work  is-such75  that  I-can  manage  it.  I- 
judge  from  trie-brief  mention  in  the-advertisement  that-you 
desire  some  one  to  take  general  charge  of-your100  agencies 
in-this  vicinity.  It-is  because  I-have  ability  to-do  just  this- 
class  of-work  that  I-write  you  to-make  application  for125  the- 
job.  I-shall  be-pleased  to  answer  any-questions  you-may 


SHORTHAND  143 

wish  to  ask  or  to  furnish  any  references  you  desire.  I-am 
sure150  that  if-you  will-only  give-me  a-trial  you-will  be  well- 
pleased  with  the-manner  in-which  I-shall  do  my-work. 
Please175  to-reply  at  an-early  day  and-oblige. 

Very-truly-yours, 

Linus  Galpin.188 
12.     Translation. 


LESSON  XXXIX. 

DOUBLE  LENGTH  LETTERS. 

1.  Any  curved  letter  may  be  writen  double  length  for 
the  purpose  of  indicating  certain  following  sounds. 

(1)  Emp,    written    double    length,    adds    an    r,    as    in 
damper. 

(2)  Ing  lengthened  adds  kr  or  gr,  as  in  anchor  or 
anger. 

(3)  Any  other  curved  letter  written  double  length  adds 
either  tr,  dr  or  thr. 

2.  These  added  letters  may  be  in  the  same  syllable  with 
the  stroke  that  is  lengthened  or  in  a  following  syllable. 


144  PITMANIC 

3.  It  is  advisable  for  the  beginner  to  write  lengthened 
letters  a  little  more  than  double  the  usual  length  so  as  to 
avoid  all  danger  of  confusing  them  with  medium  length 
letters. 

4.  It  is  not  allowable  to  use  the  lengthened  stroke  when 
the  letters  indicated  by  lengthening  are  the  last  consonants 
in  the  word  and  a  sounded  vowel  follows,  as  in  the  word 
angry,  which  should  be  written  ing-ger.     The  application 
of  the  double  length  letters  is  shown  in  the  following  words : 


damper       leather       anchor          further       another       flutter       order          murder 

5.  Any   curved   letter   may   be   made   double   length   to 
indicate  a  following  there,  their,  or  other. 

EXERCISE  39. 

Applying  the  double  length  principle,  write  the  following 
words : 

6.  List  Words.     (60 — 1:15.) 

i  Lumber,  2  thunder,  3  blunder,  4  anger,  5  tamper,  6  cyl- 
inder, 7  banker,  8  hunger,  9  surrender,  10  legislator,  n  an- 
other, 12  literal,  13  re-enter,  14  murder,  15  reporter,  16  slan- 
der, 17  slumber,  18  encumber,  19  finger,  20  maternal,  21  ec- 
centric, 22  diameter,  23  render,  24  wonder,  25  central,  26  en- 
tirely, 27  yonder,  28  thermometer,  29  Anderson,  30  scamper, 
31  eastern,  32  stronger,  33  swifter,  34  swelter,  35  hanker, 
36  timbers,  37  letter,  38  tender,  39  sender,  40  lender,  41  Al- 
exander, 42  promoter,  43  smother,  44  neither,  45  calendar, 
46  flinders,  47  welter,  48  ladder,  49  smatter,  50  meter, 
51  motor,  52  feather,  53  hinder,  54  tinker,  55  cimeter, 
56  letters,  57  amber,  58  chamber,  59  linger,  60  clinker. 


SHORTHAND  145 

7.     Wordsigns. 

/r  J7  (  y  ^  g *> 

_z -\7~ 

later-than         another-one        of-their         no-other         some-other        the-other 


the-other-one       longer-than          any-other         some-other-one 

8.  Phrases.     (59 — i  :oo.) 

i  Was-later-than,  2  he-was-later-than,  3  have-another- 
one,  4  it-is-longer-than,  5  there-was-no-other,  6  take-anoth- 
er-one,  7  all-of-their-money,25  8  take-some-other,  9  you-ren- 
der,  10  you-surrender-it,  n  never-surrender-it,  12  see-him- 
scamper,  13  encumber-the-place,  14  was-a-banker,  15  eccen- 
tric-people, 16  a-finger-brush,50  17  stop-the-meter,  18  in- 
neither-case,  19  you-wrote-letters.59 

9.  Letter.     (338—5 130.) 

Saginaw,  Michigan,  August  i,  1904. 
Hon.  James  Burrell  Angell, 

University  of  Michigan, 
Ann  Arbor,  Michigan. 
Dear-Sir : — 

I-am  expecting  to  enter25  the-University  this  fall.  It-is- 
my  desire  first  to  take  the-literary  course  and-then  enter 
the-law  school.  I-would  like-very-much50  to-take  both- 
courses  in-five  years.  Will-it  be  possible  for-me  to-do  this? 
I-have  been  in  a-law-office  for-two75  years  and-I-had  sup- 
posed that  the-work  done  during  this-time  would-help  ma- 
terially to-reduce  the-course  at  the-University.  I-hear,  how- 
ever,100 that-you  never-allow  work-done  in  a-law-office  to- 
apply  on  the-law  course  at  the-University.  Is  this  true? 
I-hope  that125  what  I-hear  is  incorrect  for  I-feel  that  the- 


146  PITMANIC 

thorough  work  I-have  done  in-the-study  of-law  should-be 
allowed  to-apply150  on  my-course  so  that  I-may  finish  both 
courses  in-the-five  years.  In-case  it-is  against  your  rules 
to-make  any  allowance175  for-this  work  I-shall  probably  go 
to-some-other  school  since  my  business  affairs  are  such  that 
I-must  finish  my  education  within  five200  years.  I-hope,  if- 
you  have-such  a-rule  at  the-University,  you-will  make-an- 
exception  in-my-case.  I-know  that  I-can225  satisfy-you  by- 
just  as  thorough  a-test  as-you  care  to-apply  in  the-form  of 
an-examination  that  I-have-done  first-class250  work  so  far 
as  T-have  gone  in-the-study  of-the-law  and-that  of  the-two 
years  I-have  to  the-subject  no273  time  was  ever-allowed 
to-go-to  waste. 

Will-you  therefore  please  to  inform-me  just-what  your 
rules  are,  and-if-they-are-against300  allowing  anything  for- 
work-done  in  a-law-office  before  entering  the-University, 
is  there  any-chance  of -your  making  an-exception  in-my- 
case  ?325  Your-early  attention  will-oblige-me  very-much. 

Sincerely-yours, 

James  Mulligan,  Jr.338 

10.     Translation. 


SHORTHAND  147 


LESSON  XL. 

REVIEW. 

i.    QUESTIONS: 

1 i )  What  large  final  hook  is  used  with  straight  letters 
on  the  side  opposite  the  s-circle? 

(2)  May  the  tiv-hook  be  written  on  curved  letters? 

(3)  May  the  tiv-hook  ever  be  used  when  the  letters 
represented  by  the  hook  are  divided  between  two  syllables? 

(4)  What  vowels  may  intervene  between  the  stroke 
and  a  following  tiv-hook? 

(5)  When    an    s-circle    occurs    immediately    after    a 
tiv-hook  where  is  it  written  ? 

(6)  Give  three  words  illustrating  the  use  of  the  tiv- 
hook. 

V_(7)     How  are  the  sounds  of  st  represented  when  they 
occur  together  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  a  syllable? 

(8)  What  is  this  loop  called ? 

(9)  May  it  be  used  for  any  other  sounds  except  that 
of  st? 

(10)  Is  it  ever  allowable  to  use  the  st-loop  to  repre- 
sent st  when  s  is  at  the  end  of  one  syllable  and  t  at  the  be- 
ginning of  the  next  ? 

( 1 1 )  Give  an  illustration. 

(12)  On  which  side  of  straight  letters  must  the  st- 
loop  be  written? 

(13)  May   it   ever  be   used   on   the  n-hook   side  of 
straight  letters? 

( 14)  When  the  sounds  of  s  and  t  are  the  last  con- 
sonant sounds  in  a  word  and  a  sounded  vowel  follows,  may 
the  st-loop  be  used  ? 

(15)  WThen  an  s-circle  follows  a  st-loop  where  is  it 
written  ? 


148  PITMAN  1C 

(16)  May  the  st-loop  be  used  when,  because  of  its 
use,  a  following  stroke  in  the  same  word  would  necessarily 
be  struck  across  the  letter  to  which  the  st-loop  is  attached? 

(17)  How  are  the  letters  str  usually  represented  when 
they  occur  together  in  a  syllable  or  when  they  occur  in  suc- 
cession part  at  the  end  of  a  syllable  and  part  at  the  beginning 
of  the  following  syllable  ? 

(18)  On  what  letters  may  the  str-loop  be  used? 

(19)  On  which  side  of  straight  letters  is  this  loop 
used? 

(20)  How  does  this  loop  compare  in  size  with  the 
st-loop  ? 

(21)  If  the  letters  str  are  the  last  consonants  in  a 
word  and  a  sounded  vowel  follows  may  the  str-loop  be  used  ? 

(22)  How  is  an  s-circle  written  when  it  immediately 
follows  the  str-loop? 

(23)  May  the  s-shun-hook  be  used  immediately  fol- 
lowing the  str-loop? 

(24)  How  much  wider  is  the  str-loop  than  the  st- 
loop? 

(25)  What   letter   is   added  by   making  emp   double 
length  ? 

(26)  What  are  the  two  endings  either  of  which  may 
be  added  by  making  ing  double  length? 

(27)  What  are  the  three  endings  any  one  of  which 
is  added  by  making  any  of  the  other  curved  letters  double 
length  ? 

(28)  Are  the  endings  added  by  the  lengthening  of 
curved  letters  necessarily  in  the  same  syllables  with  the  let- 
ters which  are  made  double  length? 


SHORTHAND  149 

EXERCISE  40. 

2.  List  Words.     (67 — 1:15.) 

Dative  active  talkative  actively  corrective  executive  neg- 
ative illustrative  instructive  protective  breast  blasting  ghost 
zest  druggist  investigation  manifest  chastised  hosts  staff 
utmost  majestic  pleased  against  bounced23  noised  yeast  re- 
joiced incrust  roaster  poster  bolster  dexter  strong  strangle 
register  administer  strange  illustration  songster  gamester 
casters  pastor  feasters  blister  fester  dusters  lumber  anger 
tamper-"'"  cylinder  central  entirely  Anderson  eastern  swifter 
swelter  hanker  lender  Alexander  welter  meter  tinker  feather 
cimeter  amber  chamber07 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Subjective,  descriptive,. connective,  collective,  (collective- 
ly,) reflective,  (reflectively,)  figurative,  (figuratively,) 
legislative,  consecutive,  (consecutively,)  inductive,  (in- 
ductively,) objective,  (objectively.)  herein,  we- 
must,  six-or-seven,  temptation,  stenography,  (stenog- 
rapher, stenographic.)  one-of-the-best,  one-of-the-most,  first, 
next,  next-time,  at-first,  at-the-first.  Baptist,  by-the-first,  by 
way-of-illustration,  constitution-of-the-United-States,  cir- 
cumstance, (circumstances,)  denominational,  deliverance, 
extraordinary,  fqr-the-first-time,  from-first-to-last,  mystery, 
Northwest,  later-than,  another-one,  of-their,  no-other,  some- 
other,  trie-other,  the-other-one,  longer-than.  any-other,  some- 
other-one. 

4.  Phrases.     (81 — i  :2O.) 

He-was-subjective  a-descriptive-case  legislative-affairs 
in-the-dative  such-talkativeness  executive-days  he-is-elective 
we-must-do  take-one-or-two25  two-or-three-cases  steno- 
graphic-work must-expect-many-cases  he-was-accused  a- 
new-duster  purchase-a-toaster  use-the-duster  examine-the- 


150  PITMANIC 

register50  will-add-luster  a-large-poster  the-obstruction  has- 
much-luster  was-later-than  there-was-no-other  you-render 
encumber-the-place  eccentric-people75  a-finger-brush  stop- 
the-meter.81 

5.  Letter.     (94—1  :so.) 

Dayton,  Ohio,  May  7,  1904. 

John  Loomis, 

Milan,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

On  Friday  I-delivered  to  the-express  company  six-cases25 
of  paper.  These-should  have-been  in  Milan  on  Saturday. 
I-am-sure  there  is  something  wrong.  The-delay  is  likely 
due  to-carelessness  ofr'°  the-express-men.  I-presume  it-will 
take  several-days  to-trace  the-package.  I-shall  have  the- 
company  trace-it  at-once.  Should-you75  fail  to-receive  the- 
stock  within  a-few  days,  be-sure  to-write  again. 

Very-truly-yours, 

Moore  Brothers.94 

6.  Letter.     (121 — 2:00.) 

Lexington,  Ky.,  Nov.  22,  1900. 

Col.  James  Otis, 

Nashville,  Tenn. 
My-Dear-Colonel : — 

I-have  your  favor  of  the-tenth.  Your25  plan  to  push  vig- 
orously the-petition  in-favor  of  General  Ashton  for  the- 
office  of  U.-S.  Marshal  for  the-next  term  has  my-approval.50 
The-general  deserves  the-honor  and-it-is-my  sincere  hope 
that  both-members  of  the-senate  from-your  state  will-do 
everything  possible  to75  induce  Mr.  McKinley  to-select  Gen. 
Ashton.  I-am  at-your  service  if-there  is  anything  I-can-do 
to-aid  you  in-his-behalf.100  Be-sure  to-write-me  if-you  see 


SHORTHAND  151 

wherein  I-can  assist-yoti  in-any-manner-whatever. 

Sincerely-yours, 

Thomas  Eaton.121 

7.     Letter.     (189—3:05.) 

Ann  Arbor,  Mich.,  June  I,  1904. 
Mr.  Jerome  Freeman, 

Mason,  Michigan. 
My-Dear-Sir  :— 

I-hear  that-you-expect  soon  to-emplovL>r>  one-or-two  more 
stenographers  in-your  factory.  If-I-am  correct  in-this,  I- 
desire  to-make  application  for  a-position  with-your  com- 
pany.50 I-have  taken  a-course  at  the-school  here  and-can- 
now  take  dictation  at  a-ratc  which-would  e;iablc-:r.c  to-do 
your  work73  in-a-manner  satisfactory  to-you.  I-am  willing 
to  begin  at  a-low  rate,  and-continue  at  a-small  salary  until 
I-shall  prove100  to-you  that-my  services  are  worth  more. 
I-can  come  at  any-time.  I-enclose  a-number  of-testimonials 
and-can  furnish  as-many1-3  more  as-you-may  desire  as^o- 
character  and-ability  as-an-amanuensis.  Ail-that  I-wish  to- 
begin  with  is-a-chance  to  show150  what  I-can-do  and-what 
I-am  worth  to-an-employer.  I-hope  that-you  may  have  a- 
place  for-rne  in  a-very173  few-days.  I-shall  await  your 
reply  with-much  anxiety. 

Sincerely-yours, 

Thomas  Worden.189 


LESSON  XLL 

THE;  HALVING  PRINCIPLE,  SEC.  i. 

i.     Of  the  various  methods  of  contraction  in  Shorthand 
the  most  important  is  that  introduced  in  this  lesson,  i.  e., 


152  PITMANIC 

the  halving  principle.  It  is  that  of  indicating  a  t  or  d 
in  certain  cases  by  writing  the  preceding  simple  or  modified 
stroke  half  the  medium  length. 

2.  The  general  rule  is  that  the  t  or  d  indicated  by  this 
method  must  be  in  the  same  syllable  with  the  stroke  shorten- 
ed to  indicate  it.     When  it  is  clearly  evident  that  consider- 
able speed  may  be  gained  or  much  more  distinct  angles  se- 
cured  without   decreasing  the   legibility   this   rule    may   be 
varied,   as  in   pocket,   shown  below.     There   are  probably 
more  exceptions  to  this  rule  than  to  any  other  in  the  entire 
system  of  Shorthand.     In  order  to  prevent  the  student  from 
unintentionally  going  to  the  extremes  in  this  respect,  the  list 
words  in  this  lesson  are,  in  the  main,  confined  to  words 
which  follow  the  rule  somewhat  closely.     When  the  student 
becomes  more  familiar  with  the  use  of  the  halving  principle 
he  will  be  able  to  distinguish  readily  when  he  may  vary  the 
general  rule  without  danger  to  legibility. 

3.  The  following  illustrations  show  the  use  of  the  halv- 
ing principle  applied  to  letters  without  hooks : 

V      ,      -L       S      .*,      i       V 

t  ~i 

pocket     hate       instigate          result  innocent       tract          promote  art 

4.  For   the    sake   of   convenience    in    referring   to    half 
length   characters   they   are   spoken   of   as    follows :      Half 
length  be  to  indicate  a  t  is  called  bet;  to  indicate  a  d,  bed. 
A  half  length  kay  to  indicate  a  t  is  called  ket;  to  indicate 
a  d,  ked,  etc.     The  rule  adopted  by  some  Pitmanic  teachers 
never  to  use  a  single  half  length  shaded  letter  to  indicate  a 
t  or  a  single  half  length  light  letter  to  indicate  a  d  is  not 
observed  in  this  text.     Hence  gate  would  be  written  get 
and  not  gay-te,  and  code  would  be  written  ked  and  not 
kay-de. 


SHORTHAND  153 

5.  When  t  or  d  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and  a 
sounded  vowel   follows,  the  full  stroke  te  or  de  must  be 
used,  as  in  needy,  body  and  pity,  written  en-de,  be-de, 
and  pe-te. 

6.  To  secure  greater  legibility  a  single  unhooked  stroke 
is  never  written  half  length  to  represent  a  word  of  more 
than  one  syllable.     For  example,  abate,  abide,  etc.,  are  writ- 
ten be-te,  be-de,  while  the  word  bait  is  written  bet,  and 
bide  is  written  bed. 

7.  It  has  become  the  custom,  though  with  no  good  rea- 
son, for  Pitmanic  writers,  including  the  Graham  and  other 
slightly   modified    Pitman   systems,   not   to   write   ray   half 
length  when  it  is  the  only  stroke  in  a  word  besides  a  t  or 
d.     Hence  rate,  for  example,  is  written  ray-te  and  not  ret; 
and  road  is  written  ray-de  and  not  red,  etc. 

8.  It  has  been  advised  that  the  double  length  letters  be 
made  a  little  longer  than  twice  the  length  of  the  ordinary 
letters.     Likewise  the  half  length   letters   should  be  made 
a  little  less  than  half  length  so  that  no  confusion  between 
the  letters  of  different  lengths  may  result. 

EXERCISE  41. 
Using  the  halving-principle  write  the  following  words : 

9.  List  Words.     (60 — 1:15.) 

i  Boat,  2  coat,  3  date,  4  fate,  5  gate,  6  hate,  7  jot,  8  kite, 
9  late1,  10  mate,  n  note,  12  paid,  13  operate,  14  east,  15  tote, 
1 6  vote,  17  berate,  18  theft,  19  legislate,  20  bracelet, 
21  adopt,  22  dictate,  23  estate,  24  espied,  25  elect,  26  eject, 
27  erect,  28  rotate,  29  invade,  30  reviewed,  31  repeat, 
32  recent,  33  fade,  34  good,  35  picket,  36  absent,  37  decent, 
38  peasant,  39  pleasant,  40  present,  41  pheasant,  42  accent, 
43  execute,  44  sent,  45  crescent,  46  sentence,  47  chestnut, 
48  basket,  49  receded,  50  refute,  51  invite,  52  implicate, 


154  PITMANIC 

53  circuit,  54  remit,  55  capital,  56  ratify,  57  rectify,  58  notify, 
59  certain,  60  jacket. 
10.     Wordsigns. 


Almighty   after   afternoon    as-it       asso-        all-the    do-it     east-and-     emphatic 
for-it  ciate        world  west 

,  ^ 

A.    ^  "^ — "^ — " — <r- 

feature     fear-of-     future    good-and-    manuscript    nature   natural     of-it 
if-it  God  fact        bad 


some-what    some-time    use-it     wisdom         world    without    yesterday       about 


establish  at-it          territory       heart       history  is-it  had-it 

established          it-had 
establishment    it-would 

11.  Phrases.     (65 — i  :oo.) 

i  A-rainy-afternoon,  2  after-six-days,  3  was-absent,  4  in- 
an-afternoon,  5  as-it-was-coming,  6  associate-cases,  7  in-all- 
the-world,  8  stay-and-do-it,2r>  9  east-and-west,  10  an-em- 
phatic-story,  n  a-new-feature,  12  in-future-times,  13  the- 
good-and-bad,  14  took-his-manuscript,  15  nature-of-the-case, 
1 6  several-facts,50  17  it-sometimes-came,  18  it-will-implicate- 
him,  19  in-the-capitol,  20  recent-action,  21  they-may-ratify.65 

12.  Letter.     (689 — 11:00.) 

East  Saginaw,  Mich.,  August  7,  1904. 
Mrs.  Jane  Frost, 

Marine  City,  Michigan. 
My-Dear  Mrs.  Frost: — 

It-has-been  so-long  since25  I-have  received  a-letter  from- 
you  that  I-fear  you  have  left  Marine  City.  I-trust,  if-you 
have,  this  letter  will-be  sent50  to-you  at-once.  I-have  just 


SHORTHAND  155 

received  a-nice  long  letter  from  Etta  Stover.  As-you  have 
asked  about  her  so  often,  I-decided75  to-write-you  at-once 
and-tell-yoit  what  news  I-have  just  received  from-her.  I- 
am-sure  you-will  be-pleased  to-hear100  of-her  experience. 
You-will  recollect  that  while  she-was  at-school  she-took  up 
the-study  of  Spanish  and-became  very  proficient  in-that125 
language.  She-could  both  write  and-speak  it  fluently.  Then, 
you-will-remember,  she-had  another  hobby.  When-she  was 
at-the  University  of  Michigan,150  she-took  up  the-study  of 
stenography  in-addition  to-her  regular-college  work.  You- 
know  her-people  were  wealthy  ami-she  was  not  obliged175 
to-work,  but  she  always  said  that-we  never  could-tell  what- 
might  happen  to  us  and- she  proposed  to-be-ready  for-any 
emergency.200  Well,  in-her-case,  the-emergency  came  all 
too-soon.  Within  a-year  after-she  left-college  her  father 
met- with  several  reverses  in-business—5  and-lost  all  of-his 
property.  Then  it-was  that  Etta's  special-work,  both  in 
stenography-and  Spanish,  was-a-boon  to-her.  Her-moth- 
er250  had  died  sometime  before  this  and-her  father's  re- 
verses broke-down  his  health.  This  left  him  helpless  with 
no-one  to-support  him  but-his"8  daughter.  As-it  was  too- 
late  in  the-year  to-secure  a-school  Etta  began  to-look  about 
to  see- what  could  be-done.  Luckily'500  she-had  become  so- 
taken  up  with  the-beautiful  art  of  stenography  that-she  bad- 
kept  up  her  practice  and-was  a-rapid  w?riter.  She:i-r>  at- 
once  began  to-look-for  a-position  as  an-amanuensis.  She 
writes-me  that  every  day  for-over  a-week  she-did  nothing 
but350  go  to  one  office  after  another  in  New-York-City  seek- 
ing a-position,  but-without-success.  But  she  never  thought 
of  failure.  Finally  she  came375  to  the-office  of-the  West 
India  Transportation  Company.  "Yes,"  the-manager  said, 
in-reply-to  her  application,  "I-desire-a  stenographer  and-de- 
sire  one100  right-away,  but,"  he-said,  "I-doubt  if-you-can 


156  PITMANIC 

do  the-work  I-must-have  done.  I-have,  since-the  Spanish 
war,  established  agencies425  throughout  Cuba  and  Porto 
Rico,  and-must-have-a  stenographer  who  knows  Spanish 
thoroughly.  I-have  been  unable  so  far,  to-secure  such-a- 
one450  in-this  city  or  anywhere  else.  I-must-have  just  such 
an-amanuensis  and-am  willing  to  pay  liberally  for-such-a- 
one."  "You-may475  imagine,"  Etta  writes,  "how-my  heart 
throbbed  while  the-manager  was-specifying  what  he-must- 
have  in-a  stenographer  for  I- just  knew  I-could500  do  the- 
work."  To-tell  a-long-story  in-a-few  sentences,  Etta  began 
work  that-very  day  at-a-large  salary.  She-says  she525  has 
no  trouble  in-doing  the-work. 

She-writes  that-from  what  she-sees  there-will-be,  for- 
years  to-come,  a-large-number  of350  openings  for  stenog- 
raphers who-can  write  and-translate  Spanish.  Since  the- 
opening  up  of-the  West  Indies  to  American  commerce  there- 
is,  as-a-result,573  a-rapid  increase  in  the-business  relations 
between  these-new  territories  and-the  United-States. 

She-is  very-happy  in-her  new-position  since-she600  really 
enjoys  the-work  and-at  the-same-time  can  also  help  her 
father  so-much.  She-says  that  her  knowledge  of  stenog- 
raphy has-been625  and-is  of-more  practical  value  to-her, 
especially  when-it-comes-to-making  a-living,  than-her  entire- 
college  education.  Etta's  present  address  is650  407  Union 
Square,  New-York-City.  I-am  sure  she-would-be  veryt- 
much  pleased  to-hear  from-you.  I-know  you-will075  write- 
her  at-once  now  that-you  have  her-address. 

Sincerely-yours, 

Ethel  Welch.689 


SHORTHAND  157 

13.     Translation. 


LESSON  XLII. 

THK   HALVING  PRINCIPLE,   SEC.    II. 

1.  Way,   yea,  emp   and   ing  are   rarely  halved.      It  is 
therefore  possible  with  the  four  corresponding  light  strokes, 
ar,  el,  em  and  en,  to  make  a  distinction  between  the  adding 
of  t  and  d.     D  is  added  by  halving  these  letters  and  also 
shading  them ;  t  is  added  by  merely  writing  these  light  let- 
ters half  length.     This  increases  the  legibility  of  these  let- 
ters when  halved.     As  it  is  impossible  when  using  a  pen 
to  shade  an  upward  stroke,  el  and  not  lay  must  be  used  when 
it  is  halved  and  shaded  to  add  d. 

2.  This  principle  is  illustrated  in  the  following  words : 

V ^*S~  '-N £2. *^s  **S V—  ~> 

failed          felt          made  met  net  node  ford          article 

3.  Em,  en,  el  and  ar  are  not  shaded  to  add  a  following 
d  when  these  letters  are  modified  by  a  hook.     If  this  rule 
were  not  observed  when  halving  these  letters  an  en  with  a 


158  PITMANIC 

w-hook,  if  shaded  to  add  d,  would  conflict  with  an  en  which 
is  shaded  when  modified  with  an  r-hook,  etc. 

4.  In   such  cases   as   cored,   gored   and   similar   words, 
the  shaded  downward  ar  does  not  form  a  sufficiently  clear 
angle.     Therefore  in  words  where  r  follows  kay  or  gay 
and  is  to  be  halved  it  is  better  to  represent  a  following  t  or 
d  by  a  halved  ray. 

5.  A  kay  or  gay  following  lay,  ef  or  ve  is  not  halved 
to  represent  t  or  d  for  the  reason  that  the  half  length  letters, 
not  forming  an  angle  with  what  precedes  would  be  lost  sight 
of.     Therefore  such  words  as  looked,  effect,  vacate,  etc., 
must  be  written  in  full,  thus :     vacate,  ve-kay-te,  and  not 
ve-ket;  effect,  ef-kayrte,  and  not  ef-ket;  and  looked,  lay- 
kay-te    and    not    lay-ket.     For    the  same     reason    a    half 
length  ish  cannot  be  used  after  lay,  and  similar  outlines 
which  will  be  evident  to  the   student.     Occasionally  it   is 
not  convenient  to  use  an  el  shaded  when  halved  to  add  d, 
as  in  mislaid  and  embezzled.     In  such  cases  the  half  length 
lay  is  used  since  with  it  the  outline  may  be  formed  more 
easily  and  quickly. 

6.  Although  it  is  the  general  rule  that  the  t  or  d  repre- 
sented by  a  half  length  letter  should  occur  in  the  same  sylla- 
ble with  the  letter  made  half  length,  the  past  tense  of  regu- 
lar verbs,  formed  by  adding  ed,  is  usually  represented  by 
the  halving  principle,  as  in  plated,  written  pel-ted,  and 
gloated,  written  gel-ted. 

EXERCISE  42. 

Using  the  proper  halved  characters,  write  the  following 
words : 

7.  List  Words.     (60 — i  :i5.) 

i  Made,  2  nude,  3  bored,  4  load,  5  old,  6  yard,  7  model, 
8  end,  9  note,  10  deplored,  n  blamed,  12  reasoned,  13  index, 


SHORTHAND  159 

14  needle,  15  Leonard,  16  knit,  17  sent,  18  fight,  19  slit, 
20  modify,  21  light,  22  fault,  23  salt,  24  slating,  25  gored, 
26  need,  27  needless,  28  sand,  29  night,  30  mead,  31  mute, 
32  meddle,  33  middle,  34  mailed,  35  indolence,  36  neat, 
37  manifold,  38  medium,  39  toiled,  40  mood,  41  renewed, 
42  modulation,  43  field,  44  unfold,  45  absurd,  46  unsold, 
47  delayed,  48  poured,  49  pervade,  50  ascend,  51  blossomed, 
52  assumed,  53  mould,  54  descendant,  55  indivisible,  56  end- 
less, 57  doled,  58  lewd,  59  finite,  60  imminent. 
8.  Wordsigns. 


downward        hand        handsome     before-     behold       hand-       immediate      under 

hand         beheld       in-hand   immediately 


hold          lord       heard   hard   have-      have-     hand-writing   hazard     hardware 
held          read      word  it  had 

9.  Phrases.     (56 — -.55.) 

i  Goes-downward,  2  going-downward,  3  will-have-it, 
4  a-handsome-case,  5  many-handsome-cases,  6  behold-you- 
come,  7  you-will-behold,  8  many-beheld,  9  will-have-imme- 
diate-trial,25 10  in-such-history,  n  must-have-it,  12  have-it- 
taken,  13  such-hazards,  14  is-it-coming,  15  have-had-it, 
1 6  pray-the-Lord,  17  they-had-it,  18  immediate-effect,50 
19  I-have-it,  20  never-have-it.5e 

10.  Letter.     (196 — 3:15.) 

Nashville,  Tenn.,  August  9,  1904. 
Loren  Sampson, 

Bay  City,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

I-was  indeed  very-much  pleased  to-receive-your25  letter 
last  night  with  the-in formation  that  I-was  to  have  that-old 
matter  off-my  hands  so  soon.  I-think  you  did  very  well50 


160  PITMANIC 

to  dispose  of  all-those  lots,  especially  those- with  the-old 
houses  upon-them,  so-readily  and-at-such  very-good  prices. 
As-it-has75  now  come-out  I-will  lose  very-little  on  the-deal. 
If -you- will  send  me  your  bill  I-will  send-you-check  to-bal- 
ance100  same.  I-have  signed  all  the-deeds  to  the-various 
pieces  of  property  and-same  have  gone  by  to-day's  mail.  I- 
hope  that-they-will125  reach-you  safely. 

It-is  a-relief  to-me  to  have  that  entire  estate  business 
closed  up.  I-desire  to-assure  you  that  I-fully150  appreciate 
your  work  in-bringing  the-business  to-such  an-early-close. 

Whenever  I-have  anything  in  the-line  of-real-estate  to- 
look  after175  in  the-future  you-may-be-sure  that  I-will  send- 
it  to-you.  I-am, 

Very-truly-yours, 

Benjamin  Lathrop.196 

n.     Suggestion.     (185 — 3:00.) 

Those  who-have  reached  this-lesson  may  feel  that-they- 
are  very  nearly  through  with  the-study  of  the-principles  of 
stenography,  and-that  all25  they  need  after  finishing  the-few 
remaining  lessons  is  plenty  of-practice  on  miscellaneous 
matter,  especially  practice  on  letters,  to-work  up  speed. 
One  should50  make  a-specialty  of-studying  the-Wordsigns, 
writing  them  over-and-over-again  many-times.  That-is  one- 
thing  so-many  beginners  neglect.  Every  Wordsign75  in 
the-book  should  be-written  over  at-least  once-a-day  for-sev- 
eral  weeks.  When  the-pupil  can  write  the-whole  list  of 
Wordsigns100  in  the-book  without  stopping  at  the-rate  of 
say  sixty  or  seventy  words  per  minute  he-may  then  begin 
to-feel  that-he  knows125  the-Wordsigns  fairly  well.  The- 
young  stenographer  who  can  write  his  Wordsigns  with  no- 
more  thought  than  is  necessary  for-one  to-make  use-of150 
when  he  dots  his  i's  ami-crosses  his  t's,  is  in-a-fair  way  to- 


SHORTHAND  161 

succeed  as-a  stenographer.  Remember-this  and-practice  on 
your175  Wordsigns  daily.  You-never  can-give  them  too- 
ir.uch  practice.185 

12.     Translation. 


/  s 


'Vlf>*V 


/\ 

'          G"-  A .    / 

^  \/ 


LESSON  XLIII. 
THE;  HALVING  PRINCIPLE,  SEC.  in. 

i.  Any  consonant  stroke,  modified  by  either  an  initial 
or  final  small  hook  or  by  both  an  initial  and  final  small  hook, 
may,  like  the  simple  letters,  be  halved  to  indicate  a  following 
t  or  d.  When  a  hooked  letter  is  halved  it  is  treated  as  a 
single  letter  and  the  t  or  d  added  must  occur  after  both  the 
stroke  and"  the  letter  or  letters  indicated  by  the  hook  or 
hooks.  For  example,  the  word  faint  is  composed  of  the 
consonants  f-n-t.  The  n-hook  is  used  to  indicate  a  follow- 
ing n  and  the  character  fen  is  made  half  length  and  both  the 
f  and  n  are  read  before  the  added  t.  The  word  fatten,  with 
the  t  coming  before  the  n,  would  not,  therefore,  permit  of 
the  use  of  the  half  length  hooked  letter,  fen,  the  word  fatten 
being  written  fet-en.  Likewise  in  the  word  cleaned,  for 


1 62  PITMANIC 

example,  the  double  hooked  letter  klen  is  halved  to  repre- 
sent a  d  after  the  letters  represented  by  both  the  hooks  and 
the  stroke. 

2.  The  half  length  hooked  letters  are  spoken  of  as  fol- 
lows :     A  half  length  fel  is  called  flet  if  t  is  indicated,  and 
fled  if  d  is  indicated.     A  half  length  plen  is  called  plent, 
if  t  is  indicated,  and  plend,  if  d  is  indicated,  etc. 

3.  Although    some    reporters    occasionally     shorten     a 
stroke  upon  which  the  shun-hook,  tive-hook,  large  w-hook, 
ler-hook,  rel-hook,  st-loop  or  str-loop  is  used,  it  is  best 
not  to  use  the  halving-principle  with  a  letter  modified  by 
one  of  these  large  hooks  or  loops,  unless  it  is  very  inconven- 
ient to  add  the  stroke  te  or  de. 

4.  The  use  of  the  halving  principle  with  hooked  letters 
is  shown  in  the  following  words : 

^        (^        «\^ 

rambled       migrate       coughed    mounting    insolvent    inclined    demand    gratify 

EXERCISE  43. 

Using  the  proper  shortened  hooked  consonants  write : 

5.  List  Words.     (56 — 1 105.) 

I  Flagrant,  2  brittle,  3  depend,  4  found,  5  bound,  6  lament, 
7  patent,  8  retained,  9  expend,  10  extend,  n  indent,  12  plan- 
tain, 13  spending,  14  suspend,  15  tendency,  16  fountain, 
17  incident,  18  mountain,  19  grant,  20  front,  21  puffed, 
22  craft,  23  drained,  24  cleaned,  25  friend,  26  enchained, 
27  clamored,  28  shirt,  29  silvered,  30  papered,  31  crowed, 
32  glut,  33  Richard,  34  hypocrite,  35  prevent,  36  celebrate, 
37  refund,  38  violent,  39  random,  40  husband,  41  deplete, 
42  talent,  43  degrade,  44  mankind,  45  democrat,  46  country, 
47  rebound,  48  repent,  49  betrayed,  50  infant,  51  virtual, 


SHORTHAND  163 

52  applicant,  53  freedom,  54  supplicant,  55  glutton,  56  tan- 
gent. 

6.     Wordsigns. 

J^L  _  ^  _  S       J       .,  -      '      f 

J 

we-are-  werc-not       with-  which-   which-   which-   cannot     till-it     tell-it 

not  regard-to     ought-    not  had-r.ot  told 

not  wh-wd-nt 


why-not    will-not    virtue    upon-it     understand     under-go     until-it    unconcerned 
,  J  o^ 

/>       .11          3          J  ___ 

? 

testament  toward   towards   they-        such-      such-were-  shorthand     spirit 
are-not    are-not  not 


quite     may-not    minority    majority  hundred    manufacture        respectful 

manufactured       respectfully 
manufacturing 
manufacturer 

7.  Phrases.     (60 — i  :oo.) 

i  Why-not-do-so,  2  we-are-not-coming,  3  with-regard-to- 
it,  4  will-not-say-so,  5  by-virtue-of,  6  depend-upon-it,  7  he- 
will-understand,25  8  undergo-similar-treatment,  9  until-it- 
comes,  lo  they-will-tell-it,  n  in-his-territory,  12  take-Short- 
hand, 13  drained-the-canal,  14  they-repent,  15  all-mankind, 
16  celebrate-the-occasion,50  17  they-made-a-grave,  18  vio- 
lent-case, 19  a-very-rich-man.60 

8.  Letter.     (167 — 2:45.) 

Grass  Lake,  Mich.,  June  10,  1904. 
Mr.  Edward  Weeks, 

Port  Huron,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir  :_ 

We-ftave  finally  decided  to-accept2'"'  your  proposition  on 
thc-caal  land  near  Saginaw,  that-is  to  pay-you  ten  cents 


164  PITMANIC 

per-ton  on-all  coal  taken  from  beneath  your  farm50  of-six- 
htmdred  and-forty  acres,  in-section  seventeen.  We-have 
drawn  lease  to-this  effect  to-go  into  force  July  first  and-to 
continue75  fourteen  years  with  privilege  of  five  years  more 
upon  same  "terms  should- we  so  desire.  We-have  mailed 
instructions  to-our  representative  in  Port  Huron,100  to-whom 
we-will  send  lease  ready  for-you  to-e^ecute.  Please-to  give- 
this  matter  your  early-attention  as-it-is  our  desire  to125  begin 
work  not  later-than  July  first.  This-will  necessitate  our 
ordering  machinery  without-delay.  We  cannot  place  our 
order  until  we  receive  the-lease150  duly  executed.  We-hope 
this  matter  will-have  your  immediate  attention. 

Respectfully-yours, 

Irwin  LeGrand  &  Co.187 

9.     Letter.     (159 — 2:40.) 

Port  Huron,  Mich.,  June  14,  1904. 
Irwin  LeGrand  &  Co., 

Grass  Lake,  Michigan. 
Sirs  :— 

Your-letter  of-the  loth  inst.25  was  received  Monday. 
Your  representative  in-this  city,  Mr.  J.  B.  Dickinson,  called 
the-same  day  with  lease  for-my  signature.  Examining-it 
I-discovered50  that-you  had  left  out  one-item  which-was 
agreed-upon  when  we-talked  the-business  over  last  week. 
I-refer  to  the-matter  of75  excavations  for  the-proposed  mine. 
The-understanding  was  that-you  were  to  have  but-one  open- 
ing and-that  said-opening  with  the-necessary  machinery 
was100  to-occupy  only  three  acres,  said-three  acres  to-be 
wherever  you  desired  them  adjoining  the-railroad-track. 

[-put  this-clause  in  the-lease125  before-signing.  If-this-is 
satisfactory,  and-of-course  it-will-be,  since-it  was  agreed- 


SHORTHAND  165 

upon,  yon-can  file  the-lease  and-go-ahead130  with  the-pur- 
chase  of-machinery. 

Yours-truly, 

Edward  Weeks.159 
10.     Translation. 


LESSON  XLIV. 

THE  HALVING  PRINCIPLE,  SEC.   IV. 

1.  When  an  s-circle  occurs  at  the  end  of  a  shortened 
consonant,  either  simple  or  modified  by  one  or  more  hooks, 
the  s  is  read  after  the  added  t  or  d.     This  difference  of  the 
s-circle  from  the  hooks  representing  letters  which  must  be 
read  before  the  t  or  d,  should  be  carefully  rioted  by  the  stu- 
dent.    This   principle   is   shown   in   the   words   gloats   and 
kinds  given  below. 

2.  It  sometimes  happens  that  a  final  half  length  te  or 
de  does  not  make  an  angle,  or  makes  a  very  poor  angle, 
with  the  preceding  letter.     In  such  cases  the  half  length  let- 
ter may  be  disjoined  from  the  preceding  stroke.     This  is 
called  the  disjoined  ted.     Its  use  is  shown  in  such  words 


166  PITMANIC 

as  dated,  dreaded,  opinionated  and  omitted.  If  it  were 
not  disjoined  the  half  length  letter  would  be  lost  sight  of. 
The  disjoined  ted,  when  used,  should  be  written  beside  and 
very  close  to  the  end  of  the  letter  from  which  it  is  disjoined, 
as  shown  below. 

3.  The   strokes   way   and   emp   are   sometimes,   though 
rarely,    shortened.     The    exception    is    in    such    words    as 
jumped,  swayed,  etc. 

4.  Occasionally  it  is  found  convenient  to  write  a  half 
length  es  with  an  upward  stroke,  as  in  factionist. 

5.  When  a  final  t  or  d  is  preceded  by  two  separately  pro- 
nounced vowels  as  in  poet,  duet,  quiet,  etc.,  the  halving 
principle  cannot  be  made  use  of. 

6.  The  above  principles  are  illustrated  by  the  following 
words : 

^_  _z l_  _L^< V    •* LA_ 

gloats       kinds   dreaded    dated     jumped   pumped   swayed        factioniet 

EXERCISE  44. 

Using  the  prope'r  outlines  write  the  following  words: 

7.  List  Words.     (53 — i  :oo.) 

i  Floats,  2  cuts,  3  inflates,  4  cadets,  5  indents,  6  refutes, 
7  amusements,  8  treated,  9  doted,  10  dreaded,  n  institute, 
12  omitted,  13  attitude,  14  opinionated,  15  annotated,  16  sit- 
uated, 17  waited,  18  dated,  19  edited,  20  awaited,  21  audited, 
22  instituted,  23  deeded,  24  prompted,  25  attempted,  26  ex- 
empted, 27  preempted,  28  indicated,  29  freighted,  30  tooted, 
31  effected,  32  admitted,  33  mated,  34  meted,  35  emptied, 
36  mooted,  37  strutted,  38  trotted,  39  traded,  40  matted, 
41  entreated,  42  studded,  43  credited,  44  indicated,  45  imi- 
tated, 46  limited,  47  submitted,  48  resubmitted,  49  animated, 
50  intimated,  51  redeeded,  52  reindicated,  53  unattempted. 


SHORTHAND  167 

8.     Wordsigns. 


astonish-ed        act-of          at-all-      according          behind        child        circulate 
astonishment    Congress     events       according-to    be-not 

creature 


\ 


co-operate    can-it    circum-    construe-    delight    dcriva-    did-not     do-not     dare-not 
stantial    tion  tive 


for-the-      from-it        forward      guilt      gentle-      gtntle-       give-it       gave-it 
most-part  guilty    men  man 


historian          have-not     b^tter-than       movement 


9.  Phrases.     (60 — i  :oo.) 

i  Astonish-him,  2  much-astonishment,  3  be-at-it,  4  an-act- 
of-Congress,  5  take-the-child,  6  behind-it,  7  was-better-than, 
8  a-new-creature,  9  you-must-cooperate,25  10  cannot-do-so, 
ii  a-delightful-day,  12  dare-not-come,  13  many-gentlemen, 
14  will-not-give,  15  he-was-historian,  16  seven-hundred, 
17  have-not-come,  18  hear- from-it,50  19  a-grand-occasion, 
20  will-you-cooperate,  21  he-was-a-gentleman.00 

10.  Letter.     (168 — 2:45.) 

New  Albany,  Ind.,  May  n,  1904. 
Messrs.  Johnson  &  West, 

St.  Louis,  Mo. 
My-Dear-Sirs :  - 

Your  agent  was-here  yesterday25  and-I-gave-him  an-order. 
I-find  that  the-foreman  in-one  of-our  departments  neglected 
to  enter-upon  the-order  book  certain  material50  that  I-must- 
have  at-once.  Will-you,  therefore,  add  the-following  to 
our  order : 


1 68  PITMANIC 

1  Gross  Pint  Tin  Cups. 

y4  Gross  Quart  Tin75  Cups. 
4  dozen  4-Quart  Tin  Pails. 

2  dozen  6-Quart  Tin  Pails. 
^Gross  Quart  Tin  Dippers. 
Y>  Gross  Pint  Tin  Dippers.100 

l/4  Gross  2-Quart  Granite  Stew  Pans. 
l/>  Gross  3-Quart  Granite  "Stew  Pans. 

3  dozen  Challenge  Egg  Beaters. 

I-hope  this  letter125  will  reach-you  in-time  for-you  to-sencl 
the-above  items  with  the-goods  ordered  through  your  agent 
and-thus  avoid  an-extra  shipment.150 

To-make-sure  of-it  I-send  this  with  special-delivery  stamp. 
I-am,  Yours-truly, 

Thomas  Benton.168 

ii.     Letter.     (139 — 2:15.) 

New  Orleans,  La.,  July  5,  1904. 
Grayson  &  Co., 

Duluth,  Minn. 
Gentlemen : — 

We-beg  to  inform-you  that  the-last  car  of25  refrigerators 
you  billed  on  June  20  has-not-yet  arrived  in-this  city.  We- 
are  beginning  to  get  uneasy  about  it  for  our  supply50  is 
running  very-low.  Will-you  please  trace-it  by  wire  at- 
once.  It-is  probably  side-tracked  somewhere  and-will  no- 
doubt  lie  there75  until  a-tracer  reaches-it.  Do-not  fail  to 
keep  the-tracer  moving  until-you  succeed  in  locating-it  as- 
our  supply  is  about  exhausted100  and-then,  too,  we  would-be 
obliged  to  carry  the-entire  shipment  over  to  the-next  season, 
a-thing  we-desire  to  avoid,  if-possible.125 

Hoping  that-this-will  receive-your  immediate  attention, 
I-am,  Respectfully-yours, 

Theodore  Parker.139 


SHORTHAND  169 

12.     Translation. 


LESSON  XLV. 

REVIEW. 

i.     QUESTIONS  : 

1 i )  What  letters  are  indicated  by  writing  certain  let- 
ters half  length  ? 

(2)  As  a  rule  must  the  t  or  d  indicated  by  writing  a 
letter  half  length,  be  in  the  same  syllable  with  the  shortened 
letter  ? 

(3)  Is  this  rule  always  strictly  observed? 

(4)  What  two  exceptions  to  this  rule  and  why  are 
they  made? 

(5)  When  t  or  d  is  the  last  consonant  in  a  word  and 
a  sounded  vowel  follows,  may  a  preceding  stroke  be  halved 
to  indicate  the  t  or  d? 

(6)  By  what  names  are  the  half  length  letters  desig- 
nated ? 

(7)  Give  several  examples. 

(8)  Would  it  be  proper  to  write  a  half  length  b  for 
the  word  abode? 


170  PITMANIC 

(9)  Is  it  allowable  to  write  ray  half  length  to  repre- 
sent a  following  t  or  d  when  the  t  or  d  is  the  only  other  con- 
sonant in  the  word? 

(10)  Are  yea,  way,  emp  and  ing  frequently  halved? 
(n)     How  are  ar,  lay,  em  and  en  modified  in  addi- 
tion to  being  halved  when  a  d  is  to  be  indicated  ? 

(12)  When  ar,  lay,   em  and  en  are  modified  by   a 
hook  are  they  shaded  as  well  as  halved  to  indicate  ad? 

(13)  How  is  a  d  indicated  when  it  is  inconvenient  to 
use  a  half  length  shaded  el? 

(14)  Where  an  r  follows  kay  or  gay  and  is  to  be 
halved  to  indicate  a  t  or  d  how  should  it  be  written  and  why  ? 

(15)  Is  it  proper  to  use  a  half  length  kay  or  gay  after 
an  ef,  ve  or  lay? 

(16)  May  a  half  length  ish  be  used  after  lay? 

(17)  Is  it  ever  allowable  to  use  a  half  length  lay  to 
represent  a  following  d?     If  so,  give  example. 

( 18)  How  is  the  past  tense  of  regular  verbs  indicated  ? 

(19)  May  letters  with  initial  or  final  hooks  be  halved 
to  add  a  following  t  or  d? 

(20)  If  a  hooked  letter  is  written  half  length  does 
the  t  or  d  indicated  come  before  or  after  the  letters  indicated 
by  the  hook  or  hooks? 

(21)  When   a  half  length   letter   has   an   s-circle   at 
its  end  is  the  s  represented  by  the  circle  read  before  or  after 
the  t  or  d  indicated  by  halving? 

(22)  Is  it  advisable  to  halve  letters  containing  the 
shun-hook  and  the  other  large  hooks? 

(23)  What  is  meant  by  the  character  called  the  dis- 
joined ted  and  why  is  it  used? 

(24)  Where    should    the    disjoined    ted    always    be 
written  ? 


SHORTHAND  171 

(25)  Is  the  halved  es  ever  written  upwards?     If  so, 
give  example. 

(26)  May  a  final  t  or  d,  though  not  followed  by  a 
sounded  vowel,  be  indicated  by  halving,  if  two  separately 
pronounced  vowels  immediately  precede  it? 

EXERCISE  45. 

2.  List  Words.     (60 — 1:15.) 

Boat  hate  late  mate  note  operate  theft  reviewed  sentence 
chestnut  receded  implicate  remit  capital  certain  made  nude 
bored  old  index  Leonard  fault  gored  indolence  absurd25  un- 
sold ascend  assumed  indivisible  imminent  flagrant  found  in- 
dent spending  mountain  puffed  clamored  crowed  Richard 
celebrate  random  democrat  country  applicant  tangent  floats 
cadets  indents  treated  opinionated'"0  instituted  indicated  imi- 
tated meted  effected  traded  submitted  'animated  redeeded 
unattempted.60 

3.  Wordsigns. 

Almighty,  after,  (for-it,)  afternoon,  as-it,  associate,  all- 
the- world,  do-it,  east-and-west,  emphatic,  feature,  (if-it,) 
fear-of-God,  future,  (fact,)  good-and-bad,  manuscript,  na- 
ture, natural,  of-it,  some-what,  some-time,  use-it,  wisdom, 
world,  without,  yesterday,  about,  establish,  (established,  es- 
tablishment,) at-it,  (it-had,  it- would,)  territory,  heart,  his- 
tory, is-it,  had-it,  downward,  hand,  handsome,  before-hand, 
behold,  (beheld,)  hand-in-hand,  immediate,  (immediately,) 
under,  hold,  (held,)  lord,  (read,)  heard,  (word,)  hard,  have- 
it,  have-had,  hand-writing,  hazard,  hardware,  we-are-not, 
were-not,  with-regard-to,  which-ought-not,  which-not, 
which-had-not,  ( which- would-not,)  cannot,  till-it,  tell-it, 
(told,)  why-not,  will-not,  virtue,  upon-it,  understand,  under- 
go, until-it,  unconcerned,  testament,  toward,  towards,  they- 
are-not,  such-are-not,  such-were-not,  shorthand,  spirit,  quite, 


172  PITMANIC 

may-not,  minority,  majority,  hundred,  manufacture,  (manu- 
facturing, manufactured,)  respectful,  (respectfully,)  aston- 
ish, (astonished,  astonishment,)  act-of-Congress,  at-all- 
events,  according,  (according- to,  creature,)  behind,  (be- 
not,)  child,  circulate,  co-operate,  can-it,  circumstantial,  con- 
struction, delight,  derivative,  did-not,  do-not,  dare-not,  for- 
the-most-part,  from-it,  forward,  guilt,  (guilty,)  gentlemen, 
gentleman,  give-it,  gave-it,  historian,  have-not,  better-than, 
movement.. 

4.  Phrases.     (99 — i  :4O.) 

In-all-the-world  east-and-west  an-emphatic-story  a-new- 
feature  in-future-times  took-his-manuscript  it-will-implicate- 
him  all-mankind23  going-downward  many-handsome-cases 
you-will-behold  will-nave-immediate-trial  you-will-have-it 
have-it-taken  they-had-it  never-have-it50  with-regard-to-it 
by-virtue-of  he-will-understand  until-it-comes  in-his-terri- 
tory  drained-the-canal  celebrate-the-occasion  be-at-it75  an- 
act-of-Congress  was-better-than  a-new-creature  cannot-do- 
so  many-gentlemen  he-was-historian  have-not-come  a-grand- 
occasion." 

5.  Letter.     (196—3:15.) 

Nashville,  Tenn.,  August  9,  1904. 
Loren  Sampson, 

Bay  City,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

I-was  indeed  very-much  pleased  to-receive-your25  letter 
last  night  with  the-information  that  I-was  to  have  that-old 
matter  off-my  hands  so  soon.  I-think  you  did  very  well50 
to  dispose  of  all-those  lots,  especially  those-with  the-old 
houses  upon-them,  so-readily  and-at-such  very-good  prices. 
As-it-has75  now  come-out  I-will  lose  very-little  on  the-deal. 
If-you-will  send  me  your  bill  I-will  send-you-check  to-bal- 


SHORTHAND  173 

ance100  same.  I-have  signed  all  the-deeds  to  the-various 
pieces  of  property  and-same  have  gone  by  to-day's  mail.  I- 
hope  that-they-will125  reach-yoti  safely. 

It-is  a-relief  to-me  to  have  that  entire  estate  business 
closed  up.  I-desire  to-assure  you  that  I-fully150  appreciate 
your  work  in-bringing  the-business  to-such  an-early-close. 

Whenever  I-have  anything  in  the-line  of-real-estate  to- 
look  after175  in  the-future  you-may-be-sure  that  I-will  send- 
it  to-you.  I-am, 

'  Very-truly-yours, 

Benjamin  Lathrop.196 

6.     Letter.     (159 — 2:40.) 

Port  Huron,  Mich.,  June  14,  1904. 
Irwin  LeGrand  &  Co., 

Grass  Lake,  Michigan. 
Sirs : — 

Your-letter  of-the  loth  inst.25  was  received  Monday. 
Your  representative  in-this  city,  Mr.  J.  B.  Dickinson,  called 
the-same  day  with  lease  for-my  signature.  Examining-it 
I-discovered30  that-you  had  left  out  one-item  which-was 
agreed-upon  when  we-talked  the-business  over  last  week. 
I-refer  to  the-matter  of75  excavations  for  the-proposed  mine. 
The-understanding  was  that-you  were  to  have  but-one  open- 
ing and-that  said-opening  with  the-necessary  machinery 
was100  to-occupy  only  three  acres,  said-three  acres  to-be 
wherever  you  desired  them  adjoining  the-railroad-track. 

I-put  this-clause  in  the-lease125  before-signing.  If-this-is 
satisfactory,  and-of-course  it-will-be,  since-it  was  agreed- 
upon,  you-can  file  the-lease  and-go-ahead150  with  the-pur- 
chase  of-machinery. 

Yours-truly, 

Edward  Weeks.159 


174  PITMANIC 

LESSON  XLVI. 

PREFIXES. 

1.  The   more   frequently   occurring  prefixes  are   repre- 
sented by  brief  signs.     Some  of  these  are  disjoined  from 
the  following  letter.     The  others  are  joined. 

2.  The  disjoined  prefixes  are : 

1 i )  A  dot  to  represent  con,  com  or  cog,  as  in  condone, 
comprise,  cognate. 

(2)  An  s-circle  to  represent  self  or  circum,  as  in  self- 
respect,  circumlocution. 

(3)  A  slanting  tick,  like  the  tick  for  he,  to  represent 
counter,  contro,  and  contra,  as  in  controvert,  counter- 
march, contraband. 

(4)  Em  to  represent  magni,  as  in  magnitude. 

3.  These  disjoined  prefixes  should  always  be  written 
before  writing  the  outines  which  they  precede.     The  habit 
of  doing  this  should  be  cultivated  from  the  very  start  or 
the   student   will   find   himself  going  back   to   insert  these 
prefix  signs  after  the  outlines  are  written,  thus  consuming 
more  time  than  if  the  full  outline  for  the  prefix  were  used. 

4.  The  joined  prefixes  are: 

1 i )  A  half  length  en  to  represent  the  prefixes  intro, 
inter,  ante,  and  anti,  as  in  introduce,  interrupt,  antidote, 
antedate. 

(2)  Pe-iss  to  represent  the  prefix  post,  as  in  postman. 

5.  When  the  syllables  con,  com  or  cog  occur  between 
two  consonant  strokes  in  a  word,  the  two  strokes  are  dis- 
joined to  indicate  that  either  con,  com  or  cog  is  to  be  sup- 
plied, as  in  inconstant,  incomplete,  incognito. 

It   is  the  custom   with   many   reporters   and   teachers   to 
omit  the  dot  for  the  prefixes  con,  com  and  cog  in  the  large 


SHORTHAND  175 

majority  of  cases.  This  is  not  advisable  for  the  beginner 
who  should  write  these  signs  in  every  instance,  at  least  until 
he  has  had  considerable  experience  as  a  reporter.  Even 
then  he  should  not  omit  them  unless  actually  pressed  for 
time.  These  prefixes  and  the  parts  of  an  outline  disjoined 
to  indicate  corn,  con  and  cog  are  illustrated  in  the  following 
outlines : 


condone    com-     cognate    self-re-     circumlo-    counter-     contro-    contra-  magni- 
prise  spect         cution          act  vert          band        tude 


introduce    interrupt    antidote    postman    inconstant    incomplete    incognito 

EXERCISE  46. 

Using  the  proper  prefixes  and  disjoined  parts  write  the 
following  words  : 

6.     List  Words.     (59  —  i  :so.) 

I  Contemplate,  2  construe,  3  interdiction,  4  confine, 
5  preconceive,  6  conceal,  7  countersign,  8  anticipation,  9  in- 
terest, 10  condense,  n  circumference,  12  recommend,  13  con- 
serve, 14  compatible,  15  recompense,  16  accomplish,  17  con- 
cede, 18  antiquary,  19  companion,  20  constable,  21  compile, 
22  conduce,  23  countermarch,  24  compound,  25  combine, 
26  convene,  27  selfish,  28  circumvent,  29  counterpoise, 
30  controversy,  31  contribute,  32  contraband,  33  antedilu- 
vian, 34  antedate,  35  postman,  36  interval,  37  interurban, 
38  inconsolable,  39  recognize,  40  interrogate,  41  inconsistent, 
42  concern,  43  anticipate,  44  convert,  45  interest,  46  un- 
conscious, 47  conspiracy.  48  conception,  49  congestion,  50  in- 
compatible, 51  conversion,  52  interpose,  53  contemplation, 
54  conduct,  55  comparison,  56  contemplation,  57  miscon- 
ceive, 58  concur,  59  content. 


176  PITMANIC 

7.     Wordsigns. 


as-great-as   able-   at-any-   able-to-   at-all-   construct-     conse-     consequent 
to         rate          give-it     Its  tive  quence 


L  _  L 


consequen-    comprehend    comprehen-    consider   consid-     conflden-         calculate 
tial  sion  eration     tial 


^p 

great-  greater-  Great-         heretofore         hesitate  human- 

extent  than  Britain  nature 


r z. 


intellect          intelligence       Incompetent  part  individual 

party 

8.  Phrases.     (60 — i  :oo.) 

i*  As-great-as-can-be,  2  will-take-interest,  3  able-to-call, 
4  able-to-equal,  5  able-to-go,  6  go-at-any-rate,  7  was-at-all- 
its,25  8  was-constructive,  9  they-will-calculate-it,  10  a-great- 
event,  n  greater-than-any,  12  a-large-heart,  13  was-human- 
nature,  14  conceal-them,  15  strong-intellect,  16  he-was-in- 
competent,50  17  very-great-extent,  18  he-was-introduced, 
19  receive-interest,  20  compound-it.60 

9.  Letter.     (167 — 2:45.) 

Iowa  City,  Iowa,  May  n,  1904. 
Mr.  John  Young, 

Springfield,  111. 
My-Dear-Sir: — 

Are-you  still  engaged  in  the-manufacture25  of-rotary 
churns?  A-gentleman  in-this  city  has  recently  purchased 
a-large  dairy-farm  near  here  and-intends  to-go  into  the-but- 
ter-makingr>0  business  very  largely. 


SHORTHAND  177 

Since  learning  of-this  yesterday  it-has  occurred  to-me 
that  thc-rotary  churn  which-you  were  manufacturing  when- 
I-was  in7r>  Springfield  would-be  just  the-thing  for-him.  If- 
you  are  still  interested  in-this  business,  send  me  your  de- 
scriptive catalogue  and-I-will  place100  it  in  the-hands  of 
the-aforesaid  gentleman  and-at  the-same  time  personally 
urge-him  to  adopt  trie-churn  you-are  making.  Knowing 
what125  I-do  of-it,  I-am  sure  it- would  please-him.  If-you- 
like  you-might  also  write  the-gentleman  direct.  His  name 
is  Henry150  Patterson,  and-mail  will  reach-him  addressed 
simply,  Iowa  City,  Iowa.  I-am, 

Sincerely-yours, 

John  Elfring.167 

10.     Letter.     (238—3:55.) 

Springfield,  111.,  May  14,  1904. 

Mr.  John  Elfring, 

Iowa  City,  Iowa. 
Dear-Sir  :— 

I-was-much  pleased  to-receive  your-letter25  of-recent-date. 
I-am  still  in  the-same  business  in-which  I-was  engaged 
when-you  were  here.  The-only  change  in  the-business50 
is-that  I-am  now  sole  proprietor,  having  recently  bought 
out  the-parties  formerly  interested  with-me. 

I-send-you  to-day  our  new  catalogue.75  I-beg  to-call 
your  attention  to-several  very  important  improvements  we- 
have  made  in  our  churns.  These  are  all  fully  explained 
in  the-catalogue.100  I-am  sure  our  churn  would  please  Mr. 
Patterson.  I-shall  wait  until  I  hear  from-you  again  before- 
writing  him  direct.  I-hope-you125  may-be  able-to  persuade- 
him  to-place  an-order  with  us.  In-case-you  succeed,  I-shall 
of-course,  be-pleased  to  allow-you150  the-regular  twenty  per 
cent,  commission  which  we  allow  our  agents. 


178  PITMANIC 

If-you-afe  in  the-hardware  business,  as  your  letter-head 
indicates,  would-it175  not  be  possible  for-you  to-take  the- 
agency  for  our  churns  in  Iowa  City,  Iowa?  We-are  now 
making  a-small  churn  especially  for200  family  use  among 
farmers.  They-are  taking  wonderfully  well.  I-would  ask 
your  attention  to-this  churn,  number  7,  in  the-catalogue 
sent-you  to-day.225  I-am  sure  there-is  money  in-it  for-you. 

Respectfully, 

John  Young.238 

ii.     Translation. 


LESSON  XLVII. 

AFFIXES. 

i.  There  are  a  number  of  endings,  or  affixes,  of  frequent 
occurrence  which,  like  the  prefixes,  are  represented  by  ab- 
breviated signs.  They  are  as  follows : 

(  T  )  The  endings  ful,  bel,  bal  and  ble  are  represented 
by  the  simple  letters  ef  and  be,  when  it  is  inconvenient  to 
modify  these  letters  with  the  1-hook,  as  in  forcible,  distaste- 
ful, ostensible,  wasteful. 


SHORTHAND  179 

(2)  The   ending  ship   is   represented  by   either  ish  or 
shay  as  in  township,  governorship.     It  is  allowable  to  dis- 
join the  ish  or  shay  used  for  the  ending  ship  when  neither 
will  make  a  distinct  angle  with  the  preceding  letter.     Since 
either  the  upward  or  downward  stroke  may  be  written,  it 
is  seldom  necessary  to  disjoin  the  letter  used  for  this  ending. 

(3)  A  dot  for  ing  is  used  when  it  is  inconvenient  to 
join  the  stroke  ing  at  the  end  of  words  as  in  resting,  hoist- 
ing. 

(4)  In  similar  outlines  the  ending  ings  is  likewise  diffi- 
cult to  join.     In  such  cases  a  dash  is  used,  as  in  castings. 
The  dash  used  for  this  purpose  is  written  at  right  angles  to 
the  stroke  at  the  end-  of  which  it  is  placed.     The  student 
should  bear  in  mind  that  the  dot  and  dash  for  the  endings 
ing  and  ings  should  never  be  used  except  when  it  is  not 
convenient  to  use  the  stroke  ing  since  a  joined  letter  is  al- 
ways more  quickly  written  than  one  that  is  disjoined. 

(5)  An  s-circle  is  used  to  represent  the  ending  self  and 
a  ses-circle  for  selves,  as  in  myself,  yourself,  themselves. 

(6)  A  de  is  used  at  the  end  of  words  for  the  ending 
hood,  as  in  manhood,  childhood. 

(7)  The  wordsign  for  ever,  is  used  for  the  ending  ever 
in  such  words  as  whenever. 

(8)  The  s-circle  is  used  for  so  when  it  occurs  before 
the  ending  ever  in  such  words  as  whensoever. 

(9)  The  endings  ility,  ality  and  arity  are  not  written 
but  are  indicated  by  disjoining  from  the  first  part  of  the 
outline  the  letter  immediately  preceding  the  endings,  as  in 
hospitality,  excitability,  disparity. 

2.     These  affixes  are  illustrated  in  the  following  words  : 


forcible     distasteful    township   governorship  resting       casting  myself 


i8o  PITMANIC 


themselves    disparity    hospitality    excitability        manhood          whensoever 

EXERCISE  47. 

Using  the  proper  endings  write  the  following  words: 

3.  List  Words.     (52  —  i  :3o.) 

i  Admissible,  2  permissible,  3  accessible,  4  ostensible, 
5  surmountable,  6  cannibal,  7  tasteful,  8  graceful,  9  citizen- 
ship, 10  wardenship,  n  deanship,  12  warship,  13  lordship, 
14  township,  15  rusting,  16  rafting,  17  roofing,  18  resting, 
19  .casting,  20  himself,  21  thyself,  22  myself,  23  yourself, 
24  themselves,  25  ourselves,  26  yourselves,  27  itself,  28  re- 
liability, 29  debility,  30  visibility,  31  feasibility,  32  instru- 
mentality, 33  vitality,  34  mentality,  35  frugality,  36  brutality, 
37  individuality,  38  fatality,  39  popularity,  40  familiarity, 
41  disparity,  42  polarity,  43  stability,  44  futility,  45  admissi- 
bility,  46  inadmissibility,  47  unfamiliarity,  48  inhospitality, 
49  formality,  50  informality,  51  instability,  52  potentiality. 

4.  Wordsigns. 


there-  which-ought-   which-have-    which-would-   which-are-        such 

would-not       to-have-had      had  have-had  not  ought-to- 

have-had 


such-have-    such-would-    posterity      postscript    people-of-    particular    partake 
had  have-had  God 


political         or-not    onward      opportunity    on-th«-            on-either-  on-the-other- 

one-hand        hand  hand 

5.     Phrases.     (60 — i  :oo.) 

i     Such-a-temperament,    2    in-his-posterity,    3  in-a-post- 


SHORTHAND  181 

script,  4  was-very-particular,  5  a-new-part,  6  in-that-part, 
7  will-partake,  8  political-influence,  9  he-keeps-onward,25 
10  a-great-opportunity,  n  a-poor-casting,  12  was-accessible, 
13  saw-a-cannibal,  14  offered-the-deanship,  15  worship-the- 
king,  1 6  over-the-township,  17  take-it-himself,  18  go-them- 
selves,50  19  the-wardenship-cases,  20  will-take-it-himself, 
21  will-worship-him.00 

6.  Letter.     (84 — i  :2o.) 

Lexington,  Ky.,  Jan.   I,   1904. 
John  Phillips, 

Detroit,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir  :— 

Will-you  please  send  to-me  at-once  a-catalogue25  of-your 
various  styles  of  show-cases.  I-am-preparing  to  open  a- 
jewelry  store  in-this  city  in-a-short-time  and-shall  want50 
several  cases  especially  for-this  line  of  business. 

With-your  catalogue  be-sure  to  name  discounts  for  cash 
with  order.  A-prompt  reply  will  confer75  a-favor.  I-am, 

Very-truly-yours, 

Thomas  Ackerson.84 

7.  Letter.     (125 — 2:00.) 

Denver,  Colorado,  Dec.3i,  1903. 
Pingree  &  Smith, 

Detroit,  Mich. 
Gentlemen : — 

Your  Western  representative  called  yesterday.  Unfortu- 
nately I-was  out-of25  the-city  and-hence  was-unable-to  give- 
him  a-small  order  I-had  decided  to-place  with-your  house. 
As-your  agent  may-not50  be-here  again  in-time  for-you  to- 
get  the-order  through-him  and-have  the-stock  shipped  not 
later-than  February  ist,  I-have75  decided  to-send  the-order 
direct. 


182  PITMANIC 

You-may  ship-me  on  or  before  February  ist  ten  cases  of- 
your  composite  shoe,  assorted  sizes  from  No.100  three  to 
six,  divided  as-you  usually  do  as-to  widths.  I-desire  these 
sent  with  draft,  March  ist,  thirty -days. 

Respectfully-yours, 

John  Morton.123 

8.  Letter.     (106 — 1:45.) 

Detroit,  Mich.,  Jan.  5,  19x34. 
Mr.  John  Morton, 

Denver,  Colorado. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

We-have  your  valued  order  of  Dec.  3i.2r>  The  same  shall- 
have  our  most  careful  attention.  The-terms  you-mention 
are-entirely  satisfactory  to  us. 

We  regret  that-you  were-not  at-homer>0  when-our  Mr. 
Sanders  called.  He-had  a-number  of  new  styles  of  shoes 
which  we-were  very  anxious  for-you  to  see.  We-think75 
they-are  especially  fine.  We-are  sure  you  would  have-been 
pleased  with-them  and-would  have-placed  at-least  a-small 
order  with  Mr.100  Sanders. 

Yours-truly, 

Pingree  &  Smith.106 

9.  Translation. 


SHORTHAND  183 


LESSON  XLVIII. 

PUNCTUATION. 

1.  As  a  rule  very  few,  if  any,  marks  of  punctuation  are 
used  in  Shorthand  work,  especially  in  rapid  reporting. 

2.  When,   however,   time   permits   the   insertion   of   the 
more  important  ones,  it  is  best  to  write  them,  since  it  makes 
the  transcription  easier. 

3.  The  punctuation  marks  made  use  of  in  reporting  are 
as  follows : 

(1)  The  period  is  represented    (a)   by  a  small  cross, 
(b)  by  a  double  length  chay  written  more  nearly  perpen- 
dicular than  chay  usually  is.     A  period  may  also  be  indi- 
cated   (c)    by  leaving  a  blank  space  of   fully   an  inch  or 
more. 

(2)  The  comma,  colon,  and   semicolon  are  the  same 
as  in  longhand. 

(3)  A  dash  is  indicated  by  a  waving  line  from  a  quar- 
ter to  a  half  inch  long. 

(4)  Parentheses  and  brackets  are  the  same  as  in  long- 
hand except  that  double  dashes  are  struck  through  them. 

*     (5)     A  hyphen  is  represented  by  a  double  instead  of  a 
single  dash  as  in  longhand. 

(6)  An  interrogation  is  best  represented  by  the  sign 
for  what  joined  to  and  followed  by  a  double  length  chay. 

(7)  A   quotation  is   represented  by  two   signs   for  or 
written  side  by  side  and  closely  together. 

4.  Italicized  and  capitalized  words  and  expressions  are 
indicated  by  a  single  line  beneath  words  to  be  italicized  and 
a  double  line  beneath  words  to  be  written  in  capitals. 

5.  The  following  illustrations  show  the  marks  of  punc- 
tuation described  above : 


184  PITMANIC 

•f  >       f  *       - / 


6.     Initial  letters  are  written  as  follows  : 

\)Ti  __  y/--/^^.\ 


ABCDEFGHIJKL     M       N     OP     Q       RS     TUVW     X  Y     Z 

7.  The  outline  for  after  is  omitted  when  the  word  occurs 
between  repeated  words  as  day  after  day,  week  after  week, 
year  after  year,  man  after  man.     In  such  cases  the  word 
after  is  indicated  by  writing  the  outlines  for  the  words  pre- 
ceding and   following  it  near  together,  (the   second   being 
placed  a  little  below  the  first. 

8.  In  expressions  from  one  thing  to  another  as,  from 
place  to  place,  from  time  to  time,  from  door  to  door,  etc., 
the  outlines  for  the  words  from  and  to  are  usually  omitted, 
they  being  indicated  by   placing  the   outlines   for   the   re- 
peated words  side  by  side  and  near  to  each  other. 

9.  The  words,  of  the,  are  usually  omitted  in  very  rapid 
reporting,  they  being  indicated  by  placing  the  outlines  for 
the  preceding  and  following  words  near  to  each  other,  as 
in  king-of-the-Greeks.  • 

10.  No  confusion  need  arise  by  the  same  method  being 
adopted  to  represent  both  from-to  and  of-the,  since  with 
from-to  a  repeated  word  is  used  while  with  of-the  two  dif- 
ferent words  must  be  used. 

11.  The  word  company,  when  used  immediately  follow- 
ing the  name  of  the  company,  is  indicated  by  writing  the 
letter  kay  across  the  last  letter  in  the  outline  immediately 
preceding  as  in  Central-Mills-Company.     The  words  asso- 
ciation and  society  are  expressed  in  a  similar  way,  the  for- 
mer by  writing  ish  and  the  latter  by  writing  es  through  the 


SHORTHAND  185 

last  letter  of  the  preceding  word,  as  in  University  Oratori- 
cal-Association and  Emerson  Literary-Society. 

12.  When  the  letter  immediately  preceding  the  kay,  ish 
or  es  is  made  in  the  same  direction  as  the  letter  which  must 
be  struck  across  it,  the  first  preceding  letter  made  in  a  dif- 
ferent direction  must  be  the  one  selected  across  which  to 
write  the  ish,  kay  or  es. 

13.  These   general   methods   of   abbreviation    are    illus- 
trated as  follows : 


day-after-    from-    King-of-       Central    Mills-     Emerson    Literary-    University 

day  place-  the-Greeks  Co  Society  Oratorical- 

•to-place  Association 


EXERCISE  48. 
14.     Wordsigns. 


at-all-times    afterwards    advance-    Word-       prosperity      profit      malpractice 
ment  of-God  prophet 


landlord          intelligible      it-ought     in-the-       in-order-    Inter-          in-the- 

world         that  change       second-place 

15.     Phrases.     (60 — i  :oo.) 

i  From-city-to-city,  2  from-house-to-house,  3  tree-after- 
tree,  4  book-after-book,  5  window-after-window,  6  from- 
room-to-room,  7  from-lamp-to-lamp,25  8  from-chair-to-chair, 
9  day-of-the-week,  10  hour-after-hour,  n  result-of-the-ac- 
tion,  12  desk-after-desk,  13  policy-of-the-governor,  14  De- 
troit Publishing-Company,50  15  National  Engraving- Asso- 
ciation, 16  National  Shorthand-Society,  i/New-York  Car- 
bon-Company.00 


186  PITMANIC 

16.  Letter.     (150 — 2:30.) 

New  Albany,  Ind.,  May  15,  1904. 
Mr.  John  Phillips, 

Detroit,  Mich. 
Dear-Sir  :— 

In-reply-to  your  letter  of  May  I2.25  We  cannot-possibly 
ship-yon  before  June  I,  the-special  size  bevel-edge  glass 
for  show-cases  you-are  making.  We-have  a-very  large™ 
rush  order  of-special  sizes  for-a  New- York  dealer  who-is 
a-heavy  purchaser.  We  cannot  therefore  drop  this  and-take- 
up  your  order75  before  May  26.  This-will  enable  us-to  for- 
ward-same by  June  i.  We-hope  this-will  be-satisfactory. 
It  does' not-often  happen100  that-we-are  unable-to  give-your 
special  orders  our  immediate  attention.  Please-to-let  us 
know  at-once  whether  you-can  wait  that-long125  and-if  so, 
we-will  make-special  arrangements  to-get  the-order  out  on 
the-date  mentioned.  We-are, 

Yours-truly, 
Indiana  Plate-Glass-Co.150 

17.  Letter.     (179 — 3:00.) 

Detroit,  Mich.,  May  16,  1904. 

Indiana  Plate-Glass-Co., 

New  Albany,  Ind. 
Gentlemen : — 

I-have  just  received  your  letter  of  yesterday.25  I-have 
wired  party  for-whom  I-have  the-order  for  cases,  special 
size  glass  for-which  you-have  my  order  under-date  of  May50 
12.  He-replies  that-he-has  advertised  quite  extensively  and- 
at  great  expense,  to  open  on  June  15,  and-that  he-must- 
have75  cases  by  June  10.  Now,  if-you-can  fill  my  order, 
shipping  same  by-express  on  June  i,  it-will  give-me  six- 
days100  to-fit-up  the-cases  after  the-plate  arrives  and-allow 


SHORTHAND  187 

three-days  for-delivery.  This  gives  but-very  narrow  mar- 
gin. You-may,  however,  go125  on-with  the-work.  I-shall 
expect  to-receive  the-plate  by-express  on  June  2,  without 
fail.  I-would  much-rather  lose  on-thislr>0  job  than-to  disap- 
point this  patron  who-is  one-of-my  best  customers. 

Please  to-have  your  manager  give-this  special  order  his 
personal  attention.17'"' 

Respectfully-yours, 

John  Phillips.179" 

1 8.     Translation. 


.0 
„  < 


J  r 

^  ^J> 


LESSON  XLIX. 

MINOR  PRINCIPLES. 

i.  In  derived  words,  the  general  rule  is  to  add  such 
strokes,  hooks  or  circles  to  the  outline  for  the  primitive  as 
may  be  necessary  to  represent  the  derivative.  For  example 
the  derived  word  saying  is  written  by  adding  ing  to  es, 
the  outline  for  the  primitive  say.  The  reporter  usually 
makes  many  exceptions  to  this  rule  when  by  so  doing  speed 
may  be  gained  and  the  shorter  outline  is  legible.  This  is 


188  PITMANIC 

especially  true  where  the  primitive  has  a  somewhat  modified 
form  and  pronunciation  in  the  derivative  as  in  written 
which  has  the  outline  ret-en  instead  of  ray-te-en,  which 
would  be  the  full  outline  for  write  with  the  en  added. 

2.  Where  a  primitive  is  represented  by  a  wordsign  the 
derivative  is  formed  by  prefixing  or  affixing  the  necessary 
characters  to  the  wordsign.     For  example,  endanger  would 
be  written  en-jer. 

3.  In   compound   words   the   proper  outlines   for   each 
word  are  usually  united  without  modification.     In  case  a 
poor  angle  results  they  may  be  disjoined,  in  which  case  the 
outlines  for  the  two  parts  are  written  near  each  other. 

4.  It  may  be  necessary  to  vary  any  rule  relative  to  the 
formation  of  outlines :     ( I )  When  clearness  makes  it  neces- 
sary to  secure  distinct  angles;   (2)  When  it  is  clearly  evi- 
dent  that    more    easily    written    outlines   may    thereby    be 
secured  without  loss  of  angularity  or  without  causing  am- 
biguity. 

5.  Ordinarily,  outlines  for  words  which  should  be  capi- 
talized are  not  underscored  when  fully  vocalized.     Instances 
may  occur,  however,  when  both  a  proper  and  a  common 
noun  are  written  and  pronounced  alike  and  where,  in  a  sen- 
tence, either  would  make  complete  sense,  as  for  example : 
"He  was  living  in  the  Brown     (brown)   house."     In  such 
a  case  an  underscore  beneath  the  outline  for  brown  would 
indicate  that  the  name  Brown  was  meant,  if  such  were  the 
case ;  while  if  merely  the  color  brown  were  meant,  no  un- 
derscore  would   be   needed.     The   full   vocalization   of   the 
outline  would  not  obviate  the  difficulty. 

6.  In  all  kinds  of  reporting,  the  first  time  a  proper  name 
occurs,  unless  it  is  a  very  common  one,  it  should  be  spelled 
out  in  longhand.     After  that,  when  it  occurs  in  the  same 


SHORTHAND  189 

letter  or  report,  it  may  be  written  in  Shorthand.  The  long- 
hand will  give  the  proper  spelling  and  the  Shorthand  the 
correct  pronunciation.  For  example,  in  the  name  Beau- 
champ,  (pronounced  Beecham),  the  Shorthand  would  give 
no  intimation  of  the  unusual  spelling,  while  the  spelling 
would  not  indicate  the  pronunciation. 

7.  In  such  words  as  moral  and  immoral,  mortal  and 
immortal,  etc.,  where  the  outline  and  the  accented  vowel 
are  the  same  for  both  the  positive  and  negative  forms  it  is 
necessary  to  insert  an  initial  vowel  in  the  outline  for  the 
negative  word. 

8.  In  writing  proper  names  in  Shorthand  it  is  advisable 
not  to  write  the  outlines  too  briefly.     In   such  words  the 
outlines  should  always  be  full  enough  so  that,  if  need  be, 
the  word  may  be  completely  vocalized. 

9.  Experienced   reporters   frequently   adopt   abbreviated 
outlines  for  words  and  phrases  of  common  occurrence  in 
the  business  in  which  they  are  engaged.     Beginners  should 
not  attempt  anything  of  this  sort.     Such  special  abbrevia- 
tions may  be  learned  to  advantage  only  after  one  becomes 
familiar  with  the  peculiar  terms  common  to  the  business  in 
which  he  may  be  employed.     As  very  few  Shorthand  stu- 
dents have  any  idea  what  line  of  work  they  will  take  up, 
one  cannot  familiarize  himself  with  the  specially  contracted 
words  and  phrases  which  he  will  need  later  on. 

10.  Wordsigns. 


in-order-to    in-regard-to   infinite     intelli-       it-ought-   it-had-not     it-ought-to- 

gent  not  it-  would  -not  have-had 

to-night     at-hand 


it-wou!d    it-will    it-will           in-point-       in-his-    i<mag-    ladies-  which-  which- 
have-had  not          hava-had     of-fact          secret     ined       and-  were-  will- 
gentle-  not  not 
men 


190  PITMANIC 

EXERCISE  49. 

11.  Phrases.     (60—1:00.) 

I  In-order-to-go-there,  2  in-regard-to-my-opinion,  3  he- 
was-intelligent,  4  in-his-infinite-love,  5  an-infinite-being, 
6  it-will-have-had-enough,25  7  it-will-have-had-ten,  8  it-will- 
not-do-so,  9  it-will-not-take-any-time,  10  it-will-not-take- 
notice,  n  in-his-secret-doings,50  12  in-his-secret-influence, 
1 3  it-ought-to-have-had-occasion.60 

12.  Letter.     (400 — 6:30.) 

Manistee,  Mich.,  August  n,  1904. 

Miss  Mattie  Allison, 

Ann  Arbor,  Michigan. 
Dear  Miss  Allison  : — 

I-had  the-pleasure  of  a-visit25  from-your  brother  last  even- 
ing. Henry  told-me  that-he-had  just  heard  from-you  and- 
you  had  written  him  how-you  were  getting  along50  at-the 
Stenographic  Institute.  From  what  he-said  I-judge  that- 
you  have-just-had  the-last  lesson  in-your  text-book  and- 
would  begin75  a-review  next  week.  I-think  you-have  done 
remarkably  well  to-have  completed  the-lessons  so  soon.  I- 
know  your  text-book  is  much100  simpler  than  the-one  I- 
studied.  This  no-doubt  makes  the-work  considerably  easier. 

What  I-had  especially  in  mind  when  I-began  this  letter125 
was  to-impress  upon  you  the-necessity  of  committing  the 
Wordsigns  very  thoroughly.  Although  our  teacher  told-us 
over-and-over-again  to-do  this,150  we  students  did-not  real- 
ize of  how  much-importance  this  was  until  after-we-had 
taken-positions.  Then  I-found  that  I-had  thoughtlessly 
neglected175  one-of  the-important-parts  of  Shorthand.  An- 
other-thing  to-which  I-did-not  give-enough-attention  was 
practice.  There  were-several  girls  in-our200  class  and-we 


SHORTHAND  191 

often  wasted  in-gossip  hours  which  should-have-been  given 
to-earnest  practice.  I-know-that  I-might  have  completed 
the- work-25  several  weeks  sooner  had-it  not  been  for- 
this.  I-know  yon-have  an-excellent  teacher,  but  no  matter 
how-good-the  instruction  you-cannot250  hope  tormake  a- 
success  unless  you,  yourself,  do-some  hard  work.  You- will 
pardon  me  for-being  so-very  plain.  I-only  wish  someone275 
in-whom  I -had  confidence  bad-written  me  thus  while  I-was 
in-school.  Having-taken  the-course  at-which  you-are  now 
at  work300  and-then  having-gone  directly  to-work  as-an- 
amanuensis,  I-feel  that  I-am  in-a-position  to-talk  to-you  in- 
a-manner25  that-will-be  of  benefit  to-you.  Still  I-probably 
should-not  write-thus  plainly  if  I-did-not  know-you  to-be 
a-sensible330  girl  and-would  take-this  in-the-right  spirit. 
I -would  be-pleased  to-hear  from-you  from-time-to-time  as- 
your  work  progresses.375  When-you  finish-the-course  I- 
think  I-can  be  of-some  assistance  to-you  in  securing  you  a- 
position.  Very-truly-yours, 

Florence-  Jennings.400 
13.     Translation. 


192  PITMANIC 


LESSON  L. 

REVIEW. 

i.     QUESTIONS: 

(1)  What  prefixes  are  represented  by   dots? 

(2)  Give  two  examples  of  each. 

(3)  What  prefixes  are  represented  by  the  s-circle? 

(4)  Give  two  examples  of  each. 

(5)  What  prefixes  are  represented  by  a  slanting  tick? 

(6)  Is  the  tick  joined  to  what  folows? 

(7)  In  what  direction  does  the  tick  slant? 

(8)  What  prefix  does  the  disjoined  em  represent? 

(9)  Give  two  examples. 

(10)  What  prefixes  are  represented  by  a  joined  half 
length  en? 

( 1 1 )  Give  an  example  of  each. 

(12)  How  is  the  prefix  post  written? 

(13)  How  are  con,  com  and  cog  represented  when 
they  occur  between  two  other  consonants  in  a  word  ? 

( 14)  Is  it  wise  for  a  beginner  to  sometimes  omit  the 
prefix  for  con,  com  and  cog? 

(15)  When  a  word  ends  in  ble,  bel,  bal  or  ful  and  it 
is  not  convenient  to  use  the  1-hook,  how  are  these  endings 
written  ? 

(16)  How  is  the  ending  ship  represented? 

(17)  Is  it  ever  allowable  to  disjoin  the  character  used 
to  represent  this  ending? 

(18)  How  is  the  ending  ing  sometimes  written? 

(19)  In   what  cases  only  is  it  allowable  to  use  the 
dot  for  the  ending  ing? 

(20)  In  similar  cases,  where  we  have  the  ending  ings, 
how  is  it  written? 


SHORTHAND  193 

(21)  Give  examples  of  the  proper  use  of  the  special 
signs  for  the  endings  ing  and  ings. 

(22)  How  are  the  endings  self  and  selves  written? 

(23)  Give  two  examples  of  each. 

(24)  How  is  the  ending  hood  written? 

(25)  Give  two  illustrations. 

(26)  How  is  the  ending  ever  written? 

(27)  When  the  syllable  so  precedes  the  ending  ever 
how  is  it  written  ? 

(28)  Give  two  examples  each  of  the  use  of  the  ending 
ever  and  the  use  of  the  s-circle  for  so. 

(29)  How  are  the  endings  ility,  arity  and  ality  rep- 
resented ? 

(30)  Are  the  marks  of  punctuation  generally  written 
in  reporting? 

(31)  In  what  three  ways  may  the  period  be  repre- 
sented in  Shorthand? 

(32)  When   used,   how   are  the  comma,   semicolon 
and  colon  written? 

(33)  How  is  the  dash  written  in  Shorthand? 

(34)  In  what  way  do  parentheses  and  brackets  in 
Shorthand  differ  from  those  in  longhand? 

(35)  How  is  the  Shorthand  hyphen  written? 

(36)  How  is  a  question  indicated  in  Shorthand? 

(37)  How  are  capitalized  and  italicized  words  indi- 
cated ? 

(38)  Give  the  alphabet  in  Shorthand. 

(39)  How  are  from  and  to  indicated  when  used  in 
an  expression  from  one  thing  to  another? 

(40)  How  is  of  the  indicated  in  certain  cases? 

(41)  How  are  the  words  company,  association  and 
society  sometimes  written? 


194  PITMANIC 

(42)     How  are  the  outlines  for  derived  words  formed? 
(43.)     If  a  primitive   is   represented   by   a  wordsign 
how  is  a  word  derived'  from  the  primitive  written? 

(44)  Is  it  ever  necessary  to  underscore  proper  names 
when  fully  vocalized? 

(45)  When  should  a  proper  name  be  written  out  in 
longhand  ? 

(46)  When   an   affirmative   and   negative   have  the 
same  outline  how  is  the  negative  indicated  ? 

(47)  Should  every  possible   contraction   be  .used   in 
outlines  for  proper  names? 

(48)  Is  it  advisable  for  the  student  to  learn  abbrevia- 
tions used  only  in  special  lines  of  business? 

EXERCISE  50. 

2.  List  Words.     (30— 145.) 

Contemplate  construe  anticipation  circumference  recom- 
pense companion  counterpoise  postman  interval  recognize 
inconsistent  concern  unconscious  conversion  contemplation 
permissible  cannibal  wardenship  rusting  himself  yourselves 
reliability  instrumentality  mentality  brutality25  popularity 
familiarity  admissibility  inhospitality  instability.30 

3.  Wordsigns. 

As-great-as,  able-to,  at-any-rate,  able-to-give-it,  at-all-its, 
constructive,  conseqitence,  .consequent,  Consequential,  com- 
prehend, comprehension,  consider,  consideration,  confiden- 
tial, calculate,  great-extent,  greater-than,  Great-Britain, 
heretofore,  hesitate,  human-nature,  intellect,  intelligence,  in- 
competent, part,  (party,)  individual,  there-would-not,  which- 
ought-to-have-had,  which-have-.had,  which- would-have-had, 
which-are-not,  such-ought-to-have-had,  such-have-had, 
such-wonld-have-had,  posterity,  postscript,  people-of- 
God,  particular,  partake,  political,  or-not,  onward,^ 


SHORTHAND  195 

opportunity,  on-the-one-hand,  on-either-hand,  on-the-other- 
hand,  at-all-times,  afterwards,  advancement,  Word-of-God, 
prosperity,  profit,  (prophet,)  malpractice,  landlord,  intelli- 
gible, it-ought,  in-the-world,  in-order-that,  interchange,  in- 
the-se'cond-place,  in-order-to,  in-regard-to,  infinite,  intelli- 
gent, it-ought-not,  (to-night,)  it-had-not,  (it-would-not,  at- 
hand,)  it-ought-to-have-had,  it-would-have-hacl,  it-\vill-not, 
it-will-have-had,  in-point-of-fact.  in-his-secret,  imagined, 
ladies-and-gentlemen,  which- were-not,  which- will-not. 

4.  Phrases,     (in — 1:50.) 

As-great-as-can-be  abie-to-call  was-able-to  was-at-all-its 
they-will-calculate-it  greatef-than-any  was-human-nature'->n 
strong-intellect  very-great-extcnt  such-a-temperamcnt  in-a- 
postscript  a-new-party  will-partake  he-keeps-onward  a-poor- 
casting  saw-a-cannibalr'°  worship-the-king  take-it-himself 
1-will-take-it-myself  from-city-to-city  tree-after-tree  win- 
do  w-after-window  irom-room-to-room"  from-chair-to-chair 
hour-after-hour  National  Engraving-Association  in-order- 
to-go-there  he-was-intelligent  an-infinite-being  it-will-have- 
had1"0  it-will-not-take-any  it-ought-to-have-had-occasion.111 

5.  Letter.     (167—2:45.) 

Iowa  City,  Iowa,  May  n,  1904. 
Mr.  John  Young, 

Springfield,  111. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

Are-you  still  engaged  in  the-manufacture25  of-rotary 
churns?  A-gentleman  in-this  city  has  recently  purchased 
a-large  dairy-farm  near  here  and-intends  to-go  into  the-but- 
ter-making50  business  very  largely. 

Since  learning  of-this  yesterday  it-has  occurred  to-me 
that  the-rotary  churn  which-you  were  manufacturing  when- 
I-was  in75  Springfield  would-be  just  the-thing  for-him.  If- 


196  PITMANIC 

you  are  still  interested  in-this  business,  send  me  your  de- 
scriptive catalogue  and-I-will  place100  it  in  the-hands  of 
the-aforesaid  gentleman  and-at  the-same  time  personally 
urge-him  to  adopt  the-churn  you-are  making.  Knowing 
what1-5  I-do  of-it,  I-am  sure  it-would  pleas^-him.  If-you- 
like  you-might  also  write  the-gentleman  direct.  His  name 
is  Henry150  Patterson,  and-mail  will  reach-him  addressed 
simply,  Iowa  City,  Iowa.  I-am, 

Sincerely-yours, 

John  Elfring.107 

6.  Letter.     (84 — 1 120.) 

Lexington,  Ky.,  Jan.   I,   1904. 
John  Phillips, 

Detroit,  Mich. 
My-Dear-Sir : — 

Will-you  please  send  to-me  at-once  a-catalogue2r>  of-your 
various  styles  of  show-cases.  I-am-preparing  to  open  a- 
jewelry  store  in-this  city  in-a-short-time  and-shall  want50 
several  cases  especially  for-this  line  of  business.  . 

With-your  catalogue  be-sure  to  name  discounts  for  cash 
with  order.  A-prompt  reply  will  confer75 -a-favor.  I-am, 

Very-truly-yours, 

Thomas  Ackerson.84 

7.  Letter.     (150 — 2:30.) 

New  Albany,  Ind.,  May  15,  1904. 
Mr.  John  Phillips, 

Detroit,  Mich. 
Dear-Sir : — 

In-reply-to  your  letter  of  May  I2.25  We  cannot-possibly 
ship-you  before  June  i,  the-special  size  bevel-edge  glass 
for  show-cases  you-are  making.  We-have  a-very  large50 
rush  order  of-special  sizes  for-a  New- York  dealer  who-is 
a-heavy  purchaser.  We  cannot  therefore  drop  this  and-take- 


SHORTHAND  197 

up  your  order75  before  May  26.  This-will  enable  us-to  for- 
ward-same by  June  i.  We-hope  this- will  be-satisfactory. 
It  does  not-often  happen100  that-we-are  unable-to  give-your 
special  orders  our  immediate  attention.  Please-to-let  us 
know  at-once  whether  you-can  wait  that-long125  and-if  so, 
we-will  make-special  arrangements  to-get  the-order  out  on 
the-date  mentioned.  We-are, 

Yours-truly, 
Indiana  Plate-Glass-Co.150 

8.     Letter.     (179 — 3:00.) 

Detroit,  Mich.,  May  16,  1904. 
Indiana  Plate-Glass-Co., 

New  Albany,  Ind. 
Gentlemen : — 

I-have  just  received  your  letter  of  yesterday.25  I-have 
wired  party  for-whom  I-have  the-order  for  cases,  special 
size  glass  for-which  you-have  my  order  under-date  of  May50 
12.  He-replies  that-he-has  advertised  quite  extensively  and- 
at  great  expense,  to  open  on  June  15,  and-that  he-must- 
have75  cases  by  June  10.  Now,  if-you-can  fill  my  order, 
shipping  same  by-express  on  June  I,  it-will  give-me  six- 
days100  to-fit-up  the-cases  after  the-plate  arrives  and-allow 
three-days  for-delivery.  This  gives  but-very  narrow  mar- 
gin. You-may,  however,  go125  on-with  the-work.  I-shall 
expect  to-receive  the-plate  by-express  on  June  2,  without 
fail.  I-would  much-rather  lose  on-this150  job  than-to  disap- 
point this  patron  who-is  one-of-my  best  customers. 

Please  to-have  your  manager  give-this  special  order  his 

personal  attention.175 

Respectfully-yours, 

John  Phillips.179 


WORDSIGNS. 


C' 


able-to 
able-to-givi-it 

about 

according 

aceording-to 

accuracy 
accurate 
acknowledge 

acquit 

Ai-t-of-congress 

acute 

advancement 

advantage 

advantageous 

advertise 

:ised 
advertisement 

advertising 

after 

afternoon 

afterwards 

again-and-again 

ah 

all 

all-the-world 

almighty 

already 
always 
A.  M. 

America 

an 

and 

angel 

another-one 

any 

any-other 
anywhere 
appear 


as-great-as 

as-has 
as-is 

as-it 

as-it-were 

associate 

as-soon-as 


'astonish 

;ished 
astonishment 

as-well-as 
at-an-events 

at-all-its 

at-all-times 

at-any-rate 

at -first 
at-hand 

at-k 

a,t-Iength 

at-once 

at-the-first 

aware 
awe 

awhile 

aye 

Baptist 

because 

become 

before 

before-hand 

began 
beg-in 
begun 

behalf 
beheld 

behold 

belief 

believe 

belong 

belonged 

beneficial 

benevolence 

benevolent 

be-not 

better-than 

beyond 

brother 


but 

by-the-first 

by-way-of-illustration 


13 


i-annot 

capa&le 

care 

careful 

carefully 

Catholic 

challenge 
change  > 

chapter 

character 

child 

Children 

Christian 

Christianity 

circulate 

circumstance 

circumstances 

circumstantial 


circumstances-of-the-case 

C.    O.    D. 

collect  


collective 

collectively 

come 

commercial 

common 

company 

comply 

comprehend 

comprehension 

confession 

confidential 

connection 

connective 

consecutive 

consecutively 

consequence 

consequent 

consequential 

consider 
consideration 
Const!  tut  ion  -of-the- 
United-States 





<  o-operate 

correct 

cross-examination 

cross-examine 

cure 

danger 

dare-not  „ 

dark 

darken 


darkens 

darkness 

dear 

Dear-Sir 

December 

degree 


deliberation 
delight 
..4...       deliver 

deliverance 
delivered 
delivery 


denominate 

denomination 

denominational 

derivative 

derive 

describe 

descriptive 
destruction 
determination 

determine 

develop 

developed 

development 

did-not 

differ 

differed 

difference 

different 

difficult 

difficulty 

dignity 

disadvantage 

disagree 

disappear 

dissatisfaction 

doctor 

doctrtne 

do-it 

dollar 

domestic 

do-not 

downward 

during 

each-will 

each-will-have 

east-and-wes* 

efficient 
electric 
electricity 


.L 


L    C. 


especial 
especially 

:ial 
laHy 

establish 

es-tablished 

establishment 

etc. 

Kurope 

European 

ever 

ever-and-ever 

i  ing 
everlasting-life 

every 

-one 

examination 

exchange 

expect 

expected 

experience 

explanation 

express 

expression 

external 

extraordinary 

eye 
fact 
failure 

faithful 

faithfully 

falsehood 

familiar 

fear-of-God 

featuie 

February 
figurative 
figuratively 

first 

follow 

for 

for-ever-and-ever 

forgive 

for-instance 

for-it 

forsake 

for-the-first-time 

for-the-most-rart 
for-the-purpose-of 
for-the-sake-of 

forthwith 
forward 


;.-»...!. 


\ 


L 


..\n  .. 


from-flrst-to-1 
from-lt 

future 

gave-it 
general 
generally 

generation 

n-.an 
gentlemen 

give 

give-it 
given 

givc-s-us 

glory 

glorious 

good-and-bad 
govei  n 

governed 

government 

governor 

Great-Britain 

greater-than 

great-extent. 
guilt 

guilty 

had 

had-lt 

half 
hand 
hand-in-hand 

handsome 

hand-writing 

happen 

happiness 

happy 

hard 

hardware 
has 

has-his 

hath 
have 
have-had 

have-It 

have-not 
hazard 

he 

health 

hear 

heard 
heart 
heathen 

Heaven 

height 

held 


( -^ 


PI  I 


help 

hence 

her 

here 

herein 

here-to-fore 

hesitate 

high 

higher 

highly 
highway 
him          , 

his 

his-has 

his-is 

historian 

history 

hol-d 

holiness 

holy 

home 

honor 

honorable 

hope 

how 

however 

howsoever 

human 

human-life 

human-nature 

humble 
humor 
hundred 

I 

idea 
if-it 

illegible 
Imagine 
imagined 

immediate 

immediately 

importance 

important 
impossible 
improve 

improved 

improvement 

in 

inaccurate 

in-as-many 

inclination 

income 

Incompetent 

individual 


*\ 


.^L 


\ 

^ 


1. 


inductive 

inductively 

infinite 

influence 

influential 

information 

in-his-description 
in-his-exi>erience 
in-his-expression 

in-has-secret 

in-his-situation 

in-his-usual 

in-order-ithat 

in-order-to 

in-point-of-fact 

Inquiry 

in-j-eference-to 

in-regard-to 

in-reply-to 

in-respect-to 

in-response-to 

in-seeming 

insignificant 

in-some 

intellect 

intelligible 

Intelligence 

intelligent 

interchange 

in-the-seeond-place 

in -the- world 

•invention 

irregular 

Is 

is-as 

is-hls 

ls-lt 

is-said 

is-said-to-have 

is-seen 
ds-such 
it-had 

It-'had-not 

it-ought 

it-ought-not 

it-ough  t-  to-havo 

it-ought-to-'have-had 

it-will 

it-will-have 

it-will-have-had 

it-wlll-not 

it-would 

it-would-have 

it-would-have-had 


I     ,T    K     I. 


JVI    1ST    O 


it-would-not 
January 

Jesus-Christ 

junior 

just-been 

just-come 

just-had 

justice-of-the-peace 

just-what 

knowledge 

ladies-and-gentlemen 

landlord 

/anguage 

large 

larger 

larger-  than 

later-than 

laws-of-health 

laws-of-'life 

lawver 

legible 

legislative 

liberal 

liberty 

liberty-of-'the-'peop'lfc 

liberty-of-the-press 

longer-than 

Lord 

Lord-  Jesus-  Christ 

loves-us  , 

magazine 

magnificence 

magnificent 

majority 

malpractice 

manner 


manuscript 

may-as-well 

may-be 

may-not 
measure 
member 


membe.r-of-congress 

member-of-the-legislature 

merciful 


rnercy 
mere 

messenger 

minority 
mistake 
more 


more-or-less 

more-than 

mortgage 

most-important 

most-likely 

mostly 

Mr. 

much 
muchrwlll 

much- will-have 
must-be 
must -come 

must-do 

must-expect 

must-give 

must-have 

must-like 

must-make 

myself 

mystery 

natural 


negligent 

neighborhood 

never 

never-the-less 
New-Hampshire 

New- York 

New- York-City 

next 

next-time 

no-other 

nor 

North- America 

Northwest 

Northwestern 

nothing 

notwithstanding 

November 

now 

nowhere 
number 
object 

objection 
objective 
objectively 

occur 

of 

of-it 

of-thelr 

oh 

Ohio 


\. 


Q     M    S 


on 

on-either-hand 

one-of-the-best 

one-of-the-most 

one-or-two 

only 

on-the-one-hand 

on-the-other-hand 

onward 


oppression 

or 

organize 

or-not 
ought 
ougfit-to-have 

our- own 

out-of 

over-and-over-agaln 

overwhelm 

owe 

owner 

ownership 

part 

partake 


peculiarity 

people 

people-of-God 

perfect 

perfection 

perform 

perhaps 
pleasure 
P.  M. 

political 
popular 
posterity 

postmark 
postoffice 
postcript 


practice 
princiral 
principle 

probability 

probable 

probably 


proficiency 

proficient 

profit 

proper 

property 

prophet 

prosperity 
providence 
providential 

public 

publish 

published 

punish 

punished 

punishment 

pure 

question 

quick 

quite 

railway-car 

rather 

rather-than 

recollect 

reduction 

reflective 

reflectively 

reform 


religion 

relinquish 

remark 

remarkable 

remember 

represent 

representation 
representative 
represented 

respect 

respectability 

respectable 

respectful 

respectfully 

responsible 

revelation 
revolution 
said-to-have 

salvation 

satisfaction 

satisfactory 

satisfied 

satisfy 

Savior 


vv\ 





S    T     U 


scrip,  i'  re 

sure 

secure 

surprise 

senior                  V            

suspicion 

ret-forth 

set-off 
several 

L        takes-us 
tell 
tell-it 

shall                                            i 

tell-us 

shorthand                                y 
should                                .  .  s.  

temperament 
,         temperance 

fUfnf^vre 

t.                temperate 

si  srTii^  ^a  n  t 

temptation 

signification                     

territory 

sicnlfv                                 /^>     — 

testament 

sfmilar 

testimony 

similarity                         

thank 

simple 
simplv 

P./       that 
the 

single                                   

their 

siv-or-seven 

them 

some-one 

the-other 

some-other                       

the-other-one 

some-ntber-one 

there 

some'h'ing 

therefore 

some-time                         £?X 

^.  t'here-would-not 

somewhat 

they-are 

Pou'^-Amerlca 

they-are-not 

spenk                                 

they-will 

special                              p 

thins: 

sneech                                    \ 
spirit                                    .\  

think 
this-is 

spoke                                  p 

this-system 

snoken 
square                              .X  

this-  will 
three-or-four 

stenographer 

till-lt 

<••<  nog-raphlc 

to 

stenography                     

to-be 

subject                             & 

to-become 

subi'ective                         ^T 
such-a-one                       \  

together 
told 

such-are 

to-night 

sroh-are-not 

too 

such-are-to-have            

toward 

such-hflve-had 

towards 

sir-h-oup-ht-to-have 

truth 

such-ought-to-have-had    

try-to-have 

^nch-were 

twelve 

•^uch-were-not 

two 

such-were-to-have         

two-or-three 

"i.ic-h-will 

unconcerned 

s  n  ch-wou  Id-have 

under 

such-would-have-had    

undergo 

sufficient 
s'.'ffieiently 
suppress                           \-ri  

understand 
uniform 
union 

1 


unite 

United-States 

unity 

universal 

universe 

university 

unless 

until 

unt'il-it 

upon-his 

upon-lt 

use-it 


virtue 

was 

Washing-ton 


we-are-not 

welcome 

well 

we-may 
we-must 
were 

were-not 
Western 
West-Virginia 

we- will 

what 

whatever 

when 
where 
which 

wTiich-are 
which-are-not 
which -a  re- to-have 

whichever 

which-had-not 

which-have 

which-have-had 

WMch-not 

which-oug-ht-not 


which-ought- to-have 
which-ougM-  to-have-had 
which-were-not 


which- were- to-have 
whieh-will 
whitfh-  will-have 

which- will-not 
wh'ich-wouid-have 
which- would-have-had 

which- would-not 

while 

white 

who 

who-ever 

who-have  J 

whole 
wholly 
whom 

whose 

why 

why-not 

will 

will-not 

wisdom  I 

wash 
with 
withdraw 

with-Tiim 

within 

with-me 

with-my 
without 
\vith-regard-to 

wifh-whom 

witness 

word 

word-of-God 

world 

would 

ye 

year 

yesterday 

yet 
you 
young 

your 

yourself 
yours-truly 


youth 


J 


f... 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


FLfc  i 

SEP  1819511 
JUL87WW 

KECTD  MID 

SEP  2  8  1961 


Form  L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)444 


UNIVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 

AT 
LOS  ANGELES 


A     000  583  835     4 


Z$6 

M795 

190U 


:- 
WYER 


